LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


GIFT    OF 


Class 


w.:-» 


. d. 


BRICKLAYING 
SYSTEM 


BY 


FRANK  B.  GILBRETH 


M.  Am.  Soc.  M.  E. 


NEW  YORK  AND  CHICAGO 
THE  MYRON  C.  CLARK  PUBLISHING  CO. 


LONDON 

E.  &  F.  N.  SPON,  LTD.,  57  Haymarket 


i 


Copyright  1909 

By 
FRANK  B.  GILBRETH 

Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall,  London,  Eng.,  1909 


of 

THE  WESTERN  NEWSPAPER  UNION- 
CHICAGO 


:< 


TA1JLE   OF   CONTEXTS. 

Page 
CHAPTER  1.— TRAINING  APPRENTICES   (Rules  1-40) 1-10 

1.  Number   of    Apprentices 1 

2.  Term  of  Apprenticeship 1 

3.  Tools    2 

4.  Teachers 2 

5.  Amount   of   Work    Required .  .  . 2 

6.  Methods  of  Instruction 3 

7.  Motion   Study   4 

8.  System   Study    10 

CHAPTER  II.— METHODS  OF  MANAGEMENT  (Rules  47-03) ..  11-18 

1.  Selection  and  Grouping  of  Men 11 

2.  Division  of  Work.  . . 12 

3.  Athletic  Contests    13 

4.  Score   Keeping    13 

5.  Checking  up  of  Work 16 

6.  Rewards  and  Bonuses 18 

CHAPTER    III.— METHODS    OF    CONSTRUCTION    (Rules    04- 

111)    10-27 

1.  Provision   for   Material    10 

2.  Construction  Calendar   10 

3.  Adaptation  of  Method  of  Attack  to  the  Job  in    Hand 10 

4.  Application  of  Methods  of  Construction  to  a  Typical  Job.  .  .  20 

CHAPTER  IV.— ROUTING  OF  MATERIAL   (Rules  112-131) ...  .28-35 

1.  Selection  of  Transportation   Devices  and  Apparatus 28 

2.  Inclined    Runways    for   Horses   and   Carts 28 

3.  Tower    for    Superintending   Job    and   Giving   Transportation 

Directions 31 

4.  Platforms    for   Receiving    Materials 32 

5.  Boom    Derricks    32 

6.  Derrick  with  Slewing  Rig  Erected  on  a  Tower 32 

7.  Material    Elevators     33 

CHAPTER  V.— SCAFFOLDS    (Rules  132-104) 36-58 

1.  Selection   of   Scaffold   Best   Suited  to  the  Job 36 

2.  Various   Scaffolds  Used  on  a   Typical  Job 36 

3.  Outrigger    Scaffold    36 

Boston  Scaffold 44 

Murray   Suspended   Scaffold    51 

Hanging    Bar    Scaffold    52 

CHAPTER    VI.— THE    GILBRETH     SCAFFOLD— HOD    TYPE 

(Rules    105-244)     ,  .50-74 

1.  Advantages  of   the   Gilbrcth    Scaffold 50 

2.  Directions    for    Setting    Up 61 

3.  Platforms     64 

4.  Placing  of    Mortar   Boxes 65 

5.  Jacking  Up    66 

6.  Comparison    with    Other    Scaffolds 60 

7.  Sequence  of   Building  Different  Portions  of  a  Wall 73 

8.  Taking  Down   Horses    74 

iii. 


186516 


iv.  CONTENTS. 

Page 
CHAPTER     VII.— THE     GILBRETH      SCAFFOLD  —  PACKET 

TYPE   (Rules  245-271)    75-84 

1.  Advantages  of  the  Packet  Type  of  Gilbreth   Scaffold 75 

2.  Setting  up   the   Scaffold 75 

3.  Platforms     76 

4.  Placing  of   Mortar   Boxes 77 

5.  Tracks   for  Packets    77 

6.  Regulating  the  Height  of  the  Scaffold. . 81 

CHAPTER  VIIL— THE  GILBRETH   PACKET  SYSTEM   (Rules 

272-296)      85-91 

1.  The  Packet 85 

2.  Method  of  Handling  Packs  from  Stock  Pile  to  Bricklayer.  85 

3.  Number  of  Bricks  on  a  Packet 89 

4.  Conveying  Packet  from  Platform  to  Wall 89 

5.  Economy  Gained  by  the  Use  of  Packet  System 90 

CHAPTER  IX.— METHOD  OF  BUILDING  TALL  CHIMNEYS 

(Rules  297-340)    92-103 

1.  Conveying  Bricks  and  Mortar  From  Stock  Pile  to  Elevator  92 

2.  Elevator 92 

3.  Handling  of  Brick 93 

4.  Handling  of  Mortar    93 

5.  Scaffold  at  the  Top  of  the  Chimney 93 

6.  Covering  of  the  Well  Opening -. 94 

7.  Laying  Brick  in  Round   Chimneys 94 

8.  Inspecting  the  Set  of  the  Mortar 94 

9.  Protecting  Workmen  from  Falling  Brick 94 

10.     Typical   Example  of  Methods  of  Constructing  a  Tall  Chimney.  97 

CHAPTER  X.— MORTAR    (Rules  341-381) 104-113 

1.  Digging  and  Loading  Sand 104 

2.  Screening  Sand   105 

3.  Amount  of  Sand  to  be  Used  in  Mortar 105 

4.  Amount  of  Lime  or  Cement  to  be  Used  in  Mortar 105 

5.  Handling  of  Lime  Mortar   106 

6.  Handling  of  Cement   Mortar 106 

7.  The  Mortar  Bed 107 

8.  The    Mortar   Box 108 

9.  Tempering  the  Mortar  on  the  Stock  Platform 108 

10.  Covering  a  Steel  Frame  with  Mortar Ill 

11.  Deterioration  of  Wood  Caused  by  Mortar 113 

12.  Bedding  Long  Stones    ". 113 

CHAPTER  XL— BRICKS   (Rules  382-430) 114-119 

1.  Relative  Qualities  of  Brick 114 

2.  Determining  the  Absorptiveness  of  Bricks 114 

3.  Ordering  Special  Shaped  -Bricks   115 

4.  Profitable  Bricks  for  Arches    115 

5.  Wooden   Bricks    116 

6.  Sizes  of  Bricks    116 

7.  Depressions   in  Bricks   116 

8.  Culling  Bricks    118 

9.  Wetting   Bricks   Before   Laying 119 

CHAPTER  XII.— BRICKLAYERS'  TOOLS,  ETC.    (Rules   431- 

473)     120-131 

1.  Short  Plumb  Rule    120 

2.  Long  Plumb  Rule   120 

3.  Jointer 120 


CONTENTS.  v. 

Page 

4.  Gage     121 

5.  Cutting  Out    Hammer    121 

6.  Trowels : 121 

7.  Set     : 121 

8.  Sharpening  Tools    123 

9.  Hand    Leathers    126 

10.  New  Devices  and  Methods 127 

CHAPTER  XIII.— LINES,  PLUMBS  AND  POLES  (Rules  474- 

1.  Advantages   of  a   Tight  Line 132 

2.  Linen  Mason's  Line 132 

3.  Stringing    Lines     132 

4.  Use  of  Spirit  Plumb  Rule  and  Plumb  Bob 133 

5.  The  Trig    133 

6.  Splicing  the   Line    134 

7.  The  Story  Pole    135 

8.  The  Plumb  Bond  Pole   136 

9.  Use  of  Level  Marks    . 137 

10.  Use  of  Grade  Marks    137 

11.  Sighting  for  Plumb,  Level  and  Straight 138 

12.  Checking  of  Measurements    139 

CHAPTER  XIV.— MOTION  STUDY   (Rules  526-600) 140-160 

1.  Importance  of   Motion   Study    140 

2.  Classifying  Men  by  Conformity  to   Prescribed   Methods....    142 

3.  Purposes  of  Motion  Charts   143 

4.  Description  of  Motion  Charts    147 

CHAPTER   XV.— METHODS    OF    LAYING    BRICK    UNDER 

SPECIAL  CONDITIONS    (Rules  601-636) 161-164 

1.  Laying  Brick   in   Freezing  Weather 161 

2.  Laying  Brick  to  a   Curved   Vertical   Surface 162 

3.  Laying  Brick  Below  Ground    162 

4.  Laying  Brick  Against  the  Wall  of  an  Adjoining  Property..  162 

5.  Laying    Fire    Brick    163 

CHAPTER  XVI.— FINISHING,  JOINTING  AND   POINTING 

(  Rules   637-653)     165-169 

1.  Various  Methods  of  Finishing 165 

2.  Preparing  the   Wall  for  the   Finish 165 

3.  Preparing  the  Joint  for  Jointing 166 

4.  Method  of  Using  the  Jointer 166 

5.  Marking  the  Location  of  the  Vertical  Joints 166 

6.  Marking  the   Horizontal   Joints 167 

7.  Painting   in    Joints    168 

8.  Pointing  Brickwork    168 

CHAPTER     XVII.— ARCHES     AND     CHIMNEY     BREASTS 

(Rules   654-717)     170-180 

1.  Selecting   Men  to   Cut    Arches 170 

2.  Patterns    for   Arches    170 

3.  Method  of  Cutting  Brick  for  Arches 170 

4.  Marking  and  Packing  Brick  for  Arches 170 

5.  Methods  of  Laying  and  Bonding  Arches 176 

6.  Methods  of  Constructing  and  Bonding  Chimney  Breasts....  178 

CHAPTER  XVIII.— TEARING  DOWN,  CUTTING  OUT  AND 

PATCHING   BRICKWORK    (Rules  718-811) 181-199 

1.  Throwing  Over  Large   Sections  of  Walls 181 

2.  Chutes  for  Disposing  of  Bricks 181 


vi.  CONTENTS. 

Page 

3.  Methods   of  Cutting  Out   Old   Brickwork 182 

4.  Methods  of  Filling  Joints  184 

5.  Filling  and   Patching   190 

6.  Bonding  Old  Brickwork  to  New 192 

7.  Toothing  and    Blocking    103 

CHAPTER  XIX.— BOND    (Rules  812-074) 200-225 

1.  Definitions    of    Bond    200 

2.  Reasons   for   Imbedding  Brick   in   Mortar 200 

3.  Purposes   of   Bond    . . .' 200 

4.  Methods  of  Laying  Out  Bond  for   Common   "Run   of   Kiln" 

Brick     .' 201 

5.  Laying  Out  Bond  Around  and  Past  a  Pilaster 201 

6.  Laying  Out  Bond   Past  Openings 201 

7.  Laying  Out  Bond  on  Plumb  Bond  Work 202 

8.  Laying  Out  Bond  Where  Bricks  are  Culled  for  Color 202 

0.  Laying  Out  Bond  for  Short  Lengths  of  Wall 203 

10.  Various  Methods  of  Bonding  Face  Brick  to  Backing 203 

11.  Bonding  Various  Tiers  in  Themselves  and  to  Each  Other..  205 

12.  Leveling  up  Backing  to  Face  Tier  of  Face  Brick 20<> 

13.  Common  Bond    200 

14.  All   Stretcher  Bond 21(5 

15.  Flemish  Bond 217 

16.  Flemish   Cross   Bond    218 

17.  English  Bond    218 

18.  English  ,  Cross   Bond    210 

10.  Garden   Wall   Bond    220 

20.  Flemish  Spiral  Bond    220 

21.  Herringbone   Bond    221 

22.  .  Laying  Out  Ornamental  Bonds 221 

23.  Selection  of  Bonds  Suitable  to  Decorative  Patterns 223 

24.  Units  Which  May  be  Successfully  Used  in  Ornamental  Bonds  224 
•  25.  Gilbreth   Bond  Charts    ". .226 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Fig. 

1.  Hand    Made    Brick 

2.  Wire   Cut   Brick 

3.  One  Brick  Upside  Down 

4.  Laying  Brick  Without  Disturbing  the  Line 5 

5.  Picking  Up  Stock  with  Both  Hands  at  the  Same  Time 7 

7'    ,-  Throwing  Mortar   for  Two   Brick 8 

8.  Shield   on    Which   to    Shovel 17 

9.  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology.     July  13,  1902 -.  .  .   21 

10.  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology.     July  20,   1902 22 

11.  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology.     July  27,   1902 23 

12.  Massachusetts   Institute  of  Technology.     Aug.   3,  1902 24 

13.  Massachusetts   Institute  of  Technology.     Aug.   10,   1902 25 

14.  Massachusetts   Institute  of  Technology.     Aug.   17,   1902 26 

15.  Methods  of  Routing  on  an   Eight  Acre  Job 29 

16.  Specimen   Driveway  to  all   Floors 30 

17.  Tower  Sixty  Feet  High  from  Which  Transportation  \vas  Superintended  31 

18.  Sidewalk  Traps  for  Rapid  Handling  of  Material 32 

19.  Heavy  Mill  Construction   Building  in   which   all  Material  was   Hoisted 

by  Two  Seventy-five  Foot  Boom  Derricks 33 

20.  Derrick  with  Slewing  Rig  Erected  on  a  Pedestal  Two  Stories  High    in 

San  Francisco    34 

21.  Bricks  Piled   for  Lowering  into  a  Trench 35 

22.  A  Mill  Building  in  Montreal.     Observe  the  Dates 37 

23.  Boom    Derrick   w^ith    Boom    Slewing  Rig  Attached,   which   Hoisted   all 

Material     : ...  38 

24.  First  Floor  on  July  26,  1905 39 

25.  The   Right  and  W'rong  Way  to  Arrange   Plank  and  Mortar  Boxes  on 

the    Gilbreth    Scaffold 4o 

26.  Second   Floor  on  Aug.  2.   1905 41 

27.  Third  Floor  on  Aug.  7,   1905 42 

28.  Methods  of  Staying  Outriggers 43 

29.  Fourth   Floor  on  Aug.  14,   1 905 44 

30.  The    Boston    Scaffold 45 

31.  Method   of   Staying   Boston   Scaffold 46 

32.  Ledger  Used  as  a  Backboard 48 

33.  Hanging  Bracket  for  Supporting  Scaffold  Without  Outrigger 48 

34.  Outrigger  for  Inside  as  well  as  Outside  Scaffolds 49 

35.  Outrigger  Scaffolds  for  Two  Different  Stories  on  the  Same  Wall 50 

36.  Outrigger    Scaffold   on   Type   of   Building   Where   It   Is   the   Most   De- 

sirable  Form   of   Scaffold 51 

37.  Murray    Suspended    Scaffold 52 

38.  Arrangement  of  Plant  for  Speed  of  Erection   of  a  Large   Power  Sta- 

tion        53 

39.  Temporary  Floors  Hung  from  the  Roof  of  a  Large  Power  Station.  ..  .   54 

40.  Temporary  Floors  near  Under  Side  of  Roof  Trusses 51 

41.  Method   of  Covering   Masonry   Projections 55 

42.  Stays  so  Made  for  Window  Frames  that  They  Will  Not  Retard  Brick- 

layers       56 

43.  Correct  Way  of  Staying  and  Lining  Frames 56 

44.  Tyne  of  Old  Fashioned  Staging  Horse 57 


i.  LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Fig.  Page 

45.  Type  of  Trestle  Horse  Staging 57 

46.  Sequence   in   Which   Courses   and   Tiers   Are   Built   Overhand   from   a 

Trestle   Horse   Scaffold 60 

47.  Sequence  in   which   Courses   and  Tiers  are   Built   Overhand  from  the 

Gilbreth    Scaffold,   Hod   Type .61 

48.  Temporary  Floor  for  the  Gilbreth  Scaffold 62 

49.  Setting    up    Gilbreth    Scaffold 62 

50.  Hooking  One  Stay  Rod  to  Each  Horse . ...  63 

51.  Tenders'  Platform  Two  Plank  Wide 64 

52.  A  Large  Number  of  Runs  to  Save  Time  and  Money 65 

53.  Long  Cleated  Runs  to  Save  Ladders 65 

54.  Jacking  Up  the  Scaffold  While  the  Men  Are  Working  on  it 67 

55.  Location  of  the  Tenders'  Platform 67 

56.  Method  of  Adding  More  Braces  Without  any  Nails 68 

57.  Advantages  of  the  Gilbreth  Scaffold  for  Overhand  Work 70 

58.  Old  Method  of  Backing  up  Solid  after  the  Overhand  Face  Has  Been 

Built    Staging    High 71 

59.  Stagings  on  Both  Sides  for  the  Greatest  Speed 72 

60.  Taking  Down  the  Gilbreth  Scaffold 73 

61.  Sliding  Down  the  Mortar  Boxes 74 

62.  The  Packet  Type  for  Wheelbarrows 76 

63.  Center  Board  for  Stock  Platform,  Packet  Type 77 

64.  The  Gilbreth  Scaffold,  Packet  Type,  for  Wheelbarrows 78 

65.  Dimensions  of  Gilbreth  Packet  Type  Scaffold 79 

66.  Location  of   Packs  for  Shortening  Distance  of  Transporting  Brick  to 

Wall    80 

67.  General  Arrangement  of  Packet  Type 82 

68.  Location  of  Packs  When  Building  Exterior  Face  Tier 83 

69.  Arrangement  of  Mortar  Box  and  Packs  to  Obviate  Stooping 86 

70.  Unloading  a  Freight  Car  with  a   Gravity  Conveyor 86 

71.  Handling   Packs  on  a  Gravity  Conveyor 87 

72.  Wheeling    Packs . .  87 

73.  Loading  Carts  from  Gravity  Conveyor 88 

74.  Preventing  Packs  from  Spilling  in  a  Wagon 88 

75.  Track  Through   Stock  Opening  into   Elevator 92 

76.  A  Round  Chimney  255  Feet  High    (34  ft.   Higher  Than  Bunker  Hill 

Monument)     95 

77.  Concrete  Foundation  and  Template  Ready  for  Building  Brick  Chimney  96 

78.  Beginning  the   Erection  of   the   Exterior   Scaffold 97 

79.  Back  Filling  Completed,  and  Everything  Ready  for  Quick  Construction  98 

80.  A  Boston   Scaffold  for  the  Erection  of  the  Exterior  Face  Tier 99 

(Note  the  hole  left  in  the  front  side  of  the  chimney  for  the  track  to 
the  elevator.) 

81.  At  this  Height  the  Exterior  Scaffold  was  Discontinued 100 

82.  Average  Daily   Growth,   Six   Feet 102 

83.  "Peach  Basket"  Used  as  a  Template  for  Constructing  the  Head 103 

84.  An  Economical  Method  of  Loading  Sand  into  Carts 104 

85.  Correct  Layout  for  Two  Gangs  of  Mortar  Makers 107 

86.  Standard   Mortar   Box 107 

87.  Gilbreth  Scaffold  on  Overhand  Work  with  Two  Kinds  of  Mortar  and 

Two   Kinds   of    Brick 108 

88.  Tender  on   Stock  Platform  to  Temper  the  Mortar 109 

89.  Rust   Spots   on   a    Structural    Steel    Column 110 

90.  Rust  Spots  on  a  Structural  Steel  Column 112 

91.  Iron    Brick   Clamp   for   Handling   Brick ...118 

92.  Brick   Jointer 120 

93.  Gages    for   Measuring   Brick 121 

94.  Set   for   Cutting  Brick  to  a  True  Line 122 


L/.ST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS.  ix. 

Fig.  Page 

95.  Design  of  a  Handy  and  Low  Priced   Set 123 

96.  Method    of    Using   a    Set 123 

97.  Splitting  a  Brick  with  the  Head  of  a  Hammer 124 

98.  Position  of   Brick   and   Hammer   When    Splitting 124 

99.  Cutting  Off  Lumps  with  the  Pean  of  the  Hammer 125 

100.  Full    Sized    Pattern    for    Hand    Leather - 125 

101.  Full  Sized  Pattern  for  Thumb  Leather 126 

102.  Method    of    Wearing    Hand    Leathers 127 

103.  Fountain    Trowel    with    Hand    Trowel    for    Handle 128 

104.  View  into   Trowel  Showing  Slat  for   Discharge  of  Mortar 128 

105.  Rear   View   of  Fountain   Trowel 129 

106.  Teaching    Bricklayers    to    Spread    Mortar    for    Twenty    Brick   in    Five 

Seconds    with    the    Fountain    Trowel 130 

107.  Correct   Arrangement   of   the   Nails,   Line   and  Trig 133 

108.  Correct  Method  of   Splicing  the   Line 134 

109.  Story    Pole 135 

110.  Plumb    Bond    Pole 136 

jj9     c  Suggested   Cross   Sections   of   Plumb   Bond   Poles 137 

112A.    Lines  Used   as   Guides   for   Plumbing  Corners 139 

113.  Exterior  Face  Tier.   Working  Right  to  Left,   Spreading  Mortar 145 

114.  Exterior  Face  Tier,   Working  Right   to   Left,   Cutting  off   Mortar   Be- 

fore  Brick    is   Laid 143 

115.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Buttering  the  End  of  the 

Laid    Brick    144 

116.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Cutting  off  Mortar  After 

the   Brick   is   Laid 144 

117.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Buttering  the  End  of  the 

Laid  Brick    144 

118.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Throwing  Mortar 144 

119.  Interior   Face  Tier,   Working  Right  to   Left,   Spreading   Mortar 145 

120.  Interior    Face   Tier.    Working  Right   to   Left,   Cutting  off   Mortar    Be- 

fore  Brick  is  Laid    145 

121.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Tapping  Down   Brick....  145 

122.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Cutting  off  Mortar  After 

Brick    is    Laid 145 

123.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Spreading  Mortar 145 

124.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Cutting  off  Mortar  After 

the     Brick    is    Laid 145 

125.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Cutting  off  Mortar  After 

the  Brick  is  Laid  145 

126.  Exterior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Buttering  the  End  of  the 

Laid    Brick    145 

127.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Spreading  Mortar 146 

128.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Spreading  Mortar 146 

129.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Right  to  Left,  Throwing  Mortar 146 

130.  Interior  Face  Tier,  Working  Left  to  Right,  Spreading  Mortar 146 

131.  Spreading   Mortar  With  One   Motion 157 

132.  Buttering  the  End  of  the  Brick  in  Hand 158 

133.  Two  Man  Straight  Edge  for  Jointing 165 

134.  One  Man  Straight  Edge  for  Jointing 166 

135.  Method  of  Finishing  Joints 167 

136.  Building    Brick    Arches 172 

137.  Method  of  Building  a  Straight  Arch    173 

138.  Rowlock    Arch    Bonded    by    Rings.    Note    that    Crosses    Indicate    Real 

Headers    174 

139.  Rowlock  Arch  with  Bonded  Soffit,  and  Bonded  by  Rings 175 

140.  Arch   Bonded   on    Face    and    Soffit..  ..176 


LIST   OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Fig.  Page 

141.  Rowlock  Arch  Over  Window  Frame .- . .  .  177 

142.  Details   of  Trimmer   Arch ....178 

143.  Wall  Thrown  over  in  Large  Sections  to  Reduce  Breakage  of  the  Brick.  181 

144.  | 

145.  >  Wooden  Chnte  for  Conveying  Brick  From  Demolished  Walls 182-183 

146.  ) 

147.  Method   of    Cutting   out    Brickwork . . .  .  184 

j^'   j-  Correct  Way  of  Shaping  Brick  for  Filling  Pudlog  Holes 190 

ISO!  Correct  Method  of  Filling  Pudlog  Holes 191 

151.  Pocket  Method  for  Joining  New  Walls  to  Old . .  .192 

152.  Toothing  Face  Tiers.  Blocking  Filling  Tiers 194 

153.  Racking    Split    Blocking 194 

154.  Racking   Straight   Blocking.     Note   the  distance   saved  on   the   end  of 

the   wall   by   blocking  racking  instead  of   course   racking 194 

155.  Tie   Irons,   or   Band   Irons.  . . .  .-. .  . . . 195 

156.  Racking  Back  Under  and  Over  a  Window 190 

158   f    Correct  Way  of  Shaping  Brick  for  Filling  Toother 197 

159.'  Correct   Way   of    Filling  Toother 197 

160.  Three-quarter    Toothers    : ...  198 

161.  San    Francisco   Band    Irons 198 

162.  Court  of  St.  Francis  Hotel,  San  Francisco,  After  the  Great  Fire 204 

163.  St.  Francis  Hotel,  San  Francisco,  After  the  Great  Fire.  Note  the  diag- 

onal  headers 205 

164.  Wall  of   Mutual  Life   Insurance   Co.'s  Building,   San   Francisco,   After 

the    Fire 211 

165.  Three  Earthquake  Cracks,  Showing  Lack  of   Stretchers .213 

Two  Views  of  a  Wall   Pierced  by  a  Gravel  Train 214 

Chart. 

1.  Pick  and  Dip  Method,  Laying  to  the  Line •. . .  .  148 

2.  Pick  and  Dip  Method,  Laying  in  the  Interior  Tiers .149 

3.  Stringing  Mortar  Method,  Laying  to  the  Line -. ...  150 

4.  Stringing  Mortar  Method,  Laying  in  the  Interior  Tiers .151 

Plans. 

1 152 

2 153 

3. 152 

4.  ..154 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  art  of  bricklaying  is  unique  in  that  the  fundamental 
principles  of  brick  work  today  are  not  unlike  those  exempli- 
fied by  the  oldest  ruins  of  thousands  of  years  ago.  The 
bricklayer  also  stands  almost  alone,  as  one  who  has  not  been 
obliged  to  compete  in  his  trade  with  women,  with  machinery, 
or  with  foreign  manufacturers. 

Each  old  country  has  had  its  local  methods  of  bricklay- 
ing; but  not  until  the  last  score  of  years  have  bricklayers, 
coming  to  America  from  all  countries,  bringing  their  best  lo- 
cal methods  with  them,  learned  from  each  other  and  adopted 
the  best  of  each  others'  methods. 

The  purposes  of  this  book  are  as  follows : 

(a)  To  put  in  writing  that  knowledge  which  has  been 
handed    down    by   word    of    mouth    from    journeyman    to    ap- 
prentice for  generations. 

(b)  To  record  methods  of  handling  labor,  materials  and 
plant  on   brick  work  that  will  reduce  costs  and  at  the  same 
time  enable  the  first-class  workman  to  receive  higher  pay. 

fc)  To  enable  an  apprentice  to  work  intelligently  from 
his  first  day,  and  to  become  a  proficient  workman  in  the  short- 
est possible  time. 


XI. 


5  U  N  !  V  E  P  S  I  7  Y 


CHAPTER    I. 

TRAINING   APPRENTICES. 
1 

There  is  no  immediate  profit  from  apprentices  unless 
large  numbers  of  them  are  employed  on  the  same  job  at 
the  same  time.  As  large  numbers  of  apprentices  invari- 
ably cause  trouble  between  the  employers  and  the  brick- 
layers, it  is  necessary  to  limit  our  apprentices  to  those  boys 
who,  when  they  have  become  trained,  will  make  valuable 
additions  to  our  organization. 
2 

Hire  only   those   apprentices   who   will   apparently   make 
good  foremen,  unless  bricklayers  are  scarce. 
3 

Two  or  more  apprentices  on  the  same  job  work  out  better 
than    one,    as    there    is    a    spirit    of    rivalry    between    them, 
and  they  can  be  matched  against  each  other  in  speed  con- 
tests. 
4 

The  term  of  apprenticeship  shall  be  at  least  three  years; 
additional  time  for  lost  time  and  vacations. 
5 

Apprentice  shall  not  be  permitted  to  work  without  over- 
alls until  he  is  out  of  his  time. 
6 

The  first  day  that  an  apprentice  is  put  to  work  he  is 
to  be  provided  with  a  brick  hammer  and  trowel  at  our  ex- 
pense. Procure  an  old  trowel  that  has  been  broken  in  by 
some  good  bricklayer  on  the  job.  The  foreman  bricklayer 
should  make  it  his  special  duty  to  see  that  the  trowel  is 
slightly  undersized,  also  the  best  and  the  handiest  trowel  on 
the  job.  He  should  give  the  bricklayer  a  new  trowel. 
7 

At  the  end  of  six  weeks,  if  the  apprentice  has  done 
well,  he  is  to  be  given  a  new  spirit  plumb  rule  with  two  plumb 
glasses  and  one  level  glass.  This  plumb  rule  should  be  3  ft.  6 
ins.  long. 

I 


2  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

8 

As   soon   as   he   has   progressed   far   enough   to  warrant 
it,    he   shall   be   given   another   large   trowel,  brick   set   and 
jointer.    He  shall  furnish  himself  with  everything  else  that  he 
needs. 
9 

An  apprentice  should  be  taken  in  charge  by  an  intelli- 
gent bricklayer,  who  should  be  responsible  for  his  actions  and 
work,  for  a  period  of  one  week.  He  should  be  put  under  a 
different  bricklayer  every  week  for  at  least  a  month.  At  the 
end  of  that  time  he  should  be  put  on  that  part  of  the  work 
where  he  can  earn  his  money,  and  at  the  same  time  learn  the 
most.  In  other  words,  we  do  not  want  our  apprentices  to 
be  kept  on  heavy  work,  if  they  are  constantly  doing  their 
best.  At  the  same  time,  we  do  not  want  them  promoted  any 
faster  than  they  can  earn  their  money. 
10 

Apprentices   must   be  worked   to  their  full   limit   of  en- 
durance. 


11 


Apprentices  must  not  be  hazed  nor  misled  after  their  first 
day  at  the  trade.  Foremen  must  answer  every  question  that 
they  ask  in  good  faith,  regardless  of  how  simple  it  may  seem. 
12 

An  apprentice  is  supposed  to  do  a  man's  amount  of  work 
on  filling  in  the  middle  of  the  wall  after  the  first  month.  He 
is  supposed  to  do  a  man's  amount  of  work  on  all  common 
brick  work  after  six  months. 
13 

First  of  all,  an  apprentice  should  be  taught  that  all  brick, 
even  common  brick,  have  a  top  and  a  bottom,  an  inside  and 
an  outside. 
14 

The   outside    is    generally   determined   by   the    way    the 
bricks  have  been  stacked  in  the  kiln,  but  if  the  natural  outside 
is  chipped,  oftentimes  the  natural  inside  is  the  better  side. 
15 

All  bricks  made  by  hand  in  a  mold  are  a  little  wider  at 
the  top  or  open  side  of  the  mold  than  at  the  bottom  of  the 
mold.  This  is  sometimes  caused  by  the  molds  being  made 
slightly  smaller  at  the  bottom  than  at  the  open  top,  some- 
times by  the  contact  of  the  front  and  back  side  of  the  brick 


TRAINING    APPRENTICES. 


being  slightly  distorted  by  contact  with  the  sides  of  the  mold 

as  the  soft  wet  clay  slides  out  of  the  mold. 

16 

In  hand  made  brick,  and  in  nearly  all  brick  except  wire- 
cut  brick,  the  natural  top  can  be  told  from  the  natural  bottom 
because  it  is  much  rougher.  The  top  can  generally  be  easily 
told  from  the  bottom  by  feeling,  if  the  brick  is  held  in  the 
usual  position  used  just  before  laying.  The  bottom  being 
narrower  than  the  top,  the  brick  can  be  held  by  less  pressure 
of  the  ringers  on  the  front  and  back  of  the  brick  when  it  is 
right  side  up  than  when  it  is  upside  down.  A  few  minutes 
will  enable  a  novice  to  detect  a  very  small  difference  in  the 
width  of  the  top  and  bottom  of  a  brick,  by  observing  how 
much  pressure  of  the  fingers  is  needed  to  sustain  the  brick. 
17 

Brick  must  be  laid  with  the  wide  surface  uppermost,  like 
Fig.  i  (exaggerated).  If  the  front  and  rear  faces  of  the  brick 
are  parallel,  such  as  is  the  case  with  wire  cut  brick,  then  the 
brick  must  be  laid  like  Fig.  2  (exaggerated).  All  bricks  must 


Fig.    1. — Hand    Made 
Brick. 


Fig.  2.— Wire  Cut  Brick.      Fig.    3.— One   Brick    Up- 
side Down. 


be  laid  with  slightly  overhanging  faces,  so  that  the  appearance 
of  the  wall  (exaggerated),  will  be  similar  to  beveled  siding 
or  clapboards  upside  down.  The  reason  for  this  is  that  the 
bricks  vary  greatly  in  thickness,  and  one  edge  only  is  laid 
to  line.  This  is  the  top  edge.  The  lower  edge  is  not  laid  to 


4  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

line.  It  is,  therefore,  not  so  straight,  and  is  set  slightly  in- 
side the  line  of  the  top  edge  of  the  course  below  it  to  hide  its 
inaccuracies.  While  the  amount  of  overhang  and  set-in  of 
each  course  is  slight,  it  is  enough  to  show  very  plainly.  If 
you  sight  down  the  face  of  the  wall  you  will  see  nothing  but 
mortar.  If  you  sight  up  the  wall  you  will  see  nothing  but 
brick.  If  a  course  is  laid  with  considerable  overhang  it  is 
called  "rolled."  If  a  course  is  laid  with  a  batter  it  is  called 
"lipped."  See  Fig.  3. 
18 

One  of  the  worst  mistakes  that  can  be  made  in  the  training 
of  an  apprentice  is  to  e.vpect  him  to  do  perfect  zvork  first,  and  fast 
work  later.  A  boy  taught  after  this  scheme  is  sure  to  get  into 
bad  Jiabits  of  laying  brick  with  too  many  unnecessary  motions 
that  will  prevent  him  from  ever  laying  brick  fast.  This  is  very 
important.  , 
19 

The  right  zvay  is  to  put  the  apprentice  at  zvork  where  the 
appearance  of  the  zvork  is  not  of  importance.  Insist  that  he 
lay  as  many  brick  as  a  journe(yman,  even  if  they  are  not  laid 
quite  so  well.  Teach  him  to  lay  a  brick  with  the  least  possible 
number  of  motions,  and,  instead  of  correcting  all  of  the  little 
faults  on  one  brick,  to  try  to  lay  the  next  brick  zvithout  the  same 
faults  as  attended  the  laying  of  the  preceding  brick.  This  last 
method  will  teach  speed,  and  skill  will  surely  soon  follozv,  with 
sufficient  practice. 
20 

Of  course  it  is  not  intended  by  these  directions  that  an 
apprentice  be  permitted  to  do  any  work  that  would  affect  the 
stability  of  the  work.  It  is  simply  a  matter  of  looks,  and  he 
must  start  where  looks  are  not  important. 

21 

"Motion  study"  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  teaching 
a  trade  quickly.  It  is  also  the  most  profitable  method  of 
teaching  a  trade. 


apprentice   must   be   made   to  lay   brick   with   quick 
motions,  even  on  his  first  day.  Speed  and  the  least  number  of 
motions  must  be  uppermost  in  his  mind  at  all  times.     The 
apprentice  must  be  made  to  lay  brick  with  the  method  out- 
lined in  this  system  even  if  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  bricklayer 


TRAINING    APPRENTICES.  5 

go  over  his  work  as  fast  as  he  lays  the  brick,  to  make  his 

work  right. 
23 

As  soon  as  an  apprentice  has  formed  a  fixed  habit  of 
laying  brick  with  only  a  few,  and  with  no  unnecessary  mo- 
tions, he  must  be  constantly  reminded  that  the  quality  of  the 
workmanship  will  be  remembered  long  after  all  other  consid- 
erations are  forgotten. 
24 

The  rules  in  this  system  must  be  construed  as  solely  for 
the  purpose  of  eliminating  unnecessary  delays,  unnecessary 
labor,  and  unnecessary  expense,  and  never  for  any  short  cuts 
that  produce  speed,  economy  or  profit  at  the  expense  of  the 
best  workmanship. 
25 

Leave  the  so-called  ''tricks  of  the  trade"  to  those  persons 


Fig.    4.— Laying   Brick  Without   Disturbing   the   Line. 

who   have  not  served   a   proper  apprenticeship   and   who   do 

not  know  how  to  do  the  best  work. 

26 

Show  the  apprentice  how  to  lay  a  brick  without  disturb- 
ing the  line.  Impress  upon  his  mind  that  his  fingers  must  not 
even  touch  the  line,  or  the  line  will  be  pushed  out  of  place 
while  the  other  men  are  trying  to  use  it  as  a  guide.  See  Fig. 
4.  Make  him  practice  before  laying  to  the  line,  so  that  his 
thumb  and  fingers  will  come  up  as  the  brick  goes  down  near 
the  line.  Do  not  let  him  lay  brick  on  the  line  until  he  can 
do  this  without  disturbing  the  line. 
27 

An  apprentice  should  be  taught  to  hold  his  trowel  like  a 
razor,  with  two  fingers  only,  and  with  the  thumb  on  the  top 
of  the  handle.  The  thumb  should  never  be  put  around  the 
handle  of  the  trowel.  The  handle  of  the  trowel  should  be 
kept  perfectly  clean  at  all  times. 


6  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM, 

28 

Regardless  of  the  locality  in  which  an  apprentice  works, 
he  should  be  taught  to  lay  brick  both  "Eastern"  and  "West- 
ern" methods,  not  only  so  that  he  can  have  the  experience  for 
his  own  use,  but  also  that  he  can  boss  both  kinds  of  brick- 
layers to  the  best  advantage. 
29 

The   "Eastern"   method   is   to   "pick~and-dip"   brick   and 
mortar  at  the  same  time ;    the  mortar  being  in  a  tub,  or  in  a 
mortar  box  with  beveled  sides. 
30 

The  "Western"  or  "stringing  mortar"  method  is  to  use  a 
much  larger  trowel  than  could  possibly  be  used  in  a  tub. 
This  necessitates  a  mortar  board  or  mortar  box,  and  first 
spreading  mortar  enough  for  several  brick  ahead,  and  then 
picking  up  only  brick. 
31 

Each  method  has  its  advantages  and  disadvantages.  Some 
conditions  make  the  "Eastern"  method  preferable,  some  the 
"Western"  method. 
32 

If  the  apprentice  is  taught  both  methods,  he  will  know, 
instinctively,  which  is  the  better  to  use  under  varying  condi- 
tions. The  kind  of  sand,  the  proportions  of  the  cement,  lime 
and  sand,  the  dryness  of  the  brick,  the  methods  employed 
by  the  men  on  the  leads — all  these  go  to  determine  which 
method  will  give  the  most  speed,  economy  and  quality. 
33 

When  an  apprentice  reaches  to  pick  up  bricks,  see  that  he 
picks  them  up  with  both  hands  at  precisely  the  same  time. 

34 

When  he  reaches  for  mortar  with  one  hand  and  brick 
with  the  other,  teach  him  to  pick  up  both  at  the  same  time. 
He  should  look  at  the  mortar  as  he  starts  to  reach  for  it,  but 
he  should  pick  it  up  by  the  feeling,  and  his  eyes  should  be 
only  on  the  brick  that  he  is  picking  up  with  the  other  hand 
at  the  same  time.  See  Fig.  5. 

35 

To  appreciate  fully  the  importance  of  this  rule,  watch 
several  bricklayers  a  few  moments.  You  will  notice  that  the 
man  who  unconsciously  is  picking  up  with  both  hands  at 
the  same  time,  can  do  his  work  faster,  and  with  much  less 


TRAINING    APPRENTICES.  7 

effort  to  himself,  than  he  who  is  picking  up  first  with  one 
hand  and  then  with  the  other.  This  is  largely  a  matter  of 
habit.  If  an  apprentice  is  allowed  to  pick  up  first  with  one 
hand  and  then  with  the  other,  it  will  be  hard  to  break  him 

of  it. 
36 

The  bricks  nearest  the  wall  should  generally  be  picked 
up  first,  so  as  to  maintain  a  clear  place  to  stand  and  a  clear 


Fig.   5.— Picking  Up  Stock  with  Both  Hands  at  the  Same  Time. 

place  for  the  tenders  to  walk,  in  case  they  find  it  necessary 

to  pass  on  the  scaffold. 

37 

An  apprentice  should,  at  first,  be  taught  to  throw  only 
enough  mortar  for  one  brick  at  a  time  on  the  line.  After 
he  is  fairly  proficient,  he  should  be  taught  to  throw  his  mor- 
tar for  at  least  two  brick,  even  when  laying  the  pick  and  dip 
method.  See  Figs.  6  and  7.  He  can  pick  up  mortar  for  two 
or  three  bricks  just  as  quickly  as  he  can  pick  up  mortar  for 
one  brick.  With  practice,  he  can  throw  the  mortar  for  three 
brick  just  as  quickly,  as  he  can  for  one  brick,  and  he  can  cer- 
tainly lay  the  extra  one  or  extra  two  brick  faster  if  he  does 
not  have  to  dip  and  throw  the  mortar  more  than  once  to  two 
or  three  brick. 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


38 


An  apprentice  should  be  taught  that  the  bricklayer  de- 
pends on  sighting  with  his  eye  to  get  plumb  corners  nearly 
plumb,  and  that  the  plumb  rule  is  used  to  correct  the  inaccu- 
racies of  his  eye.  The  first  three  courses  should  be  plumbed 
accurately  to  furnish  a  guide  to  the  eye.  A  corner  can  be 
"sighted"  quickest  and  most  accurately,  by  sighting  one  side 
at  a  time,  i.  e.,  putting  the  eye  exactly  over  the  corner  to  be 
plumbed  and  moving  the  eye  in  the  plane  of  one  face  of  the 
corner,  and  in  the  direction  away  from  the  wall.  Moving  the 
eye  back  and  forth  to  a  point  a  slight  distance  from  and  ex- 
actly plumb  with  the  corner,  will  make  the  corner  apparently 


Fig.   6.  Figure  7. 

Throwing  Mortar  for  Two  Erick. 

change  from  a  point  to  a  line.  Any -inaccuracy  from  a  straight 
line  is  quickly  detected.  After  one  face  of  the  corner  has  been 
corrected,  sight  the  other  face  in  the  same  manner.  When 
the  two  faces  are  plumb,  the  corner  will  be  plumb.  Do  not 
try  to  make  the  corner  appear  straight  both  ways  at  once. 
The  method  is  slower,  and  it  may  appear  straight  when  in 
reality  it  is  not. 
39 

It  is  a  simple  matter  to  describe  to  the  apprentice  the 
best  methods  of  laying  brick  for  the  greatest  strength.  It  is  a 
very  difficult  matter  to  explain  to  him  how  to  lay  pressed  face 
brick  in  a  manner  that  will  make  a  large,  plain,  blank  wall 
appear  accurate  and  uniform  under  the  most  critical  ex- 
amination. 


TRAINING    APPRENTICES.  9 

40 

The  following  rules  will  help  the  apprentice  to  make  the 
best  appearing  work  on  pressed  brick  face  \vork : 

(a)  Use  the  thinnest  line  obtainable,  that  will  stand  a 
hard  hauling-  without  sagging  or  breaking. 

(b)  Build  small  leads,  so  that  as  much  of  the  wall  as  pos- 
sible is  built  to  line,  instead  of  built  as  a  lead. 

(c)  Make  the  line  fast  around  the  end  of  the  wall,  and 
wound  around  a  brick  on  the  lead,  so  that  a  tight  hauling  will 
not  pull  down  the  lead.    Another  reason  for  doing  this  is  that 
if  the  nail  is  used  in  the  lead  and  the  lead  pulls  down,  some 
bricklayer  may  lose  an  eye  by  the  nail  flying  through  the  air. 

(d)  See  that  the  line  is  placed   1-32  in.  outside  the  top 
edge  of  the  brick  and  exactly  level  with  it. 

(e)  See  that  no  brick  touches  the  line. 

(f)  See  that  the  line  is   disturbed   as   little  as   possible 
when  laying  a  brick. 

(g)  Do  not  lay  a  brick  that  is  thinner,  thicker,  shorter 
or  longer  than  the  others,  even  if  it  is  of  the  same  cull.    Use  it 
for  filling. 

(h)  Use  the  right  amount  of  mortar.  If  you  use  more 
than  the  right  amount  it  will  squeeze  out,  and  daub  the  brick 
underneath  it. 

(i)  See  that  the  lower  edge  of  the  brick  is  distinctly 
back  of  the  line  of  the  top  edge  of  the  course  under  it. 
The  amount  that  it  should  be  back  varies  with  the  brick  and 
the  conditions.  It  should  never  be  less  than  1-32  in.  and 
seldom  more  than  y$  in.  Work  looks  decidedly  better  with 
too  much  set  in  (or  roll)  than  not  enough.  This  is  one  of  the 
most  important  rules  for  good  looking  brick  work. 
41 

The  work  of  the  apprentice  differs  from  that  of  the 
journeyman  in  appearance  largely  because  the  latter  is  able  to 
make  the  set  in,  or  roll,  or  overhang,  of  all  brick  exactly  alike. 
42 

An  unskilled  man  can  use  a  story  pole  to  get  brick  courses 
the  right  height.  He  can  use  a  plumb-bond  pole,  and  mark 
exactly  where  the  end  joints  should  come.  He  can  use  a  tight 
line,  putting  the  top  edge  of  each  brick  to  it.  He  can  cover  up 
inaccuracies  with  good  jointing  and  hide  the  differences  of  the 


10  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

thickness  of  the  brick  by  skillful  ruling.  He  can  make  every 
brick  touch  a  plumb  rule  and  straightedge,  by  tapping  back 
the  projecting  brick  with  a  hammer  before  the  mortar  has  set. 
Yet  the  wall  will  have  a  bad  appearance  unless  it  looks  uni- 
form and  each  brick  has  the  same  amount  of  set-in.  There  is 
no  way  of  correcting  the  amount  of  roll  after  the  bricks  are 
laid. 
43 

This  is  where  skilled  practice  counts.  It  makes  for 
uniformity.  This  is  where  the  journeyman  makes  the  good 
looking  wall  and  where  the  apprentice  finds  difficulty  and 
must  lay  the  most  stress ;  for  when  the  sun  moves  from  a 
position  in  the  plane  of  the  face  of  the  wall  and  begins  to 
throw  long  shadows  on  that  wall,  the  inaccuracies  are  greatly 
exaggerated  by  the  sunlight  and  the  shading,  due  to  lack  of 
uniformity  of  set-in  and  roll. 
44 

Apprentices  must  study  carefully  the  rules,  photographs 
and  charts  in  this  system,  especially  those  relating  to  methods. 
They  must  observe  the  work  done  by  the  various  brick- 
layers, and  must,  after  study  of  this  system,  the  work  they 
see,  and  their  own  work,  make  out  charts  of  their  own 
processes. 
45 

They  must  comply  with  all  rules  of  the  Field  System,  as 
well  as  of  this  Bricklaying  System,  and  must  be  made  to  real- 
ize that  they  are  a.  part  of  the  organization,  and  that  a  knowl- 
edge of  it  and  the  systems  by  which  it  is  operated,  are  abso- 
lutely essential  to  any  advancement. 
46 

Apprentices  must  be  shown  that  the  bricklayer's  trade  is 
one  of  the  oldest,  most  respectable  and  most  desirable  of 
trades,  and  one  worthy  of  the  entire  attention  of  any  bright, 
educated  and  determined  American  boy;  that  the  knowledge 
gained  of  the  trade  can  never  be  taken  away  from  the  one  who 
has  once  obtained  it,  regardless  of  what  ill  fortune  has  over- 
taken him  ;  and  that  $25  to  $100  per  week  will  always  stand 
ready  for  the  man  who  can  lay  brick,  or  who  has  sufficient 
knowledge  of  the  trade  to  supervise  the  work  of  other  brick- 
lavers. 


CHAPTER   II. 

METHODS  OF  MANAGEMENT. 
47 

Foremen  will  be  rated  and  paid  according  to  the  quality 
and  not  according  to  the  quantity  of  work  that  they  secure 
from  their  men.  Not  only  on  account  of  the  greater  pleasure 
that  all  derive  from  doing  the  best  work,  but  also  as  a  business 
proposition,  the  most  permanent  success  will  come  from  hav- 
ing earned  and  deserved  the  reputation  of  doing  the  best 
work. 
48 

The  foreman  must  Fee  that  all  work  is  laid  out  in  a  sys- 
tematic manner.  The  men  should  be  so  selected  and  grouped 
that,  the  job  once   started,   speed  and   efficiency  will   be  ap- 
parent and  can  be  fittingly  recognized. 
49 

On  small  jobs  a  foreman  may  know  exactly  what  each 
bricklayer  is  doing  every  minute  during  the  day.  On  large 
jobs,  if  the  foreman  knows  this,  it  is  because  he  is  neglecting 
to  look  after  some  points  that  are  of  much  more  importance. 
50 

A  foreman  should  study  to  arrange  his  men  so  that  the 
work  of  the  slow  men  will  show  up  automatically  to  their 
disadvantage.  This  can  be  arranged  in  many  ways,  one  of 
which  is  to  divide  the  gangs  into  units,  the  number  of  men  in 
a  unit  to  be  determined  by  the  character  of  the  work. 
51 

Take,  for  example,  a  wall  of  nine  piers,  separated  by  eight 
windows.  On  this  wall  there  should  be  nine  bricklayers,  if  the 
piers  are  of  about  the  same  size.  If  the  piers  are  not  the  same 
size,  the  number  of  bricklayers  should  be  increased  or  reduced, 
so  that  their  work  will  be  equal,  and  the  slow  man  will  be 
shown  up  quickly.  The  foreman  should  watch  the  bricklayers 
to  see  which  man  is  standing  up  idle.  He  is  standing  up  for 
one  of  three  reasons:  (a)  he  is  loafing;  (b)  he  is  out  of  stock; 
(c)  he  has  finished  his  bit. 

II 


12  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

52 

If  it  is  for  the  first  reason,  he  should  be  dealt  with.  If  he 
is  out  of  stock,  the  leader  of  tenders  needs  attention.  If  it  is 
for  the  third  reason,  his  speed  should  be  recognized,  and  the 
mason  who  is  behind  and  delaying  the  raising  of  the  line 
to  the  next  course  should  be  investigated. 
53 

It  is  sometimes  difficult  to  divide  a  wall  that  is  not 
symmetrical  into  equal  parts  so  that  each  bricklayer  will  have 
the  same  sized  section ;  but  with  a  little  study  almost  any  wall 
can  be  divided  fairly.  For  example,  if  the  wall  is  cut  up  by 
openings  so  that  the  piers  are  not  the  same  size,  it  is  often 
economical  to  put  fewer  men  on  the  wall  and  apportion  sev- 
eral piers  to  each  man.  In  this  way  it  can  be  divided  evenly 
enough  to  make  conditions  favorable  for  a  contest.  Some- 
times the  trig  can  be  put  enough  off  center  of  the  wall  to 
compensate  for  some  extra  plumb  work  in  a  break  or  chimney 
flue.  Again,  a  small  pier  in  the  wall  ma}^  be  assigned  to  an  ap- 
prentice. 
54 

On  a  long  wall,  it  is  often  economical  to  provide  one  or 
two  special  men  to  take   care  of  a  large  irregularity  in  the 
wall,  and  to   hold  the   contest  on  the  remaining  straight  or 
symmetrical  parts  of  the  wall. 
55 

In   any    case,    the   foreman   should   watch    the    first   few 
courses  as  laid,  then  shift  the  men  enough  to  make  the  stints 
as  nearly  equal  as  possible. 
56 

The  work  .of  a  bricklayer  is  generally  indicative  of  his 
personal  character.  If  he  is  dishonest  he  will  do  dishonest 
work  and  cover  it  up  if  possible  before  the  flaw  is  seen.  If  he 
is'honest  he  will  leave  his  job  before  he  will  do  scamp  work, 
even  at  the  suggestion  of  his  foreman.  If  a  bricklayer  is  ever 
caught  doing  a  scamp  piece  of  work  he  should  never  be  abso- 
lutely trusted  again. 
57 

Sometimes  the  athletic  contest  spirit  and  desire  to  'out- 
class the  others  leads  some  of  the  bricklayers  to  do  careless 
work,  especially  where  it  cannot  be  seen,  as  in  the  middle  of 
the  wall.  One  of  the  best  methods  of  counteracting  this  is  to 


METHODS   OF  MANAGEMENT.  ^ 

write  the  name  of  each  bricklayer  on  the  plan,  showing 
where  each  worked,  and  to  let  the  bricklayers  see  that  their 
names  are  being  written  on  the  plans.  There  is,  of  cours-e, 
nothing  new  about  this  scheme,  as  stone  masons  for  centuries 
have  put  their  own  marks  on  stones.  The  name  or  mark- 
on  the  work  undoubtedly  makes  the  workman  take  more  in- 
terest in  his  work. 
58 

On  engine  beds  and  similar  work,  where  the  pieces  are 
isolated,  assigning  gangs  of  men  of  different  nationalities  to 
the  different  beds  will  create  extra  interest  in  the  contests.  If 
this  is  not  feasible,  put  the  tall  men  on  one  bed  and  the  short 
men  on  the  other,  or  the  single  men  against  the  married  men, 
or  the  eastern  "pick  and  dip"  men  against  the  western  "string 
mortar"  men. 
59 

While  one  who  is  not  experienced  at  making  his  men 
really  enthusiastic  on  their  work  cannot  appreciate  how  ath- 
letic contests  will  interest  the  men,  it  is  the  real  secret  of  the 
success  of  our  best  superintendents.  It  not  only  reduces 
costs,  but  it  makes  for  organization,  and  thus  saves  foremen's 
time. 
60 

There  is  no  way  that  continued  interest  in  athletic  con- 
tests can  be  maintained  so  well  as  by  having  a  fair  and  cor- 
rect score  kept  of  the  results  of  the  labors  of  the  different  men. 
61 

When  it  is  not  possible  to  divide  the  work  so  that  each 
man's  work  shows  up  all  by  itself,  the  best  arrangement  is  to 
divide  the  men  up  into  two  or  more  gangs  of  as  few  men  as 
possible,  generally  with  two,  four,  six  or  eight  men  to  a  gang. 
62 

If  the  character  of  the  walls  is  similar,  but  if  they  are 
not  the  same  dimensions,  it  is  wise  to  provide  some  other 
form  of  measurement  than  the  height  of  the  wall,  such,  for 
instance,  as  a  score  on  a  large  black  board,  so  placed  that  it 
can  be  seen  by  all  the  men  of  all  the  gangs.  This  board 
should  be  ruled  off,  and  the  score  should  be  carefully  filled 
out. 
63 

The  men  can  see  the  score  and  the  contest  can  be  carried 
out  throughout  the  entire  day.  In  the  case  of  extra  pay  being 


I4  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

given   for  particularly  high  records  of  brick  laid,  the  brick- 
layers can  see  every  half  hour  just  how  successful  their  ef- 
forts are. 
64 

In  order  that  the  bricklayers  may  always  have  a  square 
deal,  the  method  of  estimating  the  number  of  brick  that  they 
lay  per  day  shall  be  as  follows: 
65 

The  story  pole  on  the  hauling  end  of  the  line  shall  be 
marked  off  in  courses,  as  usual.  At  each  mark,  the  number 
of  brick  in  that  course  shall  be  plainly  marked  on  the  pole.  In 
case  of  any  dispute,  any  one  can  then  check  up  the  records, 
by  actually  counting  the  number  of  brick  in  each  course. 
66 

As  a  general  rule,  the  men  should  be  separated  so  that 
the  amount  of  their  individual  work  will  show  up  separately. 
This  will  bring  about  the  best  results,  whether  or  not  there  is 
a  well  organized  athletic  contest  in  progress. 
67 

It  is  seldom  good  practice  to  have  the  tenders  work  indi- 
vidually instead  of  in  small  gangs,  due  to  the  difficulties  of 
passing  ton  narrow  runs  and  foot  stages. 
68 

Do  not  permit  your  hod   carriers,  wheelbarrow   men  or 
packet  men  to  come  up  one  at  a  time. 
69 

Have  those  carrying  any  one  kind  of  material  that  are 
tending  masons  on  any  one  wall  fill  their  hods  all  at  once, 
shank  their  hods  all  at  once,  and  start  all  at  once,  but  do  not 
have  them  drop  their  hods  at  exactly  the  same  instant,  as 
it  might  endanger  the  stability  of  the  scaffold. 
70 

Hold  the  leader  responsible  for  the  work  of  the  entire 
gang.  They  must  dump  their  material  where  the  leader  says 
they  must  dump  it.  They  must  never  throw  the  brick  from 
the  hods  in  a  manner  that  will  scatter  or  break,  or  even  chip 
the  brick.  They  must  empty  the  hod  in  a  manner  that  will 
enable  the  bricklayer  to  pick  up  the  brick  the  easiest,  as  brick- 
layer's time  costs  so  much  more  than  hod  carrier's  time  that 
the  hod  carrier  can  afford  to  waste  two  minutes  of  his  time 
any  time  that  it  will  save  one  minute  of  the  bricklayer's. 


METHODS   OP  MANAGEMENT.  15 

71 

It  may  seem  at  first  that  making  the  men  all  fill  at  once 
and  all  start  at  once,  and  all  go  at  once,  is  like  holding  the 
entire  gang  back  to  the  speed  of  the  slowest  man.  This  is  not 
so.  On  the  contrary,  it  shows  up  the  slowest  man  and  he  can 
be  removed. 

72 

Have  the  men  keep  their  place  in  the  line.  Have  the  last 
man  who  is  set  to  work  with  the  gang  be  the  next  to  the  last 
man  in  the  line. 

73 

Pick  out  a  good  man  for  leader  and  pay  him  10  per  cent 
more  than  the  rest,  because  he  is  expected  to  direct  as  well  as 
work.     He  must  see  that  he  has  more  men  when  the  brick- 
layers are  backing  up  than  when  they  are  laying  overhand. 
74 

In  the  event  of  the  usual  leader  being  absent,  promote 
the  rear  leader  to  leader  with  leader's  pay  and  the  second  man 
in  the  line  to  rear  leader  with  5  per  cent  more  pay  than  the 
rest.  This  will  make  all  the  men  in  the  line  desirous  of  the 
leader's  job  with  leader's  pay.  It  will,  if  the  rules  are  carried 
out,  make  the  organization  of  the  tenders  automatic.  The  fore- 
men will  only  have  to  watch  the  leaders  in  order  to  handle  all 
the  tenders. 
75 

The  same  system  applies  to  wheelbarrow  men. 
76 

Do  not  put  brick  tenders  and  mortar  tenders  under  the 
same  leaders. 
77 

Piling  brick  into  a  wheelbarrow  is  a  matter  that  requires 
considerable  attention.     It  is  not  enough  to  tell  the  tenders  to 
fill  the  barrows  with  brick.    The  barrow  gang  must  be  shown  - -\ 
how  to  do  it  in  the  quickest  and  least  fatiguing  manner. 
78 

The  leader  shall  be  paid  at  least  10  per  cent,  more  than 
each  of  the  rest  of  the  gang.  He  shall  be  carefully  shown  that 
the  barrow  must  be  placed  as  near  the  brick  as  possible.  He 
must  not  be  allowed  to  be  leader  unless  he  continually  picks 
up  brick  with  both  hands  at  the  same  time  and  fills  his  barrow 
faster  than  the  other  men.  He  must  convey  the  brick  from 


16  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

the  pile  to  the  wheelbarrow  in  the  shortest  possible  line,  and 
both  brick  must  be  put  in  the  barrow  at  the  same  instant. 
79 

It  will  be  difficult  to  get  every  barrow  man  to  abide  by 
these  rules,  but  the  leader  must  be  made  to  follow  this  method, 
and  the  extra  money  paid  the  leaders  is  an  incentive  to  the 
others  to  work  to  be  promoted  to  be  leaders  of  gangs. 
80 

The  men  must  be  taught  to  pile  the  brick  so  that  the  load 
comes  over  the  wheel,  instead  of  on  the  legs  of  the  wheelbar- 
row.    This  enables  the  man  to  wheel  larger  loads. 
81 

It  should  be  decided  by  the  brick  foremen  how  many 
brick  shall  be  put  in  the  barrow  by  the  leader,  and  he  must 
count  his  load  every  time.  The  leader's  load  should  be  checked 
up  occasionally,  especially  when  his  load  appears  to  be  small 
and  if  it  is  found  short,  he  should  be  replaced  by  another 
leader.  The  number  of  brick,  of  course,  depends  on  their  dry 
weight,  with  due  allowance  when  they  are  wet,  and  on 
whether  the  bricks  are  to  be  wheeled  up  an  incline  or  on  a 

level. 
82 

Rear  end  leaders  are  necessary  on  long  trips  where  the 
last  man  leads  the  way  back.     Where  the  lap  is  continuous, 
a  rear  end  leader  is  not  necessary. 
83 

A  rear  end  leader  should  receive  5  per  cent,   more  than 
regular  tender's  pay.     He  should  be  selected  from  the  line  of 
tenders,  with  the  idea  of  promoting  him  to  leader  if  he  handles 
the  gang  promptly. 
84 

A  properly  organized  and  trained  gang  of  tenders  will  do 
from  50  per  cent,  to  200  per  cent,  more  work  than  an  untrained 
gang. 
85 

When  unloading  cars  of  materials,  try  to  have  but  one 
man  to  a  car,  and  start  several  men  at  the  same  time.  If  this 
is  not  possible,  start  two  men  at  the  same  time,  but  at  oppo- 
site ends  of  the  same  car.  This  will  enable  the  foremen  to 
pick  out  the  first-class  men. 

86 

Reward  the  winner  every  time. 


METHODS   OF  MANAGEMENT.  ^ 

87 

Provide   shields   of   No.    10  gage   sheet  steel  for   men   to 
shovel  on  especially  when  unloading  cars,  or  when  handling  a 
large  amount  of  dumped  material,  such  as  sand,  coal,  etc. 
88 

The  shields  are  to  be  of  the  size  and  shape  shown  by  Fig. 
8,  and  are  to  be  used  whenever  possible  as  a  fiat  surface  on 
which  to  shovel. 


Fig.    8.— Shield   on   Which   to    Shovel. 

89 

The  hole  in  the  shield  should  be  made  large  enough  to 
permit  the  handle  of  the  shovel  to  pass  through  it.  The  shield 
can  then  be  easily  carried  from  car  to  car  on  a  man's  back,  sus- 
pended from  the  handle  of  the  shovel  which  he  carries  over 
his  shoulder. 
90 

Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  on  the  necessity  and  value 
of  having  only  first  class  men.  Athletic  contests  have  proved 
the  surprising  fact  that  first  class  men  ordinarily  do  twice 
to  three  times  the  amount  of  work  of  other  men  whose  meth- 
ods of  working  disguise  their  slow  pace  until  the  athletic  con- 
test shows  them  up. 
91 

The  difference  in  cost  between  the  best  work  and  the 
worst  work  is  such  a  very  small  amount  as  compared  with  the 
entire  cost  of  the  undertaking  that  no  firm  or  individual  can 
afford  to  be  identified  with  any  but  the  best  class.  The  fea- 
tures that  increase  the  cost  of  work  materially  are,  not  work- 
ing the  men  to  advantage,  and  having  them  remain  idle  for 
any  reason,  such  as  for  want  of  stock,  lack  of  incentive  for 
large  output,  lack  of  proper  superintendence,  etc. 
92 

Quality  of  the  work  must  be  given  preference  over  quan- 
tity of  output  at  all  times. 


18  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM.- 

93 

The  winners  of  the  athletic  contest  should  be  paid  high- 
er wages  than  the  rest  of  the  men.  They  should  furthermore 
be  given  first  opportunity  to  make  overtime  wages  and  they 
should  be  kept  till  the  last  to  finish  the  job. 

(For  further  suggestions  regarding  athletic  contests,  see 
"Field  System.") 


CHAPTER  III. 

METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 
94 

The  planning  of  the  methods  of  construction  of  a  build- 
ing should  be  laid  out  as  carefully  as  the  building  of  a  great 
machine  in  a  modern  machine  shop.  Each  part  should  be 
routed  to  its  final  place  with  the  least  handling  and  confusion 
possible. 
95 

The  routing  and  the  consecutive  order  in  which  each 
wall  and  each  structural  member  of  the  building  is  to  be 
built  must  be  diagrammed,  and  the  dates  on  which  the  mate- 
rials are  to  arrive  on  the  site,  and  to  be  put  in  place  must  be 
agreed  upon  by  the  purchasing  department  and  the  superin- 
tendent. 
96 

The    method    of    attack    on    jobs    where    great    speed    is 
required  must  necessarily  differ  greatly  under  different  condi- 
tions. 
97 

Figures  9  to  14  show  progress  of  work  on  the  Augus- 
tus Lowell  Laboratory  of  Electrical  Engineering  for  the  Mas- 
sachusetts Institute  of  Technology,  which  wre  built  in  Boston 
in  two  months  and  seventeen  days  during  the  summer  vaca- 
tion of  1902.  This  building,  covering  over  44,000  sq.  ft.  of  land 
was  completed  54  days  ahead  of  contract  time.  It  is  a  par- 
ticularly good  example  for  study.  It  shows  that  speed  can 
be  obtained  by  organization,  system,  and  the  elimination  of 
unnecessary  delays,  without  slighting  the  workmanship,  by 
simply  planning  ahead  the  date  of  arrival  of  materials  and 
their  proper  routing. 
98 

The  contract  for  this  building  was  signed  June  28th,  1902. 
The  next  two  days  were  spent  in  studying  the  method  of  at- 
tack. Various  schemes  for  dividing  the  building  into  small 
units  were  considered.  The  one  finally  adopted  was  to  di- 

19 


20  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

vide  the  building'  by  horizontal  planes  into  units,  with  a  fore- 
man in  charge  of  each  unit.    The  various  units  were : 

1.  Laying   out  work,    staking   piles,      11.     Woodwork  above   roof. 

giving   levels,    etc.  12.     Sheet  metal  work. 

2.  Piling.  13.     Roofing. 

3.  Excavation,   bracing  of  trenches      14.     Interior  lath  and  plaster. 

and  sawing  off  piles,  pumping,       15.  Heating  and  ventilating, 

rigging.  16.  Plumbing. 

4.  Concrete    around    piling.  17.  Wiring. 

5.  Block    granite   foundations.  18.  Interior  finish. 

6.  Brick  work  up  to  first  floor.  19.  Painting  and  glazing. 

7.  Structural  steel.  20.  Flooring. 

8.  First  floor.  21.  Blackboards. 

9.  Brickwork  first  floor  to  roof.  22.  Furniture. 
10.     Woodwork   first  floor  to  roof. 

99 

The  success  of  this  method  was  largely  secured  by  starting 
the  different  units  at  one  corner  of  the  work  and  running 
out  in  two  directions  at  once,  as  the  line  of  front  on  each  unit 
gets  longer  until  the  unit  is  over  half  done,  then  it  gets 
smaller  gradually. 
100 

Each  foreman  kept  his  workmen  as  long  as  he  needed 
them,  then  turned  them  over  to  the  foreman  of  the  other  units 
above.  In  other  words,  the  duty  of  a  foreman  of  a  unit  was  to 
complete  his  particular  unit  as  fast  as  the  unit  under  him 
would  permit. 
101 

The  lathing  was  put  on  while  the  roof  boarding  was  be- 
ing laid,  and  the  plastering  proceeded  simultaneously  with  the 
progress  of  the  roofing. 
102 

It  is  obvious  that  to  get  the  most  speed  on  a  building, 
as  many  different  branches  of  trades  must  be  put  to  work 
on  the  building,  and  at  as  early  a  date,  as  is  possible. 
103 

For  a  building  of  this  character,  the  most  economy  can  be 
had  by  starting  on  a  corner  and  enlarging  in  both  directions  as 
fast  as  men  can  be  set  to  work. 
104 

Figure  9  shows  the  work  two  weeks  after  beginning  con- 
struction. 
105 

Figure  10  was  taken  three  weeks  after  commencing  the 
contract.  Tw'o  pile  drivers  are  on  the  job,  and  the  foremen 
of  units  2  to  8  are  pressing  each  other  right  up  to  the 
pile  drivers.  Foreman  of  unit  9  is  starting.  Note  that 
the  scaffold  is  being  erected  on  one  side  of  the  wall,  while 


METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTION, 


21 


the  bricklayers  are  building  the  wall  staging  high  from  the 
opposite  side.      This   method   enables  the   bricklayer   to   shift 
over  to  the  scaffold  on  the  other  side  of  the  wall,  and  to  con- 
tinue immediately  on  his  own  part  of  the  wall. 
106 

Never  shift  bricklayers  around  any  more  than  is  neces- 
sary. They  are  not  proud  of,  nor  interested  in,  a  piece  of 
work,  unless  they  build  it  all.  Furthermore,  there  is  always  a 


Fig.    9.— Massachusetts    Institute    of    Technology.     July    13,    1902. 

question  as  to  who  did  the  bad  piece  of  wall  if  several  differ- 
ent men  worked  on  the  same  piece. 
107 

Figure  n  shows  the  building  four  weeks  after  commenc- 
ing work.  Note  that  the  roof  is  being  put  on  in  one  corner, 
while  the  excavation  is  under  way  in  the  diagonal  corner. 
The  laths  are  being  put  on  and  the  plastering  mortar  is  being 
made  up  ahead. 
108 

Figure  12  shows  the  building  five  weeks  after  commenc- 
ing work.  From  the  beginning  of  the  work  300,000  bricks, 
ahead  of  what  were  needed,  were  always  kept  on  hand,  in  or- 


22 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 


26 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


METHODS  OF  CONSTRUCTION.  27 

der  not  to  run  short,  regardless  of  what  might  happen  on  the 
railroad  from  the  brick  yard.  The  best  looking  loads  were 
hauled  to  the  reserve  pile.  From  this  pile  of  brick  the 
outside  brick  were  culled.  The  rest  of  the  brick  were  delivered 
as  near  as  possible  to  the  walls  where  they  were  to  be  used. 
Note  the  athletic  contest  on  the  four  similar  walls. 
109 

Figure  13  shows  the  building  six  weeks  after  commenc- 
ing work.  The  roofing  is  started  and  the  plastering  is  being 
put  on  inside  the  building.  Note  the  athletic  contest  on  the 
skylights,  also  the  large  number  of  ladders.  Plenty  of  ladders 
and  stairs  will  save  traveling  time  on  a  building. 
110 

Figure  14  shows  the  building  seven  weeks  after  commenc- 
ing work.  Three-quarters  of  the  roof  is  tight.  Note  the  small 
amount  of  room  that  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  requires  when  it  is 
not  in  use.  The  36  horses  in  the  foreground  will  stage  350 
lin.  ft.  of  wall  22  ft.  high. 
Ill 

These  pictures  prove  conclusively  the  value  of  the  method 
here  employed. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

ROUTING  OF  MATERIALS. 
112 

In  order  to  secure  the  most  effective  work  it  is  necessary 
that   the   material   be   routed   to   the   men   with   the   greatest 
economy  of  time  and  labor. 
113 

The  transportation  devices  and  apparatus  to  be  used 
should  be  the  subject  of  study  while  the  plans  are  being 
drawn,  so  that  after  work  on  the  job  has  once  commenced 
no  one  need  ever  be  held  back  by  lack  of  an  ample  supply  of 
conveniently  placed  material. 
114 

The  foreman  must  secure  from  the  office  the  plant  lay- 
out planned  for  his  job. 
115 

On  the  job  shown  by  Figs.  15  to  17,  the  main  building  of 
which  covers  eight  acres  and  which  is  a  good  example  of  a 
large  undertaking,  a  great  deal  of  study  was  given  to  the 
matter  of  routing  the  materials  from  the  railroad  spur  tracks 
to  the  workmen. 

116 

After  many  kinds   of  mechanical   methods  were   consid- 
ered, we  finally  decided  to  use  horses  and  carts,  to  load  the 
carts  at  the  cars  on  the  spur  tracks,  and  to  haul  the  bricks 
to  the  exact  place  where  the  bricklayers  could  pick  them  up. 
117 

In  order  to  accomplish  this,  inclined  runways,  Fig.  16, 
were  built  on  various  levels  to  the  top  floor  of  the  building. 
The  bricks  were,  by  this  method,  carried  from  the  cars  on  the 
track  to  the  bricklayers  with  but  one  handling,  that  handling 
being  the  unloading  of  the  cars. 
118 

Laborers  were  used  to  keep  the  brick  in  close  to  the  ma- 
sons, and  to  carry  brick  up  to  the  scaffolds.  This  method  re- 
duces the  number  of  tenders  to  a  minimum.  The  mortar  was 

2* 


ROUTING   OF  MATERIALS. 


29 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM, 


ROUTING    OF   MATERIALS.  31 

transported  the  same  way.    The  same  runs  were  also  used  by 

the  carts  that  hauled  up  the  timber  and  flooring. 

119 

The  organization  on  this  work  consisted  of  one  general 
superintendent,  and  a  foreman  mason  and  foreman  carpenter 
on  each  building. 
120 

A  tower,  Fig.  17,  was  built  in  the  center  of  the  lot  and 
from  this  tower  the  superintendent  could  see  all  portions  of 
the  work.  It  was  equipped  with  a  telephone,  megaphone  and 
field  glasses,  and  was  used  for  many  different  purposes. 


Fig.    17. — Tower  Sixty  Feet  High   From   Which    Transportation  Was 
Superintended. 

121 

When  brick  were  needed  on  any  wall  of  any  particular 
building,  the  foreman  of  that  building  would  shout  through 
his  megaphone  to  the  boy  on  the  top  of  the  tower.  He,  in  turn, 
would  shout  through  his  megaphone  to  the  foreman  of  trans- 
portation to  carry  the  next  turn  of  cart-loads  to  a  certain  place 
in  a  certain  building. 
122 

The  result  of  this  method  of  handling  on  a  large  job 
proves  that  the  saving  more  than  justifies  the  cost  of  the  runs. 
We  believe  this  to  be  the  most  economical  of  all  methods. 


32  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

123 

On  city  jobs  where  large  quantities  of  brick,  sand  or  such 
material  are  to  be  used,  it  is  sometimes  good  practice  to  ar- 
range a  platform  onto  which  the  teams  can  drive  and  dump 
the  carts  down  into  the  basement.  Figure  18  shows  such  an 
arrangement.  This  platform  will  prevent  blockades  when 
there  are  numerous  carts  in  line,  will  keep  the  street  clean, 
and  will  save  one  handling  of  materials. 
124 

Figure   19  shows  a   good  layout  of  plant  for  speed  and 
economy.  Two  boom  derricks  were  set  up  so  as  to  pick  up  three 


Fig.   18. — Sidewalk   Traps  for  Rapid   Handling  of  Material. 

kinds  of  face  brick,  common  brick,  and  three  kinds  of  mortar, 
columns,  girders,  beams,  flooring,  cut  stone,  door  and  window 
frames,  and  masons'  scaffolds.  They  were  also  used  to  raise 
each  other  up  to  the  floor  above.  These  two  derricks  did  all 
the  hoisting  required  on  this  building. 
125 

Figure  20  shows  the  construction  of  a  seven-story  hotel 
in  San  Francisco.  On  this  job  it  was  found  to  be  cheapest  to 
erect  a  loo-ft.  derrick  with  a  95-ft.  boom  with  a  slewing  rig 
on  a  tower  at  the  second  floor  level  of  the  building.  This  der- 
rick hoisted  the  mortar  and  bricks  from  the  basement,  and  the 
lumber  and  steel  from  the  carts  in  the  street,  to  the  various 


ROUTING    OF    MATERIALS. 


33 


floors.     Where  the  wages  of  building  laborers  are  very  high, 
this  is  generally  the  most  economical  method  of  getting  stock 
to  bricklayers,  provided  there  are  also  other  heavy  materials 
to  be  hoisted. 
126 

If  elevators  are  used  for  handling  stock,  put  a  cleat  on  the 

elevator  to  stop  the  wheel  barrow  at  the  right  place  so  that 


Fig.  19. — Heavy  Mill  Construction  Building  in  which  all  Material  was  Hoisted 
by   Two    Seventy-five    Foot   Boom    Derricks. 

neither  the  wheel  nor  handles  will  strike  the  floors  as  the 
elevator  ascends  and  descends.  If  the  barrow  is  to  be  hauled 
off  backward,  put  the  cleat  so  that  the  wheel  will  strike  it,  but 
if  the  barrow  is  taken  off  forward,  make  the  cleat  in  two 
pieces  and  so  located  that  the  legs  will  strike  them  and  wheel 


34 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


will  go  between  them.     Iron  plates  about  y&-in.  thick  on  the 
car  under  the  legs  of  the  barrow  will   save  time  in  putting 
the  barrow  in  exact  place  on  car,  as  the  barrow  can  be  slid 
into  place  without  lifting  the  handles. 
127 

When  tending  a  bricklayer  from  above,  as,  for  example  on 
sewer  work,  requiring  the  lowering  of  brick  from  above,  the 
brick  must  be  piled  in  the  exact  manner  shown  in  Fig.  21. 


Fig.  20.— Derrick  with  Slewing-  Rig-  Erected  on  a  Pedestal  Two  Stories  High 

in    San   Francisco. 

Bricks  piled  in  this  manner,  i.  e.,  courses  of  two  headers  al- 
ternating with  three  bull  headers,  will  not  fall  out  and  hurt  the 

man  below. 
128 

If  the  bricks  are  piled  up  with  the  ordinary  bond  of  an 
8-in.    pier,   the   bricks   are   sure   to   fall    out   occasionally,    es- 
pecially if  they  strike  anything  while  being  lowered. 
129 

It  is  generally  economical  to  provide  a  board  about  16  ins. 

square  with  two  pieces  of  i-in.  board  nailed  to  keep  the  brick 
from  riding  on  the  rope  while  the  brick  are  being  piled  up. 
Two  brick  can  be  used  for  this  purpose,  but  require  more  mo- 
tions to  operate. 
130 

The  rope  should  be  spliced  on  the  hook.    Old  rope  J^-in, 


ROUT IX G   OP  MATERIALS. 


35 


in  diameter  is  the  best,  as  it  will  not  twist  so  much  when  low- 
ering, and  it  will  lay  closer  to  the  brick.  The  hook  should  be 
on  the  side  of  the  pile,  near  the  top,  but  never  at  the  top.  Six 
feet  of  light  chain  between  the  hook  and  the  rope  will  add 
to  the  durability  and  safety. 


Fig.    21.— Bricks    Piled    for    Lowering    Into    a    Trench. 


'31 


The  handiest  way  to  lower  the  load  is  to  cover  the  leg 
above  the  knee  with  canvas  or  leather  and  let  the  rope  draw 
across  the  top. 


CHAPTER   V. 
SCAFFOLDS. 

132 

The  kind  of  staging  that  can  be  used  on  a  building  to  best 
advantage,  and  its  location  are  matters  that  are  handled  dif- 
ferently on  jobs  where  there  are  several  contractors  and 
on  jobs  where  the  entire  work  is  done  by  different  foremen 
under  the  same  general  contractor. 
133 

Figures  22  to  28  show  a  job  that  we  built  as  general 
contractors  in  Montreal,  where  local  conditions  made  a  boom 
derrick  with  boom-slewing  rig  the  most  economical  form  of 
plant,  because  it  conveyed  the  concrete  of  the  footings,  placed 
the  stone  of  the  foundations,  set  the  cut  stone,  set  the  floor 
timbers  and  iron  columns,  and  hoisted  the  brick  and  mortar. 
In  fact  it  did  all  hoisting  of  all  materials. 
134 

The  bricks  and  mortar  were  hoisted  in  scale  boxes,  and 
were  carried  to  the  masons  in  hods. 
135 

This  job  is  a  good  study  in  scaffolds,  and  illustrates  the 
value  of  using  for  each  case  the  kind  of  scaffold  best  adapted 
to  secure  the  most  speed  and  economy. 
136 

The  Gilbreth  scaffold  was  used  for  outside  scaffold  as 
high  as  it  would  reach,  and  outriggers  were  used  above.  On 
walls  where  no  outside  scaffolds  were  required,  the  Gilbreth 
scaffold  was  used  for  all  inside  scaffolding.  Where  outriggers 
were  required,  they  were  planked  over  both  inside  and  out- 
side. Trestle  horses  were  used  where  there  were  many  breaks 
in  the  wall.  On  the  rear  portion  of  the  building  that  had 
no  floors,  the  Boston  scaffold  was  used. 
137 

In  Fig.  23  note  the  kind  of  underflooring  used,  i.  e.,  2x4- 
in.  stuff  on  edge.  When  this  kind  of  flooring,  in  fact,  when 
any  kind  of  flooring  over  2  ins.  thick  is  used,  at  least  one  piece 
should  be  left  out  all  around  next  to  the  wall  until  the  roof  is 

36 


SCAFFOLDS. 


37 


on.  If  this  is  not  done  the  flooring  may  swell  after  a  rain, 
and  push  the  wall  out  of  place.  The  missing  piece  can  be  put 
in  after  all  possible  swelling  has  taken  place. 


138 


When  placing  mortar  boards,  boxes  or  tubs  for  walls,  com- 
posed mostly  of  piers,  see  Fig.  24,  always  have  the  mortar 
boxes  and  the  brick  so  placed  that  the  bricklayer  can  pick  up 


38  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

the  brick  and  mortar  at  the  same  time,  and  without  taking  a 
step. 


139 

If  there  is  a  left-handed  bricklayer  on  the  wall,  the  posi- 
tion of  his  mortar  and  brick  should  be  reversed  (see  Fig.  24), 
so  that  he  will  not  be  handicapped  in  the  athletic  contest. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


39 


The  above  rule  does  not  apply  to  blank  walls,  however. 
Where   the   wall   has   few   openings,   mortar   boxes    must  be 
placed  as  shown  in  Fig.  25. 
140 

In  Fig.  26  note  the  dump  cart  ready  to  dump  the  load 
of  brick  into  the  scale  box  to  save  one  handling.     Note  the 


40  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

method  of  increasing  the  height  of  the  bricklayers'  platform 
on  the  Gilbreth  scaffold.  Note  the  method  of  staying  the  win- 
dow frames  so  that  the  stays  will  be  out  of  the  workmen's 
way  until  the  frame  is  bricked  in  enough  to  permit  removing 
the  stay.  Note  the  spreaders  in  the  window  frames  to  pre- 
vent the  brick  work  from  bowing  in  the  frames.  These  spread- 
ers are  not  made  right  in  this  figure.  They  are  too  long. 


(End  of  Top  Plank  must  be 
*\Flush  with  Side  of  Horse 

The     Right    Way. 


TT 

The    Wrong  Way. 


The     Wrong    Way- 


The    Wronq    Way.     • 

Fig.  25.— The  Right  and  Wrong  Way  to  Arrange  Plank  and  Mortar  Boxes  on 
the  Gilbreth   Scaffold. 

141 

The  spreaders  should  be  made  the  exact  length  of  the 
width  of  the  frame,  put  in  horizontally  and  tacked  to  a  part  of 
the  frame  that  will  not  show  the  nail  hole  when  the  spreader 
is  removed. 
142 

Make  a  run  for  hod  carriers  down  on  to  the  outside  scaf- 
fold as  shown  in  Fig.  27.     Never  permit  the  hod  carriers  to 
pass  their  hods  to  each  other,  if  a  run  can  be  built  that  will  not 
disturb  the  bricklayers. 
143 

Where  there  is  a  strong  wooden  floor,  the  best,  safest, 
and  cheapest  form  of  fastening  for  the  inside  end  of  the  out- 
rigger is  to  spike  a  strip  of  3  x  4-in.  wooden  joist  on  to  the 
floor  parallel  to  the  outrigger  and  nail  an  8xi-in.  board  to 
the  strip  and  also  to  the  outrigger  in  such  a  manner  as  not 
only  to  hold  it  up  and  down,  but  also  to  prevent  the  outrigger 
from  rolling  over  sideways.  See  A  in  Fig.  28. 


SCAFFOLDS, 


144 


Outriggers  may  be  attached  to  beams  by  a  lashing  twist- 
ed tight  with  the  twister  nailed  to  the  outrigger.  See  B,  in 
Fig.  28. 


145 


Where  the  weight  is  not  too  great,  wooden  centers  for 
fiat  and  segmental  arches  can  be  best  supported  by  vertical 
pieces  extending  up  from  the  sill  below  and  held  in  place  by 


42  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

a  spreader   made   slightly  longer  than   the  distance  between 

the  uprights. 

146 

If  a  few   nails   are   necessary,   use   cut  nails  and   do   not 
drive  them  home.     Leave  at  least  ^g-in.  of  the  nail  under  the 
head  out  of  the  wood. 
147 

Nails  driven  clear  in  will  not  hold  in  green  brick  work 
one-half  what  they  can  be  made  to  hold  if  driven  as  described 


SCAFFOLDS. 


43 


above.     The  spring  of  the  board  tends  to  pull  them  out  after 
each  blow  of  the  hammer  just  enough  to  make  them  loose. 
148 

In   l;ig.   29  note  the   method  of   staying  the  back  board 
This  is  better  than  nailing  to  the  outside  plank. 
149 

The  boom  of  the  derrick  being  long  enough  to  reach  over 
all  three  walls,  the  various  materials  are  piled  by  themselves. 
150 

The  lumber  is  piled  near  the  shed  in  the  rear  where  the 
carpenters  can  work  during  the  rain  at  framing  timbers. 


A 


Fig.  28.— Methods  of  Staying  Outriggers. 


151 


The  iron  work,  cut  stone  and  face  brick  are  stacked 
up  where  needed,  and  the  scale  boxes  are  placed  where  the 
brick  carts  can  dump  directly  into  them. 


152 


While  many  brick  may  spill  out  of  the  scale  box  when 
the  cart  is  dumped,  one  handling  is  saved  on  all  brick  that 
land  in  the  box. 


153 


Note  the  way  the  outrigger  scaffold  is  built  around  the 
corner.     This  method  can  be  used  when  the  corner  piers  are 


44 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


not   too   large.     When  they  are   large  it   is   sometimes   con- 
venient to  leave  a  hole  in  the  pier  for  an  outrigger. 
154 

When    it   is    necessary   to   build   a   staging  up   from   the 
ground  on,  the  outside  of  a  building,  as  is  generally  the  case 


with  digester  houses  of  pulp  mills,  no  better  form  of  scaffold 
has  been  devised  where  lumber  is  cheap,  than  what  is  called 
'the  Boston  scaffold,  Fig.  30.  It  consists  of  vertical  poles  of 
3  x4-in.  spruce,  placed  8  ft.  apart,  and  the  width  of  five  lo-in. 
spruce  planks  plus  4  ins.  (total  54  ins.)  away  from  the  face  of 
the  wall. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


45 


155 

Horizontal  ledger  boards   I   in.   thick  and  at   least   7  ins. 
wide  are  nailed  on  the  inside  of  the  poles  with  five  i2-penny 
cut  staging  nails. 
156 

Putlogs  of  3  x  4-in.  spruce,  or  its  equal,  rest  one  end 
(without  nailing),  on  the  top  of  the  ledger  and  against  the 
pole,  and  the  other  end  on  the  brick  wall.  The  putlog  may 
have  to  be  notched  (seldom  over  l/2  in.)  on  its  inside  end,  so 


Pflfsi 

iiflilfirlliy 


Fig.   30.— The  Boston   Scaffold. 

that  it  will  not  be  so  high  as  to  interfere  with  the  bricklayers' 
Jine  on  the  same  course  of  brick.     It  must  not  extend  into  the 
wall  more  than  one  brick  wide. 
157 

On  top  of  the  putlogs,  lay  the  2-in.  plank.     The  plank 
should  not  be  nearer  the  wall  than  4  ins.  unless  there  are  men 
working  underneath  who  might  be  hurt  by  falling  brick. 
158 

Spring  stays  must  be  put  on  each  ledger  and  each  pole  at 
every  other  junction  of  ledger  and  pole   (see  Fig.  30),  unless 
there  is  an  opportunity  to  stay  in  through  the  windows.     Xote 
the  temporary  stairway  around  the  elevator  tower. 
159 

When  spring  stays  are  used,  the  brick  or  wooden  blocks 
must  be  placed  as  near  the  putlog  hole  as  it  is  possible  to  have 


46 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


SCAFFOLDS.  47 

it,  without  the  spring-  stay  breaking  when  it  is  bent  down 
to  be  nailed  to  the  ledger.  If  the  spring  stay  does  not  grip 
the  brickwork  hard  it  is  useless.  The  outer  end  of  the  spring- 
stay  should  be  nailed  with  three  12-penny  cut  nails  to  the  top 
of  the  ledger  and  in  a  position  hard  against  the  pole. 
160 

Until  a  Boston  staging  is  high  enough  to  be  stayed  by 
spring  stays,  it  should  be  stayed  by  slanting  braces  nailed  to 
large  stakes  driven  in  the  ground,  as  shown  by  Fig.  31.  This 
staging  will  then  be  so  rigid  that  window  frames  may  be 
stayed  to  it. 
161 

Another  effective  method  of  staging  and  a  much  better 
one  than  the  spring  stay,  if  it  is  also  to  be  used  to  hold  up 
the  staging  plank,  is  to  drive  a  wooden  wedge  hard  in  the  put- 
log hole  on  top  of  the  putlog,  and  drive  two  12-penny  nails 
from  the  putlog  into  the  pole. 
162 

Never  drive  a  nail  in  a  putlog  except  when  it  is  used  as  a 
stay. 
163 

A  putlog  should  always  rest  against  a  pole  and  never  on 
the  ledger  away  from  the  pole. 
164 

Be  sure  the  pole  rests  on  a  piece  of  plank  that  will  prevent 
it  from  settling  when  the  weight  is  put  on  it.     Never  stand  a 
pole  on  top  of  the  ground  without  a  board  or  piece  of  plank 
under  it. 
165 

If  ledgers  less  than  8  ins.  wide  are  used  it  is  advisable 
to  nail   cleats  on  the   pole   hard   up  under  the  bottom  of  the 
ledger  (see  Fig.  31). 
166 

To  splice  a  pole  use  two  pieces  of  i-in.  board  4  ins.  to  5 
ins.  wide  and  2  ft.  6  ins.  to  3  ft.  long,  with  six  12-penny  cut 
nails  in  each  board.  That  makes  six  nails  in  each  pole.  Put  the 
spliceboards  so  that  they  will  be  out  of  the  way  of  the  ledgers. 

The  ledger  should  be  nailed  against  the  pole  and  never 
against  the  splice  boards. 
167 

Nail  the  next  ledger  board  on  to  the  poles  before  the 
masons  start  to  work  on  the  completed  stage,  as  it  forms  a 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.  32.— Ledger  Used  as  a  Backboard. 

good  backboard  to  prevent  the  bricklayers  and  tenders  falling 

over.  (See  Fig.  32.) 

168 

Never  nail  a  ledger  temporarily  with  less  than   five   12- 
penny  cut  staging  nails.     Many  a  staging  has  fallen  because 


Fig.   33.— Hanging  Bracket   for  Supporting  Scaffold  Without   Outrigger. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


49 


it  was  nailed  temporarily,  and  then  loaded  before  the  rest  of 

the  nails  were  driven. 

169 

There  is  a  great  difference  in  the  quality  of  staging  nails. 
They  should  always  be  tested  by  being  driven  into  wood  to 
within  i  in.  from  the  head  of  the  nail,  in  which  position  they 
must  stand  bending  forwards  and  backwards  at  right  angles 
twice  each  w^ay,  without  showing  a  sign  of  fracture. 
170 

The  inside  plank  should  always  be  turned  bottom  up  and 
against  the  wall,  or  the  brickwork  will  be  spattered  by  the 
rain  striking  the  mortar  dust  on  the  staging  plank. 


Fig.    34.— Outrigger  for  Inside   as  well   as   Outside   Scaffolds. 


171 


Do  not  leave  any  planks  on  the  staging  below  the  place 
where  bricklayers  are  working,  because  the  dropping  mortar 
will  strike  and  spatter  against  the  wall  and  cause  expense  to 
clean  off. 
172 

A  hole  for  an  outrigger  in  the  corner  of  the  building  can 
often  be  dispensed  with  by  putting  an  outrigger  over  the  roof 
and  hanging  down  from  it,  as  shown  by  Fig.  33. 
173 

When  outriggers  are  used  for  exterior  scaffolds  and  there 
are  not  many  brick  in  the  piers,  and  stays  to  window  frames 


50  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

are  numerous,   it  is   sometimes   good  practice   to  use  trestle 
horses  on  top  of  the  outriggers,  inside  as  well  as  outside,  as 
shown  by  Fig.  34. 
174 

Figure  35  shows  a  method  of  building  one  story  ahead  of 
another  without  toothing.  Toothing  must  be  avoided  wher- 
ever possible.  Outriggers  form  a  handy  nailing  for  stays  to 
window  frames. 


Fig.  35.— Outrigger  Scaffolds  for  Two  Different  Stories  on  the  Same  Wall. 

175 

One  of  the  many  advantages  of  outriggers  over  any  other 
kind  of  scaffold  besides  the  fact  that  they  leave  no  putlog 
holes,  is  that  the  frames  and  glass  can  be  put  in  the  windows, 
and  the  lower  stories  can  be  finished,  as  there  are  no  staging 
stays  in  the  way.  This  is  shown  by  Fig.  36.  Note  the  method 
of  putting  on  the  backboard  to  prevent  bricks  from  falling  off 
on  the  men  underneath. 


SCAFFOLDS.  5! 

176 

For  exterior  hanging  scaffolds,  where  the  bricks  and  mor- 
tar are  passed  out  of  the  windows,  there  is  no  scaffold  so  safe 
and  economical  as  the  Murray  Suspended  Scaffold,  Fig.  37. 
This  scaffold  is  in  two  patterns  :  Where  the  winding  drums 
are  above  and  attached  to  the  outrigger.  Where  the  winding 
drums  are  below  and  attached  to  the  scaffold  platform. 


Fig.   36.— Outrigger  Scaffold   on   Type  of  Building  Where   it  is   the  Most 
Desirable  Form  of  Scaffold. 


177 


The  latter  pattern  is  the  most  desirable  to  use  where  the 
building  is  tall  enough  to  warrant  shifting  the  outriggers  to 
a  new  and  higher  position,  as  the  scaffold  can  be  made  fast 


52  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

to   the  lower  outriggers,  while   the   ends   of  the   supporting 
cables  can  be  carried  up  and  attached  to  a  new  set  of  outrig- 
gers without  stopping  the  bricklayers.      Outriggers   for  this 
scaffold  should  be  spaced  10  ft.  apart. 
178 

Figures  38  to  40  show  the  hanging  bar  method  of  mak- 
ing temporary  floors  in  a  power  station.  There  are  often  rea- 
sons for  hanging  scaffolds  from  above  instead  of  building  them 
up  fiom  below.  Here  is  a  case  where  speed  of  construction 
made  it  necessary  to  devise  some  form  of  scaffold  hanging 
from  above,  so  that  the  engine  beds,  machinery,  piping,  wiring 


Fig.   37. — Murray   Suspended   Scaffold. 

and  finishing  of  the  basement  and  first  floors  could  be  done 
while  the  exterior  brick  walls  were  being  built.  The  scaf- 
fold hangers  used  consisted  of  3  x  J^-in.  flat  bars  hooked  over 
the  lower  chords  of  the  trusses.  These  bars  hung  down  in 
pairs  and  were  punched  I  ft.  on  centers  with  i-in.  holes 
through  which  were  placed  %-in.  bolts  with  a  ledger  made  of 
3x  12-in  plank.  These  supported  6x6-in.  putlogs  20  ft.  long, 
and  afforded  temporary  floors  of  exceedingly  economical  cost. 
Note  here  the  two  sets  of  double  elevators.  One  set  was  lo- 
cated at  each  of  the  opposite  ends  of  the  boiler  house  and 
engine  house  of  this  power  station. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


53 


179 

The  hanging  bar  form  of  scaffold  permits  finishing  the 
work    in    the    basement    and    first    floor    without    having    any 
scaffold  in  the  way. 
180 

As  soon  as  the  walls  were  up  to  the  ceilings,  the  planks 
were  lowered,  the  hanging  bars  unhooked  and  lowered,  and 
the  entire  interior  was  clear  of  all  false  work. 


54 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


rig.  39. — Temporary  Floors  Hung  from  the  Roof  of  a  Large  Power  Station. 

181 

When  starting-  bricklayers  at  the  ground  level  always 
lay  down  plank  for  the  bricklayers  to  stand  on.  If  they  have 
a  proper  place  to  stand  upon,  they  will  lay  more  than  enough 
brick  to  compensate  for  the  extra  labor  of  laying  down  the 
plank. 


Fig.    40.— Temporary   Floors    Near   Under   Side   of   Roof   Trusses. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


55 


wooden    floor,    no    preparation    for    a 


182 

AYhen    there    is    a 
scaffold   is   required. 
183 

Have  all  stagings  inspected  by  an  intelligent  bricklayer 
before  they  are  used.     Have  him  say  in  the  presence  of  wit- 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.    42.— Stays   So   Made  for  Window   Frames  that  They  Will   Not   Retard 

Bricklayers. 

nesses  that  the  staging  is  right,  before  it  is  used.     We  shall 
then  know  that  we  have  done  everything  in  our  power  to  make 
the  stagings  secure,  and  to  prevent  accident. 
184 

Cover  all  projections  of  brick  work  as  shown  in  Fig.  41, 
so  that  the  falling  bricks  will  do  no  harm,  and  so  that  the 
falling  mortar  will  bound  off  instead  of  pile  up.  Be  sure 
that  the  covering  is  so  stayed  that  it  will  not  blow  off  in  a 
high  wind  and  injure  the  public  in  the  street. 
185 

All  window  frames  should  be  handled  and   set  by  car- 
penters. 


Fig.  43. — Correct  Way  of  Staying  and  Lining  Frames. 


SCAFFOLDS. 


57 


Fig1.   44.— Type   of  Old-Fashioned   Staging  Horse. 


186 


The  carpenter  should  nail  the  stays  to  the  frames  in  such 
a  place  and  manner  that  they  will  interfere  in  the  least  with 
the  bricklayers.  (See  Fig".  42.) 


Fig.  45.— Type  of  Trestle  Horse  Staging. 


58  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

187 

As  soon  as  the  frame  is  in  its  proper  place  and  stayed,  the 
carpenter  should  mark  with  a  pencil  on  the  sill  around  the  end 
of  the  frame,  so  that  it  will  be  readily  detected  if  the  frame  has 
been  moved  out  of  place. 
188 

If  the   carpenter  fails   to  pile  up  brick  on  the  frame  to 
weight  it  down,  the  bricklayer  should  pile  up  enough  brick 
upon  it  to  keep  it  in  place  until  it  is  bricked  in. 
189 

Window  frames  will  seldom  be  plumb  and  straight  un- 
less the  foreman  bricklayer  and  foreman  carpenter  co-operate. 
If  the  frames  are  near  together,  a  continuous  piece  of  joist 
tacked  onto  the  frames  will  help  to  keep  them  in  place  while 
they  are  being  bricked  in.  (See  Fig.  43.) 
190 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  bricklayer  who  is  in  a  position  to 
sight  along  the  window  frames  to  notify  the  foreman  brick- 
layer if  the  frames  do  not  appear  to  be  all  in  line  as  well  as 
all  plumb. 
191 

Put  a  spreader  in  all  tall  frames,  or  the  bricks  will  surely 
push  and  bow  the  sides  in. 
192 

Figure  44  shows   a  type   of  scaffold   horse   that   is   used 
in  many  parts  of  America,  but  should  never  be  permitted  on 
our  work. 
193 

All  inside  scaffold  should  either  be  the  Gilbreth  scaffold 
or  else  the  standard  4-legged  trestle  horse. 
194 

Compare  the  method  shown  by  Fig.  45  with  that  of  the 
Gilbreth  scaffold.  Bricklayers  cannot  be  expected  to  lay  as 
many  brick  when  working  in  this  position  as  when  standing 
up  between  a  wall  and  a  stock  platform,  each  2  ft.  high, 
where  one  can  stand  as  if  working  at  a  bench. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
GILBRETTI    SCAFFOLD,    HOD    TYPE. 

195 

The   Gilbreth  scaffold  accomplishes  two  things : 

(A)  Helps  make  better  workmanship. 

(B)  Helps  make  more  economical  workmanship. 

(A)  It  helps  make  better  workmanship  for  four  reasons: 

(a)  It  keeps  the  bricklayer  at  a  constant  height,  where 
he  can  lay  his  brick  with  the  most  precision. 

(b)  It  enables  the  bricklayer,  even  on  overhand  work, 
to  keep  the  wall  backed  up  solid,  i.  e.,  the  entire  width  of  the 
wall. 

(c)  The  wall  being  always  backed   up  solid,  it  can  be 
properly  protected  from  rain  and  sleet  by  simply  putting  the 
staging  planks   on   it. 

(d)  The  bricks   can   be  best  bedded   because   the  work 
is   always   at   a   height   that  the   bricklayer   can    best   handle 
the  brick  and  mortar. 

(B)  The  Gilbreth  scaffold  makes  more  economical  work 
because : 

(a)  It   keeps   the   bricklayer   at   a  constant   height,   and 
that  height  is  such  that  no  stooping  over  is  required  to  pick- 
up brick  and  mortar,  and  no  stooping  nor  reaching  is  required 
to  lay  brick  and  mortar. 

(b)  It  reduces  the  number  and  the  length  of  motions. 

(c)  It  does  away  with  the  bad  practice  of  backing  up 
4  ins.  or  8  ins.  against  the  overhand  or  exterior  face  tier  (see 
Fig.  46),  and  permits  all  filling  of  each  course  to  be  done  the 
entire  width  of  the  wall  at  once.     (See  Fig.  47.) 

(d)  The  bricklayers'  platform  is  clear  at  all  times,  and 
there  are  no  bricks  underfoot. 

(e)  The  bricklayer  is  out  of  the  tender's  way  and  the 
tender  does  not  interrupt  the  bricklayer  as   he  passes  back 
and  forth. 

(f)  When  ordinary  scaffolds  are  used,  the  wall  is  gen- 

59 


5o 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


erally  built  $  ft.  above  the  floor.  See  Fig.  46.  When  the  Gil- 
breth  scaffold  is  used,  the  wall  is  not  built  more  than  3  ft. 
8  ins.  above  the  floor.  This  i  ft.  4  ins.  when  built  from 
the  floor  is  where  the  most  reaching  has  to  be  done  and 
consequently  that  extra  time  and  labor  is  all  saved  by  set- 


Scaffold 


Id 


17 


16 


15 


14 


13 


I  12 


76 


15 


14 


73 


72 


71 


70 


69 


68 


67 


60 


59 


58 


56 


55 


54 


53 


52 


51 


65 


64 


62 


61 


_50 


49 


48 


47 


46 


45 


36 


33 


32 


29 


28 


27 


44 


43 


42 


41 


40 


39 


38 


LJL 


24 


23 


22 


21 


17 


16 


15 


14 


13 


10 


20          3 


37     I      19      \ 


L-L 


Fig.   46.— Sequence  in  Which  Courses  and  Tiers  are  Built  Overhand  from  a 
Trestle   Horse    Scaffold. 

ting  up  the   Gilbreth  scaffold  when  the  wall  is   3  ft.   8  ins. 
above  the  floor. 

(g)     When  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  is  once  set  up,  and  it 
takes  no  longer  to  set  it  up  than  it  does  to  set  up  a  trestle 


GILBRETH    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE. 


6l 


horse  scaffold,  there  is  no  more  worry,  trouble  or  stage 
building  for  that  wall  in  that  story.  No  time  is  lost  in  shift- 
ing- men  from  wall  to  wall.  No  athletic  speed  contests  are 
broken  up.  This  last  feature  alone  is  of  great  importance. 


78 


77 


15 


74 


72 


70 


69 


68 


73 


67 


66 


65 


64 


63 


62 


60 


59 


58 


57 


56 


61 


55. 


54 


52 


48 


47 


51 


50 


33 


46 


44 


43 


42 


31 


30 


29 


28 


27 


Foot 
Pafent  ScafiMd 


\ 


41 


Id 


16 


15 


14 


40 


39 


38 


37 


36 


25 


24 


23 


22 


21 


13 


12 


10 


35 


_208 


34 


19 


Fig.    47. — Sequence   in   Which    Courses   and    Tiers   are   Built   Overhand    from 
the   Gilbreth   Scaffold,   Hod   Type. 

196 

When  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  is  to  be  used  and  there  is 
not  a  wooden  floor  to  nail  it  to,  lay  down  three  rows  of  plank 
as  shown  by  Fig.  48. 


197 


198 


Put  the  inside  plank  hard  against  the  wall. 


Put  the  outside  plank  out  to  the  end  of  the  bottom  piece  of 
the  horse. 


62 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.   48.— Temporary  Floor  for  the   Gilbreth   Scaffold. 


199 


Put  the  center  plank  where  It  will  come  exactly  under  the 
uprights  of  the  horse. 
200 

Use  no  nails  except  in  the  end  of  the  stay  rods. 
201 

Do  not  build  the  wall  more  than  3  ft.  8  ins.  above  the 
floor  before  setting  up  the  scaffold.     Take  advantage  of  the 


Fig.  49.— Setting  Up  Gilbreth  Scaffold. 


GILBRETll    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE.  63 

economies  of  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  in  every  course  more  than 

3  ft.  8  ins.  above  the  floor. 

202 

Superintendents  must  see  that  the  story  poles  that  the}/ 
give  to  the  men  on  the  leads  have  marked  on  them,  at  the 
height  of  3  ft.  8  ins.  that  the  scaffold  must  be  set  up  as  soon  as 
the  wall  is  3  ft.  8  ins.  above  the  floor.  Otherwise  the  men 
will  build  the  wall  5  ft.  high  in  accordance  with  the  old  fash- 
ioned custom. 
203 

Stand  the  horses  up  10  ft.  6  ins.  apart,  with  the  red  side 
against  the  wall.    This  means  that  the  shorter  end  of  the  foot 


Fig.   50.— Hooking  One  Stay  Rod  to  Each  Horse. 

of  this  scaffold  horse  must  actually  touch  the  wall.     This  will 
give  exactly  i  in.  clearance  to  the  arm  supporting  the  brick- 
layers' platform. 
204 

This  scaffold  is  designed  to  very  close  measurements,  and 
is  the  result  of  many  years  of  actual  practice.     These  rules 
must  be  carried  out  literally.     (See  Fig.  49.) 
205 

Hook  one  stay  rod  in  an  eye  bolt  of  each  horse.  There 
is  an  eye  bolt  on  each  side  of  each  horse  and  it  does  not 
matter  to  which  side  the  rod  is  hooked.  Only  one  rod  is 
needed  to  each  horse.  See  Fig.  50. 


64  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

206 

Drive  two  lopenny  cut  staging  nails  into  the  holes  in 
the  lower  end  of  the  stay  rod. 
207 

Never,  under  any  circumstances,  drive  any  nails  into  the 
horse.     There  has  never  been  an  occasion  where  nails  in  the 
horse  were  necessary. 
208 

The  first  position  of  the  frame  in  the  horse  is  as  shown 
by  Fig.  50,  resting  on  the  foot  of  the  horse,  not  resting  on  a 
pin  in  the  horse.  This  is  important. 


Fig.  51.— Tenders'  Platform  Two  Plank  Wide. 

209 

Use  no  planks  less  than  2  x  10  ins.  Make  the  brick- 
layers' platform  two  planks  wide.  Make  the  stock  platform 
three  planks  wide.  Make  the  tenders'  platform  one  plank 
wide  when  it  is  first  set  up,  and  two  planks  wide  when  the 
staging  has  been  jacked  up  one  or  two  notches.  (See  Fig.  51.) 
Do  not  set  up  the  frame  in  the  horse  high  enough  at  first  to 
permit  two  planks  on  the  tenders'  platform. 
210 

Do  not  use  a  plank  on  the  stock  platform  long  enough  to 
rest  on  more  than  two  horses. 


GILBRETH    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE. 


Fig.    52. — A   Large   Number   of  Runs   to    Save   Time  and   Money. 


211 


Mortar  boxes  should  not  be  over  4  ft.  apart.  For  some 
inexplicable  reason,  foremen  do  not  realize  the  benefits  accru- 
ing from  having  boxes  near  together.  Even  the  bricklayers 
themselves,  when  it  is  left  to  them,  will  place  their  boxes  too 
far  apart.  On  our  work,  boxes  must  never  be  more  than  4  ft. 
apart,  and  on  the  Gilbreth  scaffold,  the  mortar  boxes  and  the 
plank  must  be  arranged  as  shown  in  Fig.  25. 
212 

Watch  carefully  the  circuit  the  tenders  make  when  leaving 
the  stock  pile,  dumping  and  returning  to  the  stock  pile.     It  is 


Fig.   53.— Long  Cleated  Runs  to   Save  Ladders. 


66  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

always  economical  to  make  return  trips  by  special  short  cut 

runs. 

213 

When  using  wheelbarrows  on  tenders'  run,  be  sure  that 
the  planks  are  laid  so  that  the  tenders  will  wheel  down  upon 
the  next  plank,  not  up  onto  the  next  plank. 
214 

Every  time  each   hodcarrier  passes  a  bricklayer   on  the 
same   stage,  he   interferes   with  the  speed  of  the  bricklayer. 
Many  different  runs,  Fig.  52,  will  enable  the  hodcarrier  to  go 
and  come  the  shortest  way  and  pass  the  fewest  bricklayers. 
215 

In  many  localities  it  is  hard  to  procure  skilled  hodcar- 
riers  who  can  climb  a  ladder  with  a  hodful  of  brick  or  mortar. 
Therefore,  oftentimes  a  long  cleated  run,  Fig.  53,  will  do 
away  with  the  necessity  of  a  ladder.  For  these  runs  use  plank 
3  or  4  ins.  thick,  so  that  they  will  not  be  springy  and  will  not 
require  props.  If  cleats  are  used,  they  should  not  be  more 
than  i  in.  thick,  and  they  should  be  spaced  at  even  distances. 
216 

It  is  not  possible  to  make  a  rule  covering  all  cases,  that 
will  state  how  far  apart  the  cleats  should  be.  The  distance 
apart  depends  on  the  kind  of  men  and  the  slant  of  the  run, 
and  is  a  matter  of  sufficient  importance  to  warrant  experi- 
menting under  the  local  conditions.  All  runs  should  be  wide 
enough  for  men  going  up  and  down  to  pass  one  another. 
217 

The  boss  of  the  wall  must  notify  the  foreman  if  stock  is 
not  coming  fast  enough,  also  if  the  mortar  is  too  rich,  too 
sandy  or  not  right  in  any  way. 
218 

It  is  good  practice  to  keep  the  floor  around  the  elevator 
one   story   higher   than   the   rest  of   the   building.     This   will 
enable  the  tenders  to  go  down  to  the  high  stagings  with  their 
load  and  to  come  up  from  the  stagings  empty. 
219 

Have  the  man  who  jacks  up  the  scaffold  stand  on  the 
tenders'  platform,  Fig.  54,  not  on  the  bricklayers'  platform. 
220 

Do  not  let  him  pull  out  a  pin  and  put  it  in  the  hole  above. 

See  that  he  has  a  spare  pin  and  that  he  puts  the  spare 
pin  in  place  in  the  upper  hole,  lowers  the  frame  down  on  it, 


GILBRET1I    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE.  67 


Fig.  54.— Jacking  Up  the  Scaffold  While  the  Men  are  Working  on  It. 

and  then  carries  the  lower  pin  to  the  next  horse  and  uses  it 
as  a  spare  pin.     In  other  words,  there  must  always  be  a  pin 
in  the  horse  as  a  double  safeguard. 
221 

To  hold   a  frame   in   place,  the   pin  should   go   in  under 


Fig.    55.— Location    of    the    Tenders'    Platform. 


fu  N! 


UNIVERSITY 


68 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


the  upper  member  of  the  frame.    It  should  never  go  through 

the  iron  hanger  of  the  frame,  nor  in  any  other  hole. 

222 

Never  jack  the  stock  platform  higher  than  the  inside  4  ins. 
of  the  wall,  as  otherwise  it  will  increase  the  length  of  motion 
for  each  brick. 
223 

Note  in  Fig.  55  that  the  tenders'  platform  is  located  at 
such  a  distance  below  the  stock  platform  as  to  enable  the 
tender  to  dump  his  hod  with  the  least  effort  and  with  no 
more  climbing  than  is  absolutely  necessary. 


ft      %  t 

JlgJ- 

SPriSj1"* 


i     "? 

,;   .'    -     •,.«.-  - 


Fig.  56.— Method  of  Adding  More  Braces  Without  Any  Nails. 


224 


When  tall  horses  are  used,  it  is  sometimes  desir- 
able to  prevent  them  from  swaying.  In  this  case  planks 
butting  against  the  foot  of  one  horse  and  leaning  against  the 
uprights  of  another  horse  (see  Fig.  56)  will  do  the  work 
perfectly.  Use  no  nails. 
225 

Bracing  two  or  three  horses  in  this  manner  will  gener- 
ally stay  all  of  one  line  of  horses. 
226 

Note  how  the  horse  is  used  to  hold  up  the  run. 
227 

Note  that  the  tender  in  the  center  of  Fig.  56 
is  loading  his  hod  the  right  way.  Note  that  he  is  straddling 
the  shank  of  the  hod,  and  is  picking  up  the  brick  with  both 
hands  at  the  same  time.  Foremen  should  see  that  all  brick 
hods  are  rilled  this  way. 


GILBRETH    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE.  69 

228 

In  places  where  hodcarriers  are  hard  to  procure,  unskilled 
laborers  will  have  to  be  taught  the  arrangement  of  the  brick 
in  the  hods,  which  will  differ  with  the  size,  and  with  the  shape 
of  the  men  and  their  shoulders.  Regardless  of  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  brick,  the  foreman  should  know  how  many  brick 
each  man  is  carrying.  Unless  there  is  some  special  reason  to 
the  contrary,  they  should  all  be  made  to  carry  the  same  num- 
ber of  brick. 
229 

The   Gilbreth  scaffold  is   particuarly  profitable  on  over- 
hand work,  because  it  maintains  the  bricklayer  always  at  the 
right  height  to  do  the  overhand  face  work  in  the  best  manner 
and  to  the  best  advantage.     (See  Fig.  57.) 
230 

Fig.  58  shows  that  a  bricklayer  can  lay  more  brick  in  the 
middle  of  the  wall  when  he  is  filling  in  between  the  outside 
tiers  than  when  he  is  backing  up  the  overhand  4  ins.  with  a 
backing  4  ins.  or  8  ins.  thick,  as  more  precision  of  workman- 
ship and  more  motions  are  required  in  the  latter  case. 
231 

It  is  also  obvious  that  the  best  wall  is  one  that  is  backed 
up  solid  at  least  every  header  high. 
232 

Figure  46  shows  a  wall  built  overhand  in  the  usual  man- 
ner, from  the  old-fashioned  type  of  scaffold.  It  is  built  5  ft. 
to  6  ft.  high.  It  is  a  slow,  expensive,  difficult  process  to 
build  any  portion  of  the  wall  more  than  3  ft.  8  ins.  above  the 
place  on  which  the  mason  stands.  This  same  method  and 
process  must  be  repeated  in  exactly  the  same  manner  on 
every  "staging  high"  of  the  wall.  The  men  must  be  shifted 
to  some  other  place  every  time  the  staging  is  built.  Only 
those  who  have  specially  timed  it  realize  the  great  amount 
of  time  actually  lost  by  shifting  men  about. 
233 

To  overcome   the   above  disadvantages,   if  for   no   other 
reason,  one  of  the  two  types  of  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  must  be 
used  on  all  walls  wherever  possible,   as   it  reduces  all  these 
disadvantages  to  a  minimum.    See  Fig.  47. 
234 

The  height  above  the  floor  that  the  wall  should  be  when 
the  scaffold  should  be  set  up  for  the  greatest  economy  is  a 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


GILBRETH    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE.  7l 

much   discussed   question   among'  bricklayers.      On   our  work 

the  following-  rules  shall  be  followed : 

235 

For  walls  laid  overhand  from  the  Gilbreth  scaffold — 

(a)  If  the  wall  is  five  tiers  of  brick  thick,  or  less,  set  up 
the  scaffold  when  the  wall  is  .3  ft.  8  ins.  above  the  floor. 

(b)  Set   up  the   scaffold   at   one   course   less   than   3  ft. 
8  ins.  in  height  for  every  tier  that  the  wall  is  over  five  tiers 
thick. 

236 

For  walls  laid  overhand  from  trestle  horse  staging — 
(a)     Divide  the  height  of  the  wall  into  even   "stagings 

high"  of  not  less  than  4  ft.  nor  more  than  6  ft.  high.     If  the 


Fig.  58.— Old  Method  of  Backing  Up  Solid  After  the  Overhand  Face  Has 
Been   Built    Staging  High. 

wall  is  thick,  it  will  be  more  economical  to  make  and  raise 
stagings  oftener,  so  as  to  have  less  reaching  for  the  brick- 
layers. If  the  wall  is  two,  three  or  even  four  tiers  of  brick 
thick,  it  is  generally  more  economical  to  have  the  bricklayers 
lay  even  6  ft.  high  than  to  raise  an  extra  tier  of  scaffold  horses 
and  to  lose  the  time  that  is  always  lost  when  moving  men  from 
one  staging  to  another. 
237 

Stagings  for  backing  up  only — 

(a)  Set  up  the  Gilbreth  scaffold  when  the  wall  is  3  ft. 
8  ins.  high  above  the  floor. 

(b)  Set   up  4-legged  trestle   horses  when  wall   is  4  ft. 
6  ins.  to  6  ft.  high. 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


GILBRETH    SCAFFOLD,    HOD     TYPE.  73 

238 

Figure  46  shows  by  the  numbers  the  sequence  in  which 
the  various  portions  of  a  brick  wall  shall  be  built  when  con- 
structed overhand  from  a  trestle  horse  staging. 
239 

No  sequence  will  be  permitted  that  changes  the  position 
of  the  headers  from  the  position  in  which  they  would  be  placed 
if  laid  from  both  sides. 
240 

Fig.  47  and  Figs.  65,  66,  67  and  68  show  the  sequence  in 
which  the  various  portions  of  the  same  wall  would  be  built 
from  the  Gilbreth  scaffold.  These  two  diagrams  show  con- 
clusively the  great  economy  gained  with  the  Gilbreth  scaf- 


Fig.  60.— Taking  Down  the  Gilbreth  Scaffold. 

fold,  if  it  is  used  in  a  manner  that  takes  advantage  of  all  of  its 
possibilities.  The  greatest  advantage  illustrated  by  these 
figures  is  that  the  brick  may  be  laid  in  large  level  areas  instead 
of  requiring  to  be  backed  up  one  or  two  tiers  at  a  time,  to  get 

on  the  headers  on  the  overhand  face. 
241 

A  small  amount  of  motion  study  will  show  the  advantage 
of  not  being  obliged  to  stoop  to  get  the  stock  for  that  portion 
of  the  wall  that  is  between  the  height  of  3  ft.  2  ins.  to  5  ft. 
above  the  floor ;  and,  in  time,  analysis  will  show  that  no 
allowance  will  have  to  be  made  for  the  time  that  men  are 
shifted  from  one  wall  to  another  while  the  staging  is  being 
raised. 
242 

Where  the  greatest  speed  is  required,  set  up  this  scaffold 


74  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

on  both  sides  of  the  wall.    With  the  scaffold  so  set  up  almost 

any  wall  can  be  built  a  story  high  in  one  day.    See  Fig.  59. 

243 

When  taking  down  the  horses  of  the  Gilbreth  scaffold— 
(a)     Clean  off  all  stock,  preferably  carrying  it  to  where 

it  will  be  used,  in  order  to  save  one  handling.    See  Fig.  60. 


Fig.  61. — Sliding  Down  the  Mortar  Boxes. 

(b)  Slide  down  the  mortar  boxes,  as  shown  in  Fig.  61. 

(c)  Take  down  the  planks,  one  at  a  time. 

(d)  Pull  up  the  stay  rods  from  the  floor  and  then  un- 
hook them  from  the  horse. 

(e)  Lay  the  horses  down  on  the  floor. 

(f)  Slide  the  frames  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  horse 
after  the  horses  lie  flat. 

244 

Do  not  drop  the  frames  down  while  the  horses  are  stand- 
ing, or  you  will  surely  break  the  bottom  piece  of  the  horse. 


CHAPTER    VII. 
GILBRETH  SCAFFOLD,  PACKET  TYPE. 

245 

The  Gilbreth  scaffold,  packet  type,  is  a  modification  of  the 
Gilbreth  scaffold  especially  adapted  to  the  packet  method  and 
the  fountain  trowel.  It  is  so  designed  that  it  may  be  set  up 
and  put  in  operation  before  the  wall  is  built  any  higher  than 
the  floor  on  which  the  bricklayer  stands. 
246 

There  are  several  reasons  for  setting  the  scaffold  up  at 
once,  as  soon  as  the  wall  is  level  with  the  top  of  the  floor. 
247 

First,   it   is   easier,  and   quicker,  consequently  more   eco- 
nomical, for  the  tender  to  unload  the  packs  of  brick  from  the 
wheelbarrow  to  the  stock  platform,  than  to  lower  them  down 
to  the  floor. 
248 

Second,  it  is  easier  and  quicker,  consequently  more  eco- 
nomical, for  the  bricklayers  to  take  their  bricks  from  the  stock 
platform  than  to  stoop  over  to  the  floor  for  them.  Further- 
more, with  this  scaffold  they  can  throw  the  mortar  from  the 
mortar  boxes  into  the  wall  without  stooping  either  at  mortar 
box  or  at  wall. 
249 

Set  up  the  scaffold  when  the  wall  is  as  high  as  the  floor 
on  which  the  mason  stands. 
250 

Place  the  horses  not  less  than  10  ft.  nor  more  than 
10  ft.  6  ins.  apart  on  centers.  It  is  important  that  this  dis- 
tance does  not  vary  more  than  the  limits  given,  or  it  will  seri- 
ously interfere  with  necessary  working  conditions  explained 
later. 
251 

Place  the  inside  end  of  the  footpiece  of  the  horse  against 
the  wall  (see  Fig.  62).  This  is  important,  because  if  the  bottom 
piece  is  against  the  wall  it  will  make  the  support  for  the 
bricklayers'  platform  clear  the  wall  by  exactly  I  in. 

75 


76  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

252 

Hook    one    stay    rod    onto    each    horse,    and    nail    it    to 
the   floor   with    two    lo-penny    cut   nails.      One   iron   stay   is 
enough  for  each  horse. 
253 

Put   two   planks    and    a   center   board  on  the  stock  plat- 


Fig.    62. — The   Packet  Type   for  Wheelbarrows. 


GILBRETH   SCAFFOLD,  PACKET   TYPE. 


77 


form.  Lay  the  plank  as  shown  in  Fig.  62.  Shove  the  "center 
plank"  hard  against  the  uprights  of  the  right-hand  horse, 
i.  e.,  the  one  nearest  the  hauling  lead  of  the  wall.  The  hole 
left  between  the  other  end  of  the  center  plank  and  the  left- 
hand  horse  is  covered  by  the  left-hand  mortar  box. 

254: 

Shove    this    box   hard    against    the    left-hand    horse,    and 
place   another   mortar   box   equidistant   between   this   first   or 
left-hand  mortar  box,  and  the  right-hand  horse.     This  will  leave 
two  equal  spaces  about  2  ft.  9  ins.  long  for  the  brick  boards. 
255 

Bolt  two  pieces  of  wood  2  ft.  5  ins.  long  crosswise 
into  the  stock  platform  for  a  track  under  the  brick  packets. 
The  tender  can  lift  his  pack  of  brick  from  the  wheelbarrow 


Fig.  63.— Center  Board  for  Stock  Platform,  Packet  Type. 

to  the  stock  platform  easily,  if  he  does  not  have  to  reach  in  too 
far  over  the  edge  of  the  stock  platform.  Therefore,  the  stock 
platform  must  have  two  tracks  for  each  brick  space.  They 
must  be  located  in  every  case  exactly  as  shown  in  Fig.  63. 
These  permit  dragging  and  pushing  the  brick  packets  in 
toward  the  bricklayer. 
256 

Provide  three  planks  for  the  wheelers'  platform,  but 
do  not  put  them  in  place  until  the  frame  has  been  jacked  up 
one  or  two  notches,  or  until  the  planks  on  the  wheelers'  plat- 
form will  clear  the  braces  on  the  foot  of  the  horse.  If  the 
planks  are  of  a  kind  of  wood  that  bends  too  much,  one  or 
two  cleats  on  the  under  side  of  the  platform  will  remedy  this. 
257 

At  the  first  position  of  the  scaffold,  the  top  of  the  stock 
platform  is  2  ft.  n  ins.  above  the  floor  on  which  the  scaffold, 
and  also  the  bricklayer,  stands. 


78  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

258 

Do  not  lay  any  plank  on  the  bricklayer's  platform  until 
the  wall  has  been  built  at  least  2  ft.  high  above  the  floor. 
259 

As  soon  as  the  wall  has  been  built  2  ft.  high  above  the 
floor  two  plank  must  be  laid  on  the  bricklayer's  platform.    The 
bricklayer  is  then  in  a  still  better  position,  and  at  a  more 
convenient  height  to  work  at  his  greatest  speed. 
260 

Besides     all     these     advantageous     considerations,     the 
gang    has    not    been    interrupted    nor    interfered    with,    and 


Fig.   64.— The  Gilbreth  Scaffold,  Packet  Type,  for  Wheelbarrows. 

no  time  has  been  lost  shifting  men  from  the  wall  and 
back  again  while  a  scaffold  has  been  set  up.  This  last  con- 
sideration means  a  large  saving  of  time  on  a  large  gang,  and 
overcomes  the  possible  disadvantage  of  not  having  the  same 
man  continue  building  the  same  corner,  or  angle,  or  plumb 
spot,  from  bottom  to  top  of  the  wall,  with  the  consequent 
divided  responsibility  for  inaccurate  work. 
261 

The  stock  platform  must  be  kept  at  a  height  of  not  more 
than  8  ins.  (the  spacing  between  holes  in  the  horses),  below, 
and  never  above  the  top  course  on  the  inside  face  tier  of  the 
wall.  See  Fig.  64. 


GILBRETH   SCAFFOLD,  PACKET   TYPE. 


79 


262 


This  is  a  matter  often  overlooked  by  the  busy  foreman. 
Xext  to  seeing  that  the  line  is  hauled  the  instant  that  the  last 
brick  is  laid  out,  the  jacking  of  the  scaffold  and  the  maintaining 
of  it  at  the  right  height  are  the  most  important  features  to  watch 
for  the  greatest  economy. 


SECTION  A- A 
Fig.  65.— Dimensions  of  Gilbreth  Packet  Type  Scaffold. 


8o 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


SECTION  THRO  A-A 


Fig.   66. — Location  of  Packs   for  Shortening  Distance  of  Transporting  Brick 

to  Wall. 


GILBRETH   SCAFFOLD,   PACKET   TYPE.  gi 

263 

The  average  foreman  underrates  the  necessity  of  having 
the  scaffold  at  exactly  the  right  height,  because  he  sees  that 
the  bricklayer  can  stoop  and  bend  and  yet  lay  brick  almost  as 
fast  as  when  he  does  not  bend  or  stoop  at  all.  Not  being 
over-worried  about  the  bricklayer's  comfort,  so  long  as  he  is 
laying  brick  fast,  he  forgets  that  men  working  at  manual 
work,  like  bricklaying,  cannot  keep  up  the  work  every  instant, 
and  that,  therefore,  the  percentage  of  rest  absolutely  required 
by  such  men  must  be  greater  than  that  of  the  men  who  are 
put  to  no  exertion  not  absolutely  necessary  to  laying  a  brick. 
264 

It  is  not  enough  for  the  foreman  to  put  a  laborer  jacking 
up  the  scaffold  who  knows  how  to  jack  it  up.  He  must  in- 
struct the  laborer  until  he  understands  that  the  scaffold  is  to 
follow  and  to  be  kept  at  the  height  of  the  inside  face  tier,  not 
the  outside  face  tier ;  that  the  stock  platform  is  never  to  be 
above  the  inside  face  tier,  and  that  when  the  top  of  the  filling 
tiers  is  below  that  of  the  inside  face  tier,  the  stock  platform 
must  be  kept  at  a  level  half  way  between  the  grade  of  the  top 
of  the  filling  tiers  and  the  inside  face  tier. 
265 

When  the  filling  tiers  are  as  high  as  the  inside  face  tier, 
the  stock  platform  is  to  be  kept  level  with  the  top  of  the  inside 
face  tier. 
266 

The  height  of  the  outside  face  tier  has  nothing  to  do  with 
the  height  of  the  stock  platform  on  this  scaffold. 
267 

When   laying  the   outside   face  tier,   the   stock   platform 
must  be  as  nearly  level  with  the  top  of  the  inside  face  tier  as 
possible. 
268 

The  bricklayer  can  then  transfer  the  packs  of  brick  from 
the  stock  platform  to  the  wall  without  lifting  the  pack  more 
than  an  inch  or  so,  and  if  the  stock  platform  is  maintained  at 
the  relative  heights  here  described,  the  bricklayer  can  do  this 
transferring  without  stooping  and  with  no  bending  of  the 
back.  Therefore,  in  reality,  to  transfer  the  pack  of  brick  in  a 
level  plane  from  the  stock  platform  to  the  wall  requires  no 
more  work  to  be  done  than  the  stooping  of  the  body  and  the 
straightening  it  up  again.  See  Figs.  65,  66,  67,  68. 


82 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


TSttfr 

displacement 
/in*  *"ftr  Iht* 

terr  ,ackirra  up 
face  <rf  ttttt  af 

<faffoU.  Me 

S^: 

'££ 

0//0, 

/aK> 

mutft. 





Jf-  tend* 
e/ta/s  up 
nandlt  th 

s  run  /5  too  -3/ 

A  a  less  than 
S"  tvrc/e  orj  & 

11 
fl 

ae  O'/re/ 
cfers  pb//orm.  ~* 

\ 

ick/tfrorerH 

n 

ade  of  hard 
to. 

— 

1        ! 

| 

\ 

^= 

_ 

— 

BE 

— 



^y-y 

This  space  for  hrtc 

\must  be  the  *am* 
\br/ek  space  off  he 

J  Zarrte  section. 



-i  —  \- 

— 

— 

B,7 

rhti 

Use  no  p/a 

\ 

\ 

— 





— 

=F=F 

Me  fnorfarbo,  afftie 
Te-ft  -jj<?  Kt-  i>p?,?Kf 
af  ftie  rif/i/-. 

> 

=i=t= 

/   \ 

/ 

_§ifi  — 

Hi 

|f 

1 

— 

; 

— 

1      i 

1      ! 

i*  " 

-5  : 

-5- 

— 

f!' 

mm 

B, 

wm-H, 



The  correct /eye /of 

top  of  %  is  a  point 

equidistant  6t-  U 

tweenf/ie  fop  oft/re 

filling  fiers^ana 

the  fop  of  tot 

inside  face 

trtr(U)e*atV. 

This  /s  the  point 

of  shortestarerooe 

motion  to  lay       R 

each  brick. 


SECTION      THRU 


Fig.  67. — General  Arrangement  of  Packet  Type. 


GILBRETH   SCAFFOLD,   PACKET   TYPE. 


269 


A  great  advantage  of  this  type  of  scaffold  is  the  fact  that 
it  enables  the  bricklayer  to  back  up  his  wall  solid  every 
''header  high,"  starting  from  the  floor  level  itself. 


SECTION  THRU  A- A 

Fig.   68.— Location   of  Packs  When  Building  Exterior  Face   Tier. 


84  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

270 

It  is  obvious  that  a  bricklayer  can  lay  more  brick,  lay 
them  more  evenly,  bed  them  better,  and  shove  the  joints  easier 
when  he  is  backing  up  solid,  i.  e.,  the  full  width  of  the  wall, 
than  when  he  is  backing  up  one  or  two  tiers  thick,  to  get  on 
a  header,  so  that  the  exterior  face  tier  can  be  built  up  staging 
high. 
271 

This  is  the  only  form  of  scaffold  that  permits  backing  up 
the  wall  solid  from  the  floor  line  up  to  the  ceiling. 


CHAPTER  VIII.    . 

THE    GILBRETH    PACKET    SYSTEM. 
272 

The  Gilbreth  packet  system  consists  of  conveying  bricks 
upon  packets  from  the  pile  in  the  street  to  the  top  of  the  wall. 
273 

If  the  bricks  are  brought  "packed,"  i.  e.,  side  by  side,  on 
edge,  to  the  job,  then  they  are  to  be  unloaded  and  placed  upon 
packets  regardless  of  whether  or  not  they  are  to  be  used  at 
once,  except  in  the  case  of  brick  that  are  to  be  culled  before 
they  are  used. 
274 

If  the  brick  are  brought  "loose,"  that  is  thrown  in,  they 
are  to  be  dumped  out,  if  the  car  or  cart  is  provided  with 
dumping  means.  P>ut  if  they  are  not  dumped  out,  they  must 
be  put  upon  packets,  carried  out  or  wheeled  out,  whichever 
is  the  cheaper,  and  stacked  up  on  the  packets  until  ready  to 
be  used. 
275 

The  packets  shall  be  made  of  two  pieces  laid  length- 
wise, and  so  spaced  that  the  outside  edges  of  the  packet  are 
spaced  exactly  the  length  of  the  average  brick  to  be  carried. 
The  space  between  the  two  pieces  shall  be  wide  enough  to 
permit  room  for  the  men's  fingers  to  clear  without  jamming. 
See  Figs.  68  and  69. 
276 

The  lengthwise  pieces  shall  be  held  in  place  by  one  cross- 
wise piece  at  each  end,  that  shall  be  so  spaced  that  the  dis- 
tance in  the  clear  between  them  shall  be  1^/2  ins.  greater 
than  the  length  of  the  lower  layer  of  brick  on  the  packet. 
Round  off  all  corners  of  the  end  pieces  where  the  hands  rub. 
277 

The  method  of  handling  the  packs  from  the  stock  pile 
to  the  hoisting  apparatus,  and  from  the  hoisting  apparatus  to 
the  mason,  depends  upon  circumstances.  Sometimes  it  is 
cheaper  to  have  laborers  carry  them  in  their  hands  (see  Figs. 
70  and  71),  sometimes  skeleton  wheelbarrows  holding  three  or 

85 


86 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.    69. — Arrangement   of  Mortar  Box  and   Packs  to   Obviate   Stooping. 

four  boards  are  the  cheapest  (Fig.  72),  and  on  long  runs  it  is 
sometimes  most  economical  to  pile  the  packs  of  brick  into  the 
carts.     (See  Figs.  73  and  74.) 
278 

In  buildings  divided  by  brick  walls  into  small  areas,  it  is 
often  difficult  to  build  long  sloping  runs  up  for  wheelbarrows. 
When  a  run  cannot  be  arranged  down  from  the  floor  above, 


.  70.— Unloading  a  Freight  Car  with  a  Gravity  Conveyor. 


THE  G1LBRETH  PACKET  SYSTEM. 


Fig.  ril. — Handling  Packs  on  a  Gravity  Conveyor. 

packs   can    be   passed   from   tender   to   tender,   from    floor   to 
stock  platform,  by  having  a  few  stagings  3  ft.  high  one  above 
another. 
279 

When  the  packs  reach  the  bricklayers'  platform,  they  are 
shoved     over     on     the     tracks      by      the      tenders      toward 


Fig.  72.— Wheeling  Packs. 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.   73.— Loading  Carts  from  Gravity  Conveyor. 

the  bricklayer.  It  is  a  very  simple  matter  to  pick  up  90  Ibs. 
when  the  lift  is  straight  up,  but  it  is  a  very  difficult  matter  to 
pick  up  90  Ibs.  when  the  lift  is  not  straight  up.  Therefore  the 
bricklayer  must  have  his  brick  put  as  close  to  the  inside  edge 
of  the  stock  platform  as  possible,  so  that  he  can  lift  his  load 
in  the  easiest  manner. 


Fig.   74.— Preventing  Packs  from  Spilling  in  a  Wagon. 


THE    GILBRETH    PACKET    SYSTEM.  89 

280 

The  number  of  brick  that  shall  be  piled  upon  a  packet 
varies  in  different  localities  on  account  of  two  factors  (a)  the 
size  and  weight  of  the  particular  brick  used,  and  (b)  the  qual- 
ity of  the  laborers  obtainable. 
281 

The  weight  of  the  brick  that  should  be  put  on  a  packet 
should,  with  the  weight  of  the  packet,  be  as  nearly  90  Ibs.  as 
is  possible,  with  an  even  number  of  brick.  This  is  the  weight 
which  a  first-class,  high-priced  laborer  can  handle  to  the  best 
advantage.  With  inferior,  low-priced  laborers,  the  number  of 
brick  must  be  reduced  so  that  the  weight  will  be  lessened  in 
proportion  to  their  strength. 
282 

The  strength  of  the  laborers  and  not  the  strength  of  the 
bricklayers  is  to  be  the   controlling  factor  to   determine  the 
weight  of  the  load  on  each  packet. 
283 

Many  small  men  who  have  been  rated  as  first-class  brick- 
layers can  work  rapidly  with  a  light  load  of,  say  a  brick  in 
each  hand.  They  could  not  possibly  stand  the  strain  of 
transferring  the  packs  of  brick  from  the  scaffold  in  a  hori- 
zontal plane  to  the  wall. 
284 

Other  bricklayers,  who  are  able  to  handle  90  Ibs.  with 
ease,  would   much   prefer  to  lift  a  pack  containing  20  brick 
from  the  scaffold  in  a  horizontal  plane  to  the  wall  than  to 
make  ten  trips  with  a  brick  in  each  hand  each  trip. 
285 

Any  bricklayer  who  is  not  able  to  transfer  the  packet 
with  its  regular  full  load  from  the  stock  platform  to  the  wall 
will  be  obliged  to  take  off  a  few  brick  from  each  pack  in  the 
old  method  until  the  remaining  load  on  the  packet  has  been 
reduced  to  a  point  where  he  can  handle  the  v\  eight  comfort- 
ably and  thrive  under  the  continuous  exercise  of  it.  Of  course 
he  cannot  earn  as  high  wages  as  the  man  who  can  handle  the 
larger  load. 
286 

The  bricklayer  must  place  the  pack  on  the  wall  in  the 
location  that  will  give  the  shortest  possible  distance  through 
which  to  carry  each  brick  from  the  packet  to  its  final  resting 
place  on  the  mortar. 


0,0  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

287 

The  bricklayers  do  not  realize  the  importance  of  this, 
and  must  be  constantly  instructed  to  place  the  pack  as  near 
:he  place  where  the  brick  are  to  be  laid  as  possible,  even  with 
che  packet  method.  Careful  packing  of  the  pack  so  as  to  save 
all  the  motion  possible  will  diminish  the  distance  that  a  brick- 
layer's hand  travels  from  a  quarter  to  a  half  mile  of  distance 
per  day. 
288 

When  laying  the  outside  face  tier,  the  bricklayer  will  con- 
vey the  packet  to  the  top  of  the  wall.     If  it  is  a  thin  wall,  he 
will   lay  the  outside  face  tier  while   standing  on   the   brick- 
layer's platform. 
289 

If  it  is  a  thick  wall,  he  will  lay  the  outside  face  tier  while 
standing  on  the  top  of  the  filling  tiers. 
290 

After  the  outside  face  tier  has  been  built  up  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  next  header,  the  inside  face  tier  will  be  built  up 
several  courses  above  the  filling  tier.     Then  the  filling  tiers 
will  be  laid. 
291 

The  advantages  of  the  packet  method  are  to  be  seen  all 
through  the  process  of  bricklaying.  The  brick  themselves  will 
be  kept  in  better  condition.  Unloading  brick  from  a  hod  or 
wheelbarrow  is  sure  to  make  more  or  less  bats,  and  many 
chipped  brick.  With  the  packet  method  it  is  possible  to  have 
the  brick  arrive  at  the  scaffold  without  a  chip  out  of  them. 
This  means  the  saving  of  the  time  needed  to  discard  bats  and 
to  select  unchipped  brick  fit  to  lay  to  the  line.  It  also,  of 
course,  means  a  better  looking  wall. 
292 

Another  saving  of  time  occurs  in  that  the  bricklayer  does 
not  have  to  separate  his  stock  into  that  suitable  for  face  work, 
and  that  fit  only  for  filling.  With  the  packet  method  it  is  a 
simple  matter  to  put  the  face  brick  on  some  packets,  and  the 
filling  brick  on  others,  and  to  keep  them  separate  until  the 
bricklayer  needs  them. 
293 

The  packet  method  also  gives  the  bricklayer  something 
to  do  when  he  would  otherwise  be  idle,  i.  e.,  when  he  is  wait- 
ing for  the  line  to  be  raised,  waiting  for  mortar,  etc. 


THE    GILBRETH    PACKET    SYSTEM.  91 

294 

All  practical  bricklayers  know  that  the  best  results  can- 
not be  obtained  if  the  men  lay  brick  above  the  line.  Nearly  all 
well-governed  unions  make  it  a  rule  to  lay  no  brick  above  the 
line,  and  never  to  slack  out  a  line  until  it  is  all  laid  out. 
While  these  are  splendid  rules,  and  make  for  justice  to  the 
men  and  better  walls  for  the  owner  of  the  building,  the  man 
who  pays  those  bricklayers  begrudges  the  time  that  these 
rules  sometimes  cause  to  be  wasted. 
295 

With  the  packet  method,  the  bricklayers  can  take  packs 
of  brick  off  the  stock  platform  and  place  them  on  the  wall  in 
the  position  that  will  be  the  nearest  possible  to  the  place 
where  they  are  to  be  laid.  This  not  only  affords  the  brick- 
layer a  better  chance  to  earn  his  bonus,  but  it  also  leaves  just 
so  much  more  room  on  the  stock  platform  and  just  so  much 
less  chance  of  the  bricklayer  running  out  of  stock  in  case,  for 
any  reason,  the  tenders  are  delayed;  both  great  aids  toward 
speed  and  economy. 
296 

Some  idea  of  the  economy  of  work  done  by  a  bricklayer 
with  packets  on  this  scaffold  is  apparent  when  one  considers 
that  a  bricklayer,  lifting  90  Ibs.  without  stooping,  lifts  about  90 
Ibs.  for  20  brick,  while  on  the  old-fashioned  scaffolds  and  meth- 
ods he  bends  over  and  lifts  all  of  his  body  above  the  waist  and 
9  Ibs.  every  time  he  lifts  2  brick;  this  is,  about  109  Ibs.  for  2 
brick  on  the  old-fashioned  method. 


297 


CHAPTER  IX. 
TALL   CHIMNEYS. 


The  problem  of  getting  stock  of  the  kind  that  the  brick- 
layers need  to  the  top  of  the  chimney,  as  fast  as  they  can  use 
it  has  been  successfully  worked  out.  In  the  future,  any  chim- 
ney large  enough  to  have  an  elevator  must  also  have  a  track 
running  in  through  the  temporary  stock  opening  and  a  track 
on  the  platform  of  the  elevator  for  cars  of  stock.  See  Fig.  75. 
298 

The  track  must  be  slightly  down  grade  to  the  elevator 
(about  i  in.  in  5  ft.)  so  that  loaded  cars  will  run  down  hill  and 
the  empty  cars  up  hill. 
299 

This  track  must  be  long  enough  to  serve  many  loads  of 
brick  hauled  and  dumped  from  carts  alongside  the  track,  and 
also  to  serve  the  mortar  beds. 
300 

The  track  should  have  branches  but  no  turn-outs,  as  no 
loaded  cars  need  pass  each  other. 
301 

The  empty  car  is  so  light  that  it  can  be  picked  up  and  car- 
ried past  the  full  car  which  has  been  pushed  in  close  to  the 
elevator  and  is  waiting  for  it  to  come  down. 


Fig.   75.— Track  Through  Stock  Opening  Into  Elevator. 
92 


TALL    CHIMNEYS.  93 

302 

When  the  elevator  comes  down  the  next  loaded  car 
should  be  inside  the  chimney  ready  to  push  onto  the  platform. 
A  small  school  slate  attached  to  the  top  of  the  elevator  car  will 
tell  whether  outside  brick  or  mortar  or  inside  brick  or  mortar 
is  wanted  on  the  three  or  four  following  cars. 
303 

The  empty  car  should  be  taken  off  and  carried  out,  and 
the  full  car  pushed  on. 
304 

The  cars  are  loaded  with  packets  carrying  two  layers  of 
bricks  on  edge,  generally  about  20  bricks  on  a  packet. 
305 

The  mortar  should  be  handled  in  metal  pails  or  in  fountain 
trowels.      These    are    stacked    up   four    pails    high,    each    pail 
having  a  piece  of  board  over  it  and  one  under  it  to  steady  the 
pile  of  pails. 
306 

Nail    some    old    rubber    hose    with    upward    loops    about 
4  ins.  high  underneath  the  bottom  of  the  car  for  the  car  to 
strike.     It  will  prolong  the  life  of  the  car,  and  so  may  pre- 
vent delays. 
307 

It  is  never  good  practice  to  have  the  elevator  rope  pass 
through  the  opening  where  the  bricks  and  mortar  are  carried 
in,  as  the  rope  is  in  the  way  of  the  men. 
308 

The  scaffold  at  the  top  of  the  chimney  must  be  built  spe- 
cially from  individual  designs,  after  the  design  of  the  Gilbreth 
patent   scaffold,   made   by   our  office   to   suit   the   size   of  the 
chimney. 
309 

The  stock  platform  must  be  located  exactly  2  ft.  above  the 
place  where  the  mason  stands.     It  must  have  a  back  board  at 
least  5  ins.  high  and  J^-in.  thick. 
310 

The  masons'  platform  must  fit  the  inside  of  the  flue  with 
not  over   I   in.  play.     The  masons'  platform  must   extend  in 
under  the  stock  platform  at  least  8  ins.,  and  more  if  possible. 
311 

The  edge  of  the  masons'  platform  must  be  boarded  up 
tight  to  the  stock  platform,  so  that  nothing  can  drop  on  the 
men  loading  the  elevator  below. 


94  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

312 

The  entire  scaffold  must  be  nailed  or  bolted  fast  together, 
but  loose  on  the  uprights. 
313 

The  uprights  must  be  not  less  than  4x6  ins.,  nor  more 
than  6x6  ins.,  with  the  6-in.  face  for  the  guide  surface. 
314 

These  two  uprights  must  be  bored  with  i-in.  holes,  exactly 
8  ins.  apart  on  centers,  for  holding  the  lifting  jacks.     These 
uprights  must  be  bored  before  being  erected  and  must  extend 
4  ins.  beyond  the  center  of  the  last  hole. 
315 

The  well  opening  must  be  covered  with  the  Bowler  auto- 
matic platform  lid,  made  to  prevent  bricks  from  falling  down 
the  flue  and  strong  enough  to  sustain  two  tenders. 
316 

The  stock  platform  must  be  maintained  abdut  level  with 
the  inside  4  ins.  of  the  brickwork,  so  that  there  will  be  no 
stooping  nor  long  reaching. 
317 

This  outfit  will  cost  about  $10  more  to  build  than  the 
old  method.  With  it  bricklayers  should  average  twice  to  three 
times  the  usual  number  of  brick  per  day,  laying  shove  joints. 
We  have  had  them  lay  over  4,200  brick  with  shove  joints  on 
first-class  jointed  work  in  8  hours. 
318 

Chimneys   having  no   ornamental  work   on   the   exterior 
need  no  outside  scaffold.     ' 
319 

The  best  results  in  round  chimneys  are  obtained  by 
having  no  brick  headers  below  the  head  of  the  chimney.  Get 
permission  from  the  engineer  or  architect  to  use  galvanized 
wire  ties  instead  of  brick  headers  for  bonding  the  outside 
tier  of  round  chimneys. 
320 

Examine  the  mortar  of  the  inside  face  of  the  chimney 
from   the  top  to  bottom   every  two   days,  to   see   that  it   is 
setting  fast  enough  to  carry  the  work  being  built  above  it. 
321 

Build  an  outside  protection  over  the  men  at  the  bottom 
of  the  chimney.  Make  this  strong  enough  to  stop  a  brick 
falling  from  the  top  of  the  chimney.  Test  it. 


TALL    CHIMNEYS. 


95 


Fig.  76.— A  Round  Chimney  255  Feet  High  (34  Ft.  Higher  Than  Bunker  Hill 

Monument). 


96 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


TALL     CHIMNEYS. 


97 


322 


Figs.  76  to  83  show  our  typical  methods  of  building  a  tall 
chimney.  It  was  built  in  record  time.  The  top  100  ft.  were 
built  in  14  days.  All  of  our  foremen  must  use  the  methods 
here  shown  on  future  chimneys. 


Fig.  78.— Beginning  the  Erection  of  the  Exterior  Scaffold. 


323 


Set  a  wooden  plug,  with  a  small  headed  wire  nail  driven 
home  into  the  top  of  it,  in  the  center  of  the  top  surface  of 
the  foundation. 


98  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

324 

Build  a  substantial  templet  of  the  exact  size  of  the  bot- 
tom of  the  chimney.  This  templet  will  more  than  pay  for 

its  cost  by  saving  time  in  checking  up  offsets.     (Fig.  77.) 
325 

Superintendents  must  pick  out  only  those  bricklayers  for 
tall  chimney  work  whom  they  know  personally  to  be  thor- 
oughly reliable,  good  mechanics — men  accustomed  to  laying 
bricks  with  shove  joints  and  who  can  be  absolutely  depended 
upon  to  do  so.  No  other  kind  of  work  except  shove  joints  is 


Fig.    79.— Back   Filling   Completed,    and   Everything  Ready   for  Quick 
Construction. 


TALL     CHIMNEYS. 


99 


allowed,    and   all   joints    must   be    absolutely   full    of   mortar. 

Make  the  best  man  the  working  foreman. 

326 

The  core  and  the  shell  of  a  chimney  must  never  be  con- 
nected in  any  way,  except  at  the  base  of  the  chimney.     Here 
the  bases  of  both  must  be  entirely  of  headers  to  the  top  of  the 
offsets  of  the  footings.     See  Fig.  78. 
327 

Tend   the  masons  with  hods  or  packets  and  pails,  Figs. 
78  and  79,  until  the  chimney  is  two  stagings,  or  about  10  ft. 
high.     Then  the  inside  elevator  should  be  installed. 
328 

The  fastest  method  where  conditions  will  permit  is,  of 
course,  to  have  the  tenders   place  the  packs  containing  the 


Fig.  80.— A  Boston  Scaffold  for  the  Erection  of  the  Exterior  Face  Tier. 
(Note  the  hole  left  in  the  front   side  of  the  chimney  for  the  track  to  the 
elevator.) 


100 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


TALL    CHIMNEYS.  IOI 

brick  near  the  inside  edge  of  the  stock  platform  and  parallel 
with  the  edge  so  that  the  masons  can  handle  the  packs 
to  the  top  of  the  wall,  where  they  can  pick  them  up 
and  lay  them  with  the  least  possible  amount  of  reaching.  This 
will  permit  much  faster  work  and  will  enable  the  bricklayer  to 
earn  higher  wages.  For  full  description  of  the  packet  method 
see  Pages  85-91. 
329 

If  there  is  any  fancy  brickwork  on  the  exterior,  or  if 
a  different  kind  of  brick  or  mortar  is  used  on  the  exterior 
than  the  interior,  it  is  generally  advisable  to  t  uild  an  outside 
scaffold  at  least  25  ft.  high.  (See  Fig.  80.)  If  there  are  any  such 
fancy  offsets  from  octagonal  to  round,  as  there  are  on  this 
chimney,  the  scaffold  must  be  built  up  higher.  On  the  largest 
of  chimneys  there  is  not  any  too  much  room  inside  for  men 
and  stock.  If  this  space  were  to  be  filled  with  two  kinds  of 
brick  and  two  kinds  of  mortar  it  would  be  still  more  crowded. 
330 

The  chimney,  Fig.  81,  being  now  plain,  straightaway  work 
above  the  set-off  from  octagonal  to  round,  the  outside  scaffold 
is  no  longer  used. 
331 

A  large  mercury  plumb  bob  must  be  used  each  day 
after  quitting  time  to  test  the  accuracy  of  the  brick- 
layers' work.  The  bob  must  be  supported  by  the  smallest  of 
piano  wire.  It  must  be  small,  so  that  it  will  afford  the  least 
surface  to  the  upward  draught  of  air  that  tends  to  sway  it.  It 
must  be  made  of  wire  so  that  the  plumb  bob  will  not  dance 
or  untwist,  as  it  would  with  a  string. 
332 

At  this  point,  Fig.  82,  the  chimney's  daily  growth  aver- 
aged about  6  ft.  in  height.  The  number  of  masons  that  can  be 
used  to  best  advantage  on  a  chimney  depends  on  the  number 
of  pilaster  guides  to  the  core,  as  well  as  on  the  amount  of 
room  inside. 
333 

The  plan  of  the  chimney  should  determine  the 
number  of  men  to  be  placed  in  the  chimney.  When  determin- 
ing this  number,  remember  that  'not  less  than  one  or  more 
than  two  tenders  will  be  required  to  lift  the  stock  off  the 
elevator. 


IO2 


BRICKLA  YING    S  YS  TEM. 


334 

Give  the  working  foreman  the  custody  of  the  batter  sticks. 
These  should  have  marked  on  them  at  what  heights  each  is  to 
be  used.  These  sticks  should  be  3  ft.  6  ins.  long  and  I  in. 
wide.  They  should  vary  in  thickness  from  */g  in.  at  one  end 
to  %  in.  +  the  batter  in  3  ft.  6  ins.  This  batter  stick  is  to  be 
attached  to  the  mason's  plumb  rule  with  three  small  screws. 
335 

Note  that  the  smoke  flue  is  on  the  opposite  side  from  the 


TALL    CHIMNEYS. 


103 


temporary  hole  left  for  carrying  in  stock.    Note  that  the  clean- 
out  door  opening  is  under  the  smoke  flue.     Locate  the  tem- 
porary opening  exactly  as  shown  here. 
336 

Note  the   "peach  basket,"   Fig.   83,   resting  on   the  brick 

collar  under  the  head  of  the  chimney.  The  peach  basket  will 
save  more  than  enough  of  the  bricklayer's  time  to  pay  for  its 
cost,  and  the  chimney  head  will  be  absolutely  true  in  shape  as 
a  result  of  its  use.  See  also  Fig.  17. 


Fig.   83. — "Feach   Basket"    Used  as  a   Template   for   Constructing  the  Head. 

337 

Get  permission  to  build  a  collar  under  the  head  of  the 
chimney,  to  support  the  "peach  basket." 
338 

Do  not  permit  the  makers  of  the  iron  cap  to  ship  it  until 
some  representative  of  our  firm  has  seen  the  complete  cap  set 
up  and  all  bolted  together. 
339 

Each  piece  or  section  of  the  iron  cap  must  be  self  support- 
ing on  the  wall.     If  it  is  not  shown  thus  on  the  plans,  notify 
the  office  immediately. 
340 

Have  the  cap  drilled  and  tapped  with  standard  thread 
before  leaving  the  shop,  to  support  the  attaching  device  for 
the  liorhtniner  rod. 


CHAPTER  X. 
MORTAR. 


341 


A  very  economical  method  for  digging  sand  and  loading 
carts  is  shown  in  Fig.  84. 
342 

The  carts  are  driven  into  a  trench-like  depression,  over 


Fig.  84. — An  Economical  Method  of  Loading  Sand  Into  Carts. 

which  is  a  bridge.    Across  this  bridge  two-horse  drag  scrapers 

are  drawn. 

343 

These  empty  the  sand  through  a  hole  in  the  bridge  into 
the  carts  underneath. 

104 


MORTAR.  105 

344 

When  screening"  sand,  use  a  netting  of  long  vertical  spac- 
ing  and   narrow   horizontal   spacing,    as   it   will   screen   many 
times   faster  than     old-fashioned     screens     of    approximately 
square  openings. 
345 

The  vertical  wires  should  be  of  tempered  steel,  so  that 
they  will  not  get  out  of  line. 
346* 

Keep  the  sand  screens  in  perfect  repair,  or  large  pebbles 
will  get  into  the  mortar  and  delay  the  bricklayers.  It  is  much 
cheaper  to  buy  new  sand  screens  than  to  use  damaged  sand 
screens  that  will  cause  bricklayers  to  remove  pebbles  from  the 

mortar  on  the  wall  one  at  a  time  with  a  trowel. 
347 

The  right  amount  of  sand  to  put  into  mortar  is  a  que>- 
tion  that  has  interested  the  leading  authorities  on  this  subject 
throughout  the  world  for  years.  If  more  than  the  right  amount 
necessary  to  enable  the  bricklayer  to  work  at  his  fastest  speed 
is  used,  the  bricklayer  will  drop  more  mortar  on  the  ground 
and  waste  more  time  in  attempting  to  bed  the  brick  and  to 
butter  the  end  joints  with  a  mortar  that  is  too  sandy  to  work 
well,  than  the  value  of  the  lime  or  cement  saved.  The  work- 
manship wrill  obviously  be  inferior  to  that  obtained  with  mor- 
tar that  will  work  easily. 
348 

Again,  if  the  mortar  has  too  little  sand,  it  becomes  sticky, 
retards  the  mason's  speed,  and  has  more  cement  or  lime  than 
is  necessary  to  properly  coat  all  of  the  surfaces  of  the  particles 

of  sand  and  to  fill  the  voids  between  them. 
349 

It  is  injurious  to  the  quality  of  the  mortar  to  use  more 
lime  or  cement  than  just  enough  to  fill  the  voids  and  to  coat 
thoroughly  each  and  every  grain  of  sand.  The  more  material 
is  used  that  is  not  in  its  final  condition  at  the  time  it  is  used, 
the  more  swelling  or  shrinking,  or  deterioration  and  efflores- 
cence wrill  result. 
350 

These  facts  must  be  taken  into  consideration  at  the  time 
the  voids  in  the  sand  are  measured  and  mortar  prisms  are 
tested  to  determine  the  best  and  most  economical  propor- 
tioning. 


106  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

351 

Lime  mortar  must  be  kept  wet  while  slaking.     In  addi- 
tion to  water  hose,  supply  a  water  barrel,  so  that  water  can  be 
dashed  by  the  pailful  upon  any  lime  that  is  crumbling  or  burn- 
ing.    Lime  loses  strength  if  allowed  to  burn. 
352 

The  making  of  lime  mortar  must  commence  early  enough 
to  have  it  at  least  two  weeks  old  before  using.  This  rule  must 
be  followed  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  making  up  of 
considerable  quantities  of  mortar  ahead  of  time  is  expensive, 
because  'of  the  extra  handling,  and  the  greater  labor  of  tem- 
pering up.  The  older  the  lime  mortar  the  better  the  work. 
353 

Lime  mortar  must  be  tempered  until  all  the  white  spots 
in  it  disappear.    Otherwise  these  spots  would  swell  and  break 
the  initial  set  of  the  mortar  after  the  bricks  are  laid. 
354 

Cement  must  not  be  added  to  slaking  lime  mortar.     Ce- 
ment must  be  thoroughly  mixed  dry  with  sand  before  it  is 
added  to  lime  mortar,  and  just  before  it  is  to  be  used. 
355 

Cement  mortar  must  be  used  as  soon  as  mixed,  unless 
fat  mortar  is  more  desired  than  strength. 
356 

The  theory  most  widely  accepted  among  cement  experts 
is  that  cement,  in  setting,  forms  microscopic  interlocking 
crystals.  These  crystals,  if  broken  while  forming,  will  never 
properly  reunite.  Therefore,  cement,  whether  in  mortar  or 
concrete,  should  never  be  disturbed  after  it  has  once  begun 
to  set. 
357 

Give  mortar  men,  or  other  men  most  faithful  to  our  in- 
terests, first  chance  on  all  overtime  work,  tempering  mortar, 
etc. 
358 

A  mortar  bed  should  always  be  so  located  that  the  sand 
can  be  hauled  up  to  and  dumped  near  the  long  side  of  the  bed. 
The  mortar  must  be  shoveled  out  of  the  mortar  bed  on  the 
side  next  to  the  building,  if  the  mortar  bed  is  located  outside 
of  the  building.  If  the  mortar  bed  is  inside  the  building,  the 
mortar  should  be  shoveled  toward  the  elevator. 


MORTAR. 


107 


Fig.    85. — Correct   Layout   for   Two   Gangs   of  Mortar  Makers. 


359 


On  jobs  of  considerable  size  it  is  always  advisable  to  build 
a  light  roof  over  the  mortar  beds,  Fig.  85.    The  mortar  makers 
will  be  able  to  do  more  work  if  they  are  protected  from  the 
rain  and  sun. 
360 

Wherever  possible,  several  mortar  beds  should  be  ar- 
ranged near  one  another,  or  at  least  under  the  same  conditions, 
so  that  the  same  number  of  men  can  be  put  on  each  bed.  The 


\ 

\ 

/ 

A 

\ 

Smoothest  -Side 
of  Plank  Inside 
\ 

t 

Plan. 
1 

/ 

1 
B 

Y 

-/  HOOD  Iron 
on  4  Comers 
u^e  I  "Nails 

\ 


E.!evcx-Hon. 
Fig.  86.— Standard  Mortar  Box. 


io8 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


foreman  can  then  have  a  continuous  athletic  contest  on  mortar 

making. 

361 

The  mortar  box  should  be  well  made  in  accordance  with  Fig. 
86.     When  two  kinds  of  mortar  are  used  on  the  same  scaffold, 
a  temporary  partition  in  the  mortar  box  will  give  the  most 
economical  results,  Fig.  87. 
362 

Further  rules  for  the  handling  and  placing  of  the  mortar  box 
will  be  found  under  Scaffolds  and  the  Gilbreth  Scaffold. 


Fig.  87.— Gilbreth  Scaffold  on  Overhand  Work  with  Two  Kinds  of  Mortar  and 
Two   Kinds   of  Brick. 

363 

As  bricklayers'  wages  are  so  high  compared  with  the  cost 
of  mortar,  it  is  always  economical  to  use  outside  mortar  for 
filling  in  the  wall,  rather  than  to  have  the  bricklayer  stand  idle 
while  waiting  for  common  mortar. 
364 

When  using  cement  mortar  made  of  cement  and  sand  and 
no  lime,  the  bricklayers  will  do  more  and  better  work  if  a 
tender  is  kept  on  the  stock  platform  tempering  the  mortar  to 
just  the  right  consistency  for  the  bricklayers.  He  will  also  be 


MORTAR. 


109 


very  useful  keeping"  boxes  filled  with  mortar  and  dividing  up 
mortar  between  boxes  at  quitting  time,  so  that  all  mortar  will 
be  used  up.     See  Fig.  88. 
365 

Provide  him  with  a  short-handled  hoe,  shovel  and  pail. 
Have  him  throw  away  any  mortar  set  too  hard  to  temper  with 
a  shovel  or  hoe. 
366 

A  small  proportion  of  lime  putty,  say  not  less  than  a  pail- 
ful to  one  barrel  of  cement,  will  improve  the  quality  of  any 


Fig.    88.— Tender   on   Stock    Platform   to    Temper  the   Mortar. 

brick  wall,  as  it  insures  more  than  enough  better  workman- 
ship to  compensate  for  any  decrease  in  the  strength  of  the 
mortar.     It  will  also  delay  the  set  of  the  cement  enough  to 
insure  the  mortar  being  used  up  prior  to  the  first  set. 
367 

It  is  not  enough  to  order  lots  of  square-pointed  and 
round-pointed  shovels.  Shovels  must  be  ordered  of  the  size 
and  shape  that  are  best  adapted  for  the  different  classes  of  ma- 
terials to  be  shoveled. 


no 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.    89. — Rust   Spots  on  a  Structural   Steel  Column. 


MORTAR.  m 

368 

Square  shovels  must  be  used  for  mortar.     A  tender  can 
shovel  sands  and  all  kinds  of  mortar  faster,  and  can  temper  up 
mortar  faster  with  a  square  shovel  than  he  can  with  a  round- 
pointed  shovel. 
369 

Figs.  89  and  90  show  bad  rust  spots  on  structural  steel 
columns  that  were  buried  14  years,  from  1892  to  1906,  in  the 
exterior  brick  walls  of  the  Mutual  Life  Insurance  Co.'s  eight- 
story  office  building  at  San  Francisco,  Cal.  This  building  was 
practically  uninjured  by  the  earthquake  of  April  18,  1906,  but 

was  rendered  unfit  for  use  by  the  fire  that  followed. 
370 

We  removed  the  upper  six  stories  of  this  building,  and  we 
noted  carefully  the  condition  of  all  of  the  steel  frame. 
371 

The  steel  frame  was  in  perfect  condition,  so  far  as  rust 
was  concerned,  except  in  a  few  places,  probably  not  more  than 
a  dozen  places,  which  were  like  those  shown  by  Figs.  89  and 
90. 
372 

All  of  the  rust  spots  occurred  where  the  mortar  was  not 
filled  closely  around  the  frame.  There  were  no  rust  spots 
whatever  on  any  place  that  was  covered  with  mortar,  except  in 
a  few  minor  cases,  where  the  rust  apparently  had  not  been 
completely  scraped  off  before  painting.  Even  in  these  places 
the  rust  seemed  to  be  much  retarded  by  close  contact  with  the 
mortar. 
373 

As  this  steel  frame  is  one  of  the  first  used  in  a  high  build- 
ing in  the  west,  and  has,  consequently,  been  buried  longer  than 
any  other  that  has  been  carefully  inspected  when  taken  down, 
the  results  are  important  to  those  interested  in  brickwork. 
374 

The  following  rules  are  the  result  of  our  knowledge 
gained  on  this  building : 

(a)  All  steel,  whether  painted  or  not,  must  be  buried  in 
mortar. 

(b)  All  kinds  of  mortar  tend  to  help  to  preserve  steel 
from  rusting,  but  Portland  cement  and  sand  are  undoubtedly 
the  best  for  this  purpose. 

(c)  All   structural    steel   and   iron    must    be   completely 


112 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.  90. — Rust  Spots  on  a   Structural   Steel   Column. 


MORTAR.  113 

plastered  by  the  bricklayer  at  least  i  ft.  ahead  of  the  brick- 
work. 

(d)     All  brick  must  be  laid  with  a  shove  joint  against  all 
steel  and  iron  of  every  description. 
375 

We  realize  that  this  will  add  to  the  expense  of  brickwork, 
but  it  must  be  done  thoroughly,  regardless  of  the  expense. 
376 

If  the  bricklayer  sees  any  evidence  of  rust  on  steel  or  iron 

work,  whether  or  not  it  has  been   painted  over,  he  is  to  call 
the  brick  foreman's  attention  to  it.    He,  in  turn,  shall  call  the 
superintendent's  attention  to  it,  immediately. 
377 

Care  must  be  taken  when  wooden  beams  are  built  into 
brickwork  that  mortar  does  not  touch  the  wood,  as  it  is  likely 
to  cause  dry  rot.  Any  kind  of  mortar  will  cause  deterioration 

of  wood. 
378 

Whenever  possible  build  the  brickwork  so  that  the  air  can 
circulate  freely  around  all  buried  woodwork. 
379 

Wash  mortar  from  cut  stone  before  it  sets  too  hard. 
380 

When  bedding  long  stones  that  are  not  loaded  evenly, 
for  example,  sills  under  openings,  care  must  be  used  to  bed 

them  under  the  ends  only. 
381 

No  mortar  must  be  put  under  any  place  except  the  ends 
until  the  entire  wall  is  built  and  all  shrinking  has  taken  place. 
Otherwise  the  stone  will  be  broken  in  two  by  the  uneven 
loading. 


CHAPTER    XL 

BRICKS. 

382 

When  writing  out  the  order  at  the  time  of  buying  bricks, 
be  careful  about  the  local  terms  that  define  quality.  For  in- 
stance, the  terms  "light-hard,"  "hard,"  "salmon,"  "benches," 
"arches,"  "up  and  down,"  "run  of  kiln,"  and  similar  expres- 
sions, often  have  different  meaning  in  different  localities. 
383 

The  only  safe  way  to  prevent  misunderstandings  is  to 
have  a  few  sample  loads  of  brick  stored  in  some  place  where 
they  can  be  used  for  reference,  to  settle  all  disputes. 
384 

When  buying  brick,  always  give  preference  to  that  brick- 
yard that  can  show  a  long  record  for  successes  and  has  pro- 
duced brick  that  have  been  actually  exposed  to  the  weather  for 
many  years  with  no  sign  of  deterioration. 
385 

Other  things  being  equal,  the  brick  that  will  soak  up  the 
least  amount  of  water  should  be  given  the  preference  when 
buying  brick.  Where  several  kind  of  common  brick  are  used 
on  the  same  job,  the  superintendent  must  use  those  brick  that 
are  least  impervious  to  water  where  such  brick  are  the  most 
needed. 
386 

To  determine  the  absorptiveness  of  a  brick,  provide  a 
cylindrical  glass  vessel  barely  large  enough  to  permit  of  hold- 
ing a  brick  on  end,  and  about  twice  as  high  as  the  brick  is 
when  on  end.  The  vessel  must  have  the  same  horizontal  cross 
sectional  area  at  all  heights.  Paste  a  strip  of  paper  vertically 
on  the  Outside  of  the  glass.  Mark  off  the  paper  with  horizontal 
lines  to  any  equal  divisions,  such  as  1/16  in.,  and  number  them. 
387 

Proceed  as  follows : 

(a)  Fill  the  glass  tank  about  half  full. 

(b)  Note  the  exact  height  on  the  paper  strip  of  the  water 
level  (such  as  40). 

114 


BRICKS.  115 

(c)  Immerse  the  brick  on  end  and  read  the  height  of  the 
water  again   (such  as,  say  Go). 

(d)  Read  the  height  of  the  water  again  after  the  brick 
has  been  immersed  24  hours  (say  at  55). 

(e)  Take  out  the  brick  and  then  read  the  height  of  the 
water  again  (say  at  35). 

388 

This  will  show  that  this  brick  is  equal  in  size  to  20  points 
of  water,  and  that  it  will  absorb  five  points  of  water  or  25 
per  cent  of  its  own  bulk  of  water. 
389 

By  this  method  any  number  of  brick  can  be  compared. 
390 

If  the  water  does  not  recede  when  the  brick  is  taken  out 
the  exact  number  of  points  that  it  raised  when  the  brick  was 
immersed,  there  has  either  been  evaporation,  or  else  the  device 
has  been  tampered  with. 
391 

The  brick  must  be  perfectly  dry  to  start  with,  or  the  test 
will  not  be  accurate. 
392 

Tests  of  absorption   must  always  be  made  in  this  way, 
never  by  weighing  the  brick  before  and  after  immersion  ;  for, 
while  this  latter  method  has  been  very  extensively  used,  it  is 
very  inaccurate. 
393 

If  any  round-nosed,   octagon,  or  other   special  brick  are 
needed,  they  must  be  ordered  at  the  earliest  possible  moment, 
to  prevent  the  job  from  being  delayed  later,  while  the  special 
brick  are  being  baked. 
394 

For  arches,  etc.,  it  is  always  economical  to  buy  those  brick 
that  can  be  cut  the  easiest,  regardless  of  their  price  per  thou- 
sand. 
395 

Oftentimes  a  few  thousand  special  brick  can  be  bought 
for  work  that  is  to  be  cut.     These  will  save  a  large  sum  over 
cutting  the  regular  cull  that  is  used  on  the  straight  work  on 
the  balance  of  the  wall. 
396 

No  bats  are  ever  to  be  used  on  our  work,  except  those 
bats  that  are  made  by  unloading  and  handling  whole  brick  on 
the  work. 


n6  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

397 

This  will  provide  just  about  enough  bats  to  piece  out  as 
they  are  needed  in  filling  the  interior  of  walls  and  piers. 
398 

See  that  the  bricklayers  pick  up  bats  when  a  piece  of  a 
brick  is  wanted  instead  of  breaking  a  whole  brick  to  get  a  bat. 
399 

When  wooden  brick  are  required,  be  sure  that  they  are 
about  the  height  of  two  horizontal  joints  thicker  than  the  clay 
brick  with  which  they  are  to  be  laid.  They  must  be  dovetailed 
— that  is,  at  least  2  ins.  longer  on  the  back  than  on  the  front 
so  that  they  will  not  pull  out. 
400 

For  wooden  brick  pick  out  the  local  wood  that  shrinks  and 
swells  the  least  with  moisture  and  is  least  subject  to  dry  rot 
when  laid  in  contact  with  mortar. 
401 

Bricks  vary  in  size  in  different  parts  of  the  country.  In 
this  book  bricks  are  spoken  of  as  being  approximately  8  ins. 
long,  4  ins.  wide  and  2.^/2  ins.  thick,  not  because  these  are  the 
average  measurements  of  merchantable  brick,  but  because  it  is 
easier  to  handle  this  size  in  this  bricklaying  system. 
402 

We  realize  that  there  are  as  many  brick  made  about 
9x4^  x2%  ins.,  as  of  any  other  size.  The  Roman,  or  Pom- 
peian,  size  is  I2x4x  il/2,  and  the  New  England  water  struck 
brick  of  7^  x  ^/2  x  2%  ins.  are  also  numerous;  but  so  far  as 
this  bricklaying  system  is  concerned,  the  rules  apply  to  one 
size  just  as  well  as  to  another. 
403 

A  vertical  tier  of  brick  is  herein  called  "4  ins."  of  brick. 
The  "closer"  at  the  jamb  is  spoken  of  as  the  "2-in.  piece." 
404 

A  brick  with  a  piece  cut  'off  one  end  is  called  a  "three- 
quarter  brick,"   although   it   may   be   considerably   longer   or 
shorter  than  three-quarters  of  a  brick. 
405 

Some  brick  have  a  depression  on  the  top,  some  on  the  bot- 
tom, and  some  on  both  top  and  bottom  surfaces. 
406 

If  the  depression  comes  on  one  surface  only,  make  it  come 
on  the  top  surface  if  that  is  possible. 


BRICKS.  117 

407 

If  there  is  a  depression  in  the  bottom  surface  of  a  brick,  it 
must  be  filled  with  mortar  just  before  the  brick  is  laid,  or  the 
air  will  surely  be  pocketed  in  this  depression  by  the  mortar, 
which  will  prevent  the  brick  from  being  properly  bedded. 
408 

The  depression  is  supposed  to  be  of  value  on  account  of 
the  doweling  effect  of  the  mortar,  but,  in  reality,  it  is 
put  in  by  the  brickmaker  to  save  clay  and  weight  in  trans- 
portation. It  also  permits  baking  hard  to  the  center  of  the 
brick  with  less  fuel. 
409 

The  alleged  value  of  the  doweling  effect  of  the  mortar  is 
more  than  offset  by  the  uneven  bearing  that  the  brick  gener- 
ally gets  in  practice. 
410 

Red  face  brick  are  culled  for  two  reasons : 

(A)  For  size. 

(B)  For  color. 
411 

Bricks  made  in  the  same  yard  may  be  made  in  the  same 
size  molds  ;  but,  when  they  are  baked,  they  shrink  and  color 
according  to  the  amount  and  duration  of  the  heat.  Conse- 
quently, culling  them  for  color  also  culls  them  at  the  same 
time  for  size. 
412 

Bricks  can  be  culled  in  the  shade  much  easier  and  faster 
than  in  the  sunlight.     This  should  be  taken  into  consideration 
when  selecting  the  place  for  unloading  the  face  brick. 
413 

Face  brick  should  be  bought  with  an  agreement  that  they 
be  delivered  face  up  at  the  job.    This  means  that  they  must  be 
handled  face  up  from  the  time  they  leave  the  brick  kiln  till 
they  arrive  at  the  job. 
414 

All  packed  brick  should    be    unloaded    with    iron    brick 
clamps.     See  Fig.  91. 
415 

When  the  brick  are  piled  on  the  ground,  all  in  one  direc- 
tion, they  must  be  face  up,  and  so  placed  that  the  man  who 
culls  them  can  stand  at  the  ends  of  the  brick  and  dispose  of 
them  without  walking,  as  fast  as  he  takes  them  out  of  the  pile. 


n8 


416 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


The  unculled  brick   shown   in   Fig.   71   are  piled   exactly 
right  for  fast  culling. 
417 

Piling  culled  brick  in  small  separate  piles  near  the  pile 
of  unculled  brick  is  much  cheaper  than  keeping  all  of  the  piles 
of  culled  brick  separate,  as  this  latter  method  requires  much 
walking.  They  will  not  be  mixed  up  if  the  piles  of  different 
culls  have  plenty  of  chalk  marks  showing  which  culls  they 
are. 
418 

The  culler  should  stand  at  the  side  of  the  pile  facing  the 
ends  of  the  brick.  He  should  use  a  regular  bricklayer's  brush 
and  sweep  the  dust  off  the  entire  length  of  the  top  row  of  bull 
headers  (brick  on  edge),  before  culling  any  brick  in  that  row. 


Fig.   91.— Iron  Brick  Clamp  for  Handling  Brick. 

419 

Three  to  five  culls  are  all  that  are  ever  expected.     The 
lightest  brick  are  first  culls,  and  the  darkest  are  fifth  culls. 
420 

The  culler  picks  out  first  that  cull  of  which  there  are  the 
fewest.     If  the  brick  are  mostly  cull  number  one,  he  picks 
out  the  fifth  cull,  and  so  on. 
421 

It  is  obvious  that  this  is  the  best  method  of  procedure,  be- 
cause, after  the  few  have  been  picked  out,  the  balance  can  be 
handled  in  bulk  from  the  unculled  pile  to  the  various  culled 
piles  by  low-priced  laborers,  instead  of  by  the  high-priced 
skilled  cullers. 


BRICKS.  1 19 

422 

Bricks   must   be    put    in    their    individual   piles,   face   up. 
When  the  tenders  carry  the  brick  to  the  mason  they  must  de- 
posit them  on  the  mason's  stage  face  up. 
423 

Bricks  should  be  kept  covered  until  they  are  culled,  as  a 
difference  in  dampness  will  deceive  the  man  culling  them  as  to 
their  real  color. 
424 

See  that  the  men  who  are  handling  these  brick  pick  them 
up  with  both  hands  simultaneously. 
425 

All  brick  must  be  wet  with  water  thoroughly  just  before 
laying,  except  in  frosty  weather. 
426 

On  work  that  is  liable  to  freeze  within  a  week  after  the 
brick  are  laid,  the  bricks  must  not  be  wet,  as  the  freezing  of 
the  water  in  the  brick  will  do  more  than  enough  injury  to  the 
work  to  offset  the  benefits  of  the  wetting  of  the  brick. 
427 

Where  there  is  no  danger  of  freezing,  the  brick  must  be 
wet  almost  to  the  point  where  they  will  "run"  on  the  mortar. 
428 

There  are  four  reasons  for  wetting  the  brick : 

(a)  The   bricks   will   be   better   bedded   on   the   mortar 
under  them. 

(b)  They  will  adhere  to  the  mortar  better. 

(c)  A  dry  brick  soaks  water  out  of  the  mortar  quickly. 
Mortar  will  not  set  properly  unless  it  dries  out  slowly. 

(d)  Wetting  brick  washes  the  dust  from  them  and  clean 
brick  present  the  best  surface  for  mortar  to  adhere  to. 

429 

Do  not  wet  brick  to  a  point  where  they  will  run  out  of 
place  when  laid  in  the  mortar. 
430 

If  they  begin  to  run  do  not  try  to  hammer  them  back 
to  place,  as  the  tapping  on  the  brick  tends  to  temper  up  the 
mortar  more,  and  it  will  run  still  more. 


CHAPTER  XII 
BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC. 

431 

The  tools  which  an  apprentice  requires  are  stated  under 
training  of  apprentices. 
432 

Every  bricklayer  should  provide  himself  with  a  loner  and 
with  a  short  plumb  rule.  The  short  plumb  rule  should  be 
from  i  ft.  4  ins.  to  I  ft.  6  ins.  long,  with  one  plumb  glass  and 
one  level  glass.  The  long  plumb  rule  should  be  not  less  than 
3  ft.  6  ins.  long,  nor  more  than  4  ft.  long,  unless  it  is  to  be  used 
with  a  plumb  bob  instead  of  spirit  glasses.  It  should  not  be 
over  3%  ins.  wide  nor  more  than  i^g  ins.  thick.  It  should 
have  a  spirit  level,  with  at  least  two  plumb  glasses  in  it,  placed 
at  opposite  ends  and  so  arranged  that  at  least  two  can  be  read 
at  the  same  time. 


Fig.   92.— Brick   Jointer. 

433 

Plumb  bob  rules  are  better  than  an  inaccurate  spirit  glass, 
but  are  too  slow  for  general  practice.    They  are  difficult  to  use 
where  the  wind  blows  on  the  bob. 
434 

On  every  job  a  plumb  straight  edge  shall  be  maintained, 
for   correcting  the   mason's   levels   and   plumb    rules.      Every 
plumb  rule  must  be  tested  at  least  once  per  month. 
435 

A  jointer,  at  best,  gets  dull  and  loses  its  shape  quickly, 
due  to  the  wearing  qualities  of  the  sand  of  the  mortar.     It 
should,  therefore,  be  made  with  the  hardest  temper  obtainable. 
Fig.  92  shows  a  typical  jointer. 
436 

When  gaging  and  marking  2-in.  pieces  and  three-quarter 
pieces,  a  gage  similar  to  A,  in  Fig  93,  saves  the  most  time,  as 

120 


BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC.  121 

the  brick  can  be  marked  with  a  pencil  quickest  with  this  kind 

of  a  gage. 

437 

The  appearance  of  any  8-in.  wall  can  be  much  improved 
by  having  all  the  headers  of  exactly  the  same  length.    Headers 
of  the  right  length  can  be  most  quickly  selected  by  using  a 
wooden  gage  like  B,  in  Fig.  93. 
438 

A  cutting  out  hammer  should  weigh  not  less  than  3^4 
and  not  more  than  4  Ibs.,  exclusive  of  the  handle.  It  should 
have  a  hole  in  the  head  at  least  i  in.  long  and  at  least  */2  in. 
wide.  The  handle  should  increase  in  size  from  the  head  to  the 

end. 
439 

There  are  many  other  types  of  hammers  and  handles 
that  can  be  used  for  cutting  out  but  the  type  above  described 


Fig.    93. — Gages    for  Measuring  Brick. 

will  enable  a  first-class  man  to  do  the  most  work  with  the 
least   fatigue.     Cast   steel   hammers   are   satisfactory   and   are 
much  cheaper  than  forged  hammers. 
440 

Every  bricklayer  is  to  be  loaned  free  two  trowels  of  the 
Gilbreth  pattern.  He  is  either  to  return  these  trowels  when 
he  leaves  the  job,  or  he  is  to  have  their  value  deducted  from 
his  wages.  The  value  of  the  trowel  is  to  decrease  5  cts.  per 
week  for  the  time  he  has  used  it. 
441 

He  is  to  use  the  smaller  trowel  on  the  exterior  4  ins.  of 
the  wall,  and  he  is  to  use  the  larger  trowel  on  the  interior  of 
the  wall. 
442 

A  bricklayer's  set  is  used  to  cut  brick  to  an  exact  line. 
443 

Sets  are  usually  made  like  Fig.  94,  but  there  is  no  ad- 
vantage in  having  them  in  this  particular  shape  and  they  cost 


122 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


much  more  than  when  made  like  Fig.  95.     In  fact  the  shape 
shown  in  Fig.  95  strikes  a  better  blow  and  it  is  easier  to  control 
the  direction  of  the  plane  of  fracture. 
444 

If  the  bottom  surface  is  made  60°  with  the  straight  side, 
the  plane  of  fracture  will  be  about  in  the  plane  of  the  straight 
side. 


Fig.  94. — Set  for  Cutting  Brick  to  a  True  Line. 


445 


Leaning  the  set  forward  slightly  will  make  the  fracture 
"cut  under,"  as  on  the  dotted  line  A  in  Fig.  94,  enough  to  clear 
the  brick  that  is  laid  against  the  cut  brick  without  further  cut- 
ting or  trimming  of  the  brick  after  it  is  cut  by  the  set. 
446 

The  straight  side  of  the  set  should  always  be  toward  the 
side  of  the  piece  of  brick  to  be  used,  and  the  bent  face  of  the 
set  toward  the  piece  of  brick  that  is  to  be  wasted. 
447 

Sets   must  be   kept   sharp.     All   bricklayers'  tools    must 


BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC. 


I23 


be  kept  constantly  in  order  by  a  tool  sharpener  without  ex- 
pense to  the  bricklayers.  There  is  no  more  reason  for  the 
present  custom  of  bricklayers  being  obliged  to  have  their  own 
tools  sharpened  in  their  own  time  than  there  would  be  reason 
to  make  carpenters  do  likewise. 
448 

Until  comparatively  recently,  the  right  temper  on  ordi- 
nary qualities  of  tool  steel  for  brick  tools  was  obtained  best 
by  heating  a  tool  only  to  a  cherry  red,  then  dipping  the 
steel  into  brine  the  instant  that  the  last  straw  color  leaves,  and 
when  the  pigeon  blue  comes  to  the  end  of  the  cutting  edge. 


Fig.   95.— Design   of  a   Hand1 
Low  Priced  Set. 


and 


Fig.   96.— Method  of  Using  a  Set. 


449 


To-day  the  directions  of  the  makers  of  the  particular  kind 
of  steel  used  must  be  complied  with  in  order  to  obtain  the  best 
results. 
450 

If  the  brick  is  of  a  nature  that  is  hard  to  cut  accurately 
with  one  blow  of  a  hammer  on  the  set,  time  can  sometimes  be 
saved  by  cutting  off  the  back  corner  with  the  head  of  the 
hammer  before  trying  to  break  off  the  front  corner  with 
the  set. 
451 

When  cutting  a  brick  with  a  set,  put  the  brick  in  a  line 
in  and  out  with  the  body,  with  the  piece  of  brick  to  be  wasted 
furthest  away.     See  Fig.  96. 
452 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  brick  be  actually  broken  into 
two  pieces  by  the  set.  Furthermore,  striking  more  than  one 
blow  on  the  set  is  apt  to  cause  the  face  of  the  brick  to  flake  up, 


124 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.  97.— Splitting  a  Brick  with  the  Head  of  a  Hammer. 

or  injure  the  face  so  that  it  may  flake  up  from  the  weather 

after  the  brick  is  laid  in  the  wall. 

453 

One  hard  sharp  rap  on  the  set  should  be  sufficient  to 
develop  sufficient  weakness  in  the  brick  to  enable  the  brick  to 
be  broken  by  one  or  two  sharp  flat  blows  of  the  hammer  on 


Fig.    98.— Position  of  Brick  and  Hammer  When   Splitting. 


BRICKLA  YERS'    TOOLS, .  ETC. 


125 


Fig.   99. — Cutting  Off  Lumps  with  the  Pean  of  the  Hammer. 

one  of  the  bed  surfaces  of  the  brick  in  line  where  the  line  of 

fracture  is  desired. 

454 

A  set  will  make  the  straightest  line  in  the  shortest  time 
on  the  cut  edge  of  a  brick,  but  the  cut  can  be  madt  with  the 
head  of  the  hammer  (see  Figs.  97  and  98).  The  pean  is  to  be 
used  only  for  cutting  off  humps  (see  Fig.  99)  and  if  the  new 
edge  is  not  exactly  straight  it  can  be  trued  by  striking  the 


Fig.    100. — Full    Sized   Pattern   for  Hand  Leather. 


126 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


projecting   points   with   the   flat   surface   of   the    face   of   the 

hammer. 

455 

There   are   various   devices   for   protecting   worn    fingers 
and  thumbs. 
456 

Mittens  are  too  clumsy  to  permit  of  quick  work.  Gloves 
and  rubber  ringer  cots  make  the  fingers  tender.  The  best 
device  is  a  piece  of  calf  skin,  if  it  is  cut  the  right  shape.  If 
the  leather  is  cut  exactly  like  the  patterns  (see  Figs.  100  and 
101),  it  can  be  worn  without  any  hindrance  whatever,  while  if 
it  is  cut  after  the  pattern  used  in  a  brickyard  it  is  a  serious 


Fig.  101.— Full  Sized  Pattern  for  Thumb  Leather. 

detriment  to  speed  and  quality  of  the  work.  If  the  leathers  are 
cut  and  creased  exactly  the  same  size  as  the  patterns,  and 
worn  with  the  bands  exactly  where  shown,  with  the  bands 
half  way  between  the  joints  of  the  first  and  little  fingers  (see 
Fig  102),  the  leathers  will  not  droop  forward  and  get  covered 
with  mortar  between  the  fingers  and  the  leathers. 
457 

The  thumb  leather  laps  over  in  a  way  that  protects  the 
thumb  where  the  band  is  cut  out. 


BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC.  127 

458 

The  day  has  arrived  when  bricklayers  for  their  best  inter- 
ests must  depart  from  the  ancient  custom  of  handling  mortar 
from  the  mortar  box  to  the  wall  with  a  trowel  only. 
459 

New  devices  must  be  adopted  by  this  trade  to  cut  down 

the  cost  of  brick  work,  or  bricklaying  will  become  a  lost  art. 
To-day  the  makers  of  cement  are  producing  the  best  cement 
that  the  world  has  ever  produced,  it  a  cost  of  less  than  70  cts. 
per  barrel  of  380  Ibs.  at  the  mill. 


Fig.    102. — Method    of   Wearing    Hand   Leathers. 


460 


The  cost  of  sand  for  a  cubic  yard  of  concrete  is  but  little 
more  than  for  a  cubic  yard  of  brickwork. 
461 

The  cost  of  broken  stone  or  gravel  is  much  less  than  the 
cost  of  brick  of  equal  bulk. 
462 

The  cost  of  measuring,  feeding,  mixing,  conveying  and 
placing  concrete,  together  with  the  cost  of  the  forms,  is  about 


128 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.    103. — Fountain    Trowel   with   Hand    Trowel    for    Handle. 

the  same  per  cubic  yard  as  the  masons'  and  tenders'  time  for 

cubic  yard  of  brickwork. 

463 

Furthermore,  bulk  for  bulk,  gravel  concrete  walls  without 

any  reinforcement  are  much  stronger  and  more  waterproof, 
and  fully  as  good  non-conductors  of  heat  and  cold  as  the  best 
brick  walls.  Now  that  reinforced  concrete  enters  into  the  con- 


Fig.   104.— View  Into  Trowel  Showing  Slat  for  Discharge  of  Mortar. 


BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC.  129 

struction   of  nearly   every   large   undertaking,   and   a   certain 
amount  of  concrete  plant  is  therefore  necessary,  anyway,  con- 
crete can  be  substituted  at  a  considerable  saving,   in   many 
places. 
464 

The  time  has  come  when  bricklayers  must  awaken  to  the 

fact  that  the  very  existence  of  their  craft  is  at  stake.     Means 
must  be  adopted  to  compete  with  this  oldest  yet  newest  ma- 
terial of  construction,  concrete. 
465 

In  many  places  in  America,  bricklayers  have  already  come 


Fig.  105. — Rear  View  of  Fountain  Trowel. 

to  the  realization  of  this  fact,  and  in  some  states  they  will  lay 
no  brick  on  a  building  the  foundation  of  which  is  concrete. 
In  other  states  they  have  agreed  to  lay  no  brick  on  a  building 
the  frame  of  which  is  reinforced  concrete.  These  agreements 
have  only  spurred  the  concrete  men  to  new  ideas  for  finishing 
buildings  of  concrete  without  any  brick  at  all,  and  the  brick- 
layers have  realized  that  it  does  not  help  matters  to  boycott 
concrete. 
466 

The  history  of  the  world  repeats  itself.     In  accordance, 
with  the  lessons  learned  from  that  history,  the  cost  of  com-  i 
mon  brickwork  must  either  be  reduced,  or  bricklaying  will  be- 
come a  lost  art. 


130 

467 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


We  do  not  recommend  trying  to  solve  this  problem  by 
reducing  the  pay  of  bricklayers  or  of  tenders,  for  the  reason 
that  they  are  obliged  to  lose  so  much  time  on  account  of  wet 
and  cold  weather,  nor  do  we  believe  that  the  number  of  hours 
should  be  increased.  No  one  does,  who  has  ever  laid  brick 
continuously  for  eight  hours. 


Fig.   106.— Teaching  Bricklayers  to  Spread  Mortar  for  Twenty  Brick  in  Five 
Seconds  with  the  Fountain  Trowel. 

468 

We  do  believe  that  the  bricklayer  must  increase  his  out- 
put. He  must  remove  all  obstacles  that  make  for  reduced  out- 
put. He  must  use  every  device  that  will  lessen  the  cost  of 
brickwork.  The  day  has  come  when  a  bricklayer  must  adopt 
other  tools  than  the  trowel  for  handling  his  mortar.  Not  a 
shovel,  not  a  bucket,  nor  a  hod  (for  good  brickwork  cannot  be 
done  with  mortar  dumped  into  the  wall),  but  a  fountain  trow- 
el, in  which  the  ordinary  bricklayer's  trowel  is  used  as  a  tem- 
porary handle,  can  be  used  for  spreading  mortar  better  than 


BRICKLAYERS'    TOOLS,    ETC.  13! 

mortar  can  be  strung  fom  a  trowel.     See  Figs.   103,  104,  105 

and  106. 

469 

Fig.   106  shows  a  demonstration  of  spreading  mortar  for 
twenty  bricks  in  5  seconds  for  a  header  course  with  a  fountain 
trowel  on  a  i6-inch  wall. 
470 

The  fountain  trowel  makes  for  good  work.     It  will  handle 
mortar  so  soft  that  it  could  not  possibly  be  handled  with  an 
ordinary   trowel. 
471 

This  tro\vel  \vill  handle  mortar  so  soft  that  it  will  fill  even 
the   joints  of  brick,   laid  under   the   brick   and  brick   method. 
With  soft  mortar,  the  work  will  not  dry  out  so  fast,  which 
makes  also  for  better  work. 
472 

An  ordinary  trowel  is  used  under  the  back  strap  (see 
Fig.  103).  When  the  fountain  trowel  is  empty  the  hand  trow  1 
can  be  withdrawn  instantly,  which  permits  the  bricklayer  to 
use  the  same  trowel  as  a  trowel  or  as  the  handle  to  a  fountain 
trowel  without  any  delay  in  shifting. 
473 

This  is  but  one  of  the  new  methods  that  must  soon  be 
adopted.  We  shall  welcome  suggestions  that  will  enable  us  to 
produce  brickwork  at  a  price  low  enough  to  substitute  it 
for  concrete. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

LINES,    PLUMBS,   AND    POLES. 
474 

There  is  no  one  thing  that  will  assist  the  bricklayer  to 
lay  his  brick  so  accurately  and  quickly  to  a  straight  line  and 
plumb  face  as  a  very  tight  line. 
475 

The  old-fashioned  English  "Linen  Mason's  Line"  should 
be  obtained  for  this  work,  no  matter  where  the  work  is  located. 
This  line  is  the  most  expensive  of  all  varieties,  but  will  prove 
economical  in  every  case.  Keep  your  job  constantly  provided 
with  it. 
476 

This  line  is  carried  in  stock  in  three  sizes.     Use  medium 
size  for  common  brickwork,  and  fine  for  face  brickwork. 
477 

The  foreman  should  see  that  lines  are  strung  to  all  plumb 
corners  where  there  is  any  chance  overhead  to  attach  the  lines. 
This  is  generally  neglected  by  foremen.  Many  of  the  brick- 
layers think  they  can  do  their  work  as  well  and  as  fast  with  a 
plumb-rule  as  with  lines.  We  have  never  seen  one  who 
could,  but  whether  they  can  or  not,  lines  must  be  strung. 
478 

The  line  should  be  y%  in.  out  both  ways  from  the  brick. 
479 

After  the  brick  are  laid,  they  are  to  be  tried  for  straight 
and  for  plumb  with  a  plumb-rule,  to  make  sure  that  the  nail- 
ing place  overhead  has  not  been  shifted  and  that  no  brick  is 
crowding  the  line. 
480 

Provide  lines  for  all  pilasters  where  there  is  opportunity 
to   attach   lines   overhead,   but   inform   bricklayers   that   they 
must  also  use  their  plumb  rules. 
481 

After  all  lines  are  in  place,  sight  through  from  one  end  to 
the  other,  to  make  sure  that  they  are  in  line.  See  Fig.  112 A 
(page  138)  and  note  also  the  method  of  staying  the  metal  win- 
dow frames. 

132 


LINES,    PLUMBS    AND    POLES.  133 

482 

In  plumbing  a  corner  with  a  spirit  plumb-rule,  or  with  a 

plumb-bob  and  rule,  it  must  be  held  against  the  brick  in  a 
position  plumb  in  itself  both  ways,  that  is,  also  sideways. 
483 

While  there  are  many  ways  that  a  corner  can  be  plumbed, 
much  time  can  be  saved  if  the  plumb-rule  is  placed  in  exactly 
the  same  place  every  time.  The  best  place  is  where  the  side 
of  the  plumb-rule  is  exactly  even,  i.  e.,  in  the  same  plane,  as  the 
return  of  the  corner.  Therefore,  on  all  of  our  work,  the  face 
of  the  plumb-rule  shall  be  even  and  flush  with  the  end  of  the 
brick  on  the  corner. 


Fig.    107.— Correct  Arrangement  of  the   Nails,   Line  and   Trig. 


484 


Foremen  must  not  permit  the  men  on  the  lead  to  build  up 
their  leads  more  than  header  high.     Leads  higher  than  from 
header  to  header  are  unprofitable,  and  are  sometimes  the  cause 
of  irregularities  in  the  wall. 
485 

The  men  on  the  leads  should  be  told  that  they  are  expect- 
ed to  do  their  bit  on  the  wall  with  the  exception  of  the  header 
course. 


134  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

486 

While  that  course  is  being  laid  out  for  them  they  are  to 
stack  up  a  lead  to  the  next  header  high. 
487 

The  man  on  the  trig  is  not  expected  to  carry  his  trig  over 
two  courses  above  the  line.     While  he  must  plumb  it  with  a 
plumb-rule,  he  must  also  see  that  the  man  on  the  hauling  end 
of  the  line  sights  it  for  in  and  out,  and  also  for  height. 
488 

The  trig  shall  be  a  loop  about  6  ins.  long,  so  that  the  line 
will  haul  through  it.    See  Fig.  107. 
489 

Never  make  the  trig  fast  to  the  line. 
490 

Use  a  brick  on  edge  to  hold  the  trig  in  place,  and  see  that 
the  line  at  the  trig  is  exactly  at  the  top  edge  of  the  brick. 
491 

All  brick  except  trig  and  lead  brick  must  be  laid  so  that 
they  do  not  quite  touch  the  line. 


Fig.    108. — Correct   Method   of   Splicing   the   Line. 

492 

Mason's  linen  line  is  too  expensive  to  replace  every  time 
it  is  cut,  and  even  when  spliced  instead  of  knotted  it  is  not 
quite  so  accurate  to  lay  to  and  the  splice  may  crowd  it  off  the 
wall  slightly. 
493 

Men  must,  therefore,  use  wire  nails  and  not  cut  nails  to 
hold  the  line.    These  nails  should  be  flattened  so  as  to  go  into 
a  close  vertical  joint  of  the  brickwork.     See  Fig.  107. 
494 

The  nails,  splice  and  trig  must  be  made  exactly  as  shown 
in  Fig.  107. 
495 

In  case  the  line  parts  on  account  of  being  worn,  or  by 
being  struck  by  a  trowel,  it  must  be  spliced,  as  shown  by  Fig. 
108,  by  opening  each  end  in  three  places  and  putting  each  end 
through  the  three  openings  in  the  other  line.  It  takes  more 
time  to  do  it  this  way  than  to  tie  a  knot  but  it  hauls  enough 
more  accurately  to  the  line  to  warrant  the  time  spent. 


LINES,    PLUMBS    AND    POLES. 


135 


-Top  of  F/. 
underGircfe 

Top  of  Door 


^ 

ofSkewback 


496 

Haul  the  line  to  the  bottom  of  all  projections  and  not  to 
the  top. 
497 

The  introduction  of  Portland  cement  and  the  recognition 
of  the  value  of  coarse  sands  has  lead  to  a  general  tendency 
toward  larger  joints  in  brickwork. 
498 

The  larger  the  joints  the  easier  it  is  to  se- 
cure filled  joints  and  better  beds  under  the 
brick.  This  fact  should  be  taken  into  serious 
consideration  when  the  foreman  is  laying  out 
the  story  pole. 
499 

Bricks  vary  much  in  thickness,  even  in  the 
same  kiln  in  the  same  brickyard.  Conse- 
quently, foremen  must  constantly  watch  the 
work  of  and  confer  with  the  men  on  the  leads, 
to  see  if  putting  in  or  taking  out  a  course  or 
two  of  brick  on  the  story  pole  would  assist  in 
making  easier,  and  consequently  faster  brick- 
laying on  that  wall. 
500 

When  the  size  of  a  joint  is  the  easiest  for 
the  bricklayer,  he  will  bed  his  brick  the  most 
perfectly. 
501 

The  printing  on  the  story  pole  is  to  be 
located  in  such  a  manner  that  it  will  be  easiest 
read  when  the  pole  is  right  end  up.  See  Fig. 
109.  This  will  prevent  mistakes  due  to  using 
the  pole  wrong  end  up. 
502 

It  is  not  always  possible  to  alter  the 
heights  of  laying  up  on  outside  walls,  but  it  is 
nearly  always  possible  on  the  inside  walls.  It 
is  constant  attention  to  these  little  details  that 
makes  the  difference  between  the  high  pay  and 
the  regular  pay  of  brick  foremen. 


GracfeSOO" 

109.— Story 
Pole. 


136  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

503 

All  walls  should  be  brought  up  level  in  themselves,  and 
at  a  height  about  ]/\  in.  below  the  beams  or  plates  carrying 
the  floor  beams.  This  will  save  time  in  leveling  up  the  floors. 
504 

Do  not  permit  the  man  using  the  engineer's  level  to  use  a 
surveyor's  rod  for  a  story  pole  on  buildings,  even  if  he  assures 
you  that  he  can  do  his  work  much  better  with  the  surveyor's 
rod. 
505 

Make  all  hands  depend  on  the  story  poles.  Their  general 
use  will  result  in  many  unexpected  savings,  and  danger  of 
mistakes  will  be  eliminated. 


Fig.    110. — Plumb    Bond    Pole. 

506 

Notches  should  be  cut  in  the  plumb  bond  pole  as  shown 
in  Fig.  no.  Marks  are  made  in  the  last  course  to  correspond 
with  these  notches  as  letters.  Bricks  laid  to  the  marks  insure 
plumb  joints.  Figs,  in  and  112  show  cross  sections  of  handy 
shapes  for  plumb  bond  poles. 
507 

All  lettering  on  the  plumb  bond  pole  is  to  be  located  in 
such  a  manner  that  it  can  be  easiest  read  when  the  pole  is  in 
the  actual  position  in  which  it  will  be  used.  This  will  prevent 
the  pole  ever  being  used  upside  down  or  end  for  end  and  the 
mistakes  that  would  arise  therefrom. 
508 

When  any  of  the  bonds  used  here  are  made  with  a  definite 
border,  such  as  a  diagonal  header  border,  a  "border  pole"  can 
be  used  with  the  regular  "plumb  bond  pole." 
509 

When  the  border  header  occurs  in  a  course  that  is  being 
marked  out,  the  plumb  bond  pole  can  be  advanced  bodily  the 
width  of  the  border  or  to  the  next  notch  on  the  border  pole. 


LINES,    PLUMBS    AND    POLES. 


510 

The  end  of  the  border  pole  is  to  be  held  exactly  at  the 
jamb  or  other  plumb  mark  on  the  wall. 
511 

Unless  the  border  runs  diagonally  for  a  considerable  dis- 
tance it  Avill  be  easier  for  the  bricklayers  to  use  a  plumb  bond 
pole  without  the  border  pole  with  a  notch  for  each  joint  of  the 
border  bricks. 
512 

Carry  grade  marks  up  one  corner  of  the  building,  and  at 
a  convenient  height,  about  6  ins.  to  i  ft.  above  each  Moor. 
A  lake  level  marks  on  the  wall  about  10  ft.  apart  all  around 
each  story. 


Fig.  111.  Fig.    112. 

Suggested   Cross   Sections   of   Plumb   Bond   Poles. 


513 


Use  the  level  marks  for  all  measuring  for  heights  of  all 
different  pieces  of  construction  in  this  story,  and  for  setting 
the  beams  of  the  floor  above;  but  do  not  measure  from  the 
top  of  the  floor,  no  matter  how  accurately  it  was  measured 

and  leveled  up. 
514 

Use  the  grade  marks  as  described  above,  for  two  purposes : 

(a)  To  measure  down  from,  to  check  up  the  level  of  the 
floor,  and  thus  detect  a  mistake  before  it  is  too  late. 

(b)  To  correct  errors,  even  if  a  part  of  the  building  has 
slightly  settled  or  shrunk.     It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  brick- 
work will  shrink  as  the  increased  weight  is  put  upon  it  about 
V\   in.  to  the  average  story  height.     In  fact,  some  walls  will 
shrink  so  much  that  allowance  for  shrinking  must  be  made  in 
setting  beams,  one  end  of  which  rests  on  a  steel  frame  and  the 
other  end  on  the  brickwork. 


1 38  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

515 

After  a  floor  has  been   Leveled   up,   the  foreman  should 
sight  along  the  tops  of  the  beams  to  see  if  they  line  up  accu- 
rately, that  is,  to  see  if  they  are  in  the  same  plane. 
516 

Sight  the  tops  of  window  frames  before  they  are  bricked 
in. 
517 

Sight  the  tops  of  bearing  plates  before  they  are  loaded. 
518 

Sight  piers  in  a  row  for  straightness  of  the  row  and  for 
plumb.     A  great  many  errors  and  pieces  of  bad  work  can  be 


Fig.   112A. — Lines  Used  as  Guides  for  Plumbing  Corners. 

detected  at  a  time  that  they  can  be  corrected  at  small  cost,  if 
the  foreman  and  superintendent  will  make  a  practice  of  sight- 
ing everything  that  is  in  the  same  plane. 
519 

There  are  many  cases  where  bosses  have  earned  a  great 
reputation  for  "accuracy  of  eye  for  plumb  and  level,"  when  in 
reality  they  sighted  the  bricklayers'  lead  to  the  corner  of  a 
building  across  the  street  when  nobody  was  watching.  This 
sighting  and  ranging  for  level  and  for  plumb  is  good  practice 
for  the  boss,  superintendent  and  foreman. 


LINES,    PLUMBS    AND    POLES.  139 

520 

The  best  bricklayers,  also,  when  building  their  leads,  sight 
each  course  by  some  level  course  or  object  in  the  distance  in- 
stead of  constantly  using  a  spirit  level ;  but  it  must  here  be 
remembered  that  two  level  courses  cannot  be  used  for  com- 
parison unless  they  are  either  exactly  level  with  each  other, 
or  else  parallel  with  each  other;  while  any  two  plumb  lines  can 
be  used  for  comparison. 
521 

All  measurements  must  be  made  three  times. 
522 

The   original    measurement   must   be    checked   before   the 
bricklayer  starts  his  lead. 
523 

The  second  check  must  be  made  soon  after  the  bricklayer 
has  actually  started  the  brickwork. 
524 

The  purpose  of  the  second  check  is  to  make  sure  that  the 
bricklayer  has  actually  used  correctly  the  measurements  that 
have  been  given  to  him. 
525 

Wherever  there  is  a  definite  measure  that  must  be  main- 
tained, a  templet,  or  stick,  must  be  made  and  used  to  check 
up  the  other  measurements.  For  example,  in  a  power  station, 
the  exact  distance  between  the  walls  carrying  the  crane  girder 
must  be  checked  as  built  by  a  wooden  pole  of  the  exact  length. 
This  pole  must  be  used  several  times  in  the  length  and  also  in 
the  height  of  the  wall  so  that,  regardless  of  what  other  means 
of  measuring  have  been  taken,  the  pole  will  check  it. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
MOTION    STUDY. 


526 


The  motion  study  in  this  book  is  but  the  beginning  of  an 
\  era  of  motion  study,  that  will  eventually  affect  all  of  our 
;  methods  of  teaching  trades.  It  will  cut  down  production  costs 
and  increase  the  efficiency  and  wages  of  the  workman.  It  will, 
we  hope,  eventually  help  to  handle  the  industrial  problems 
which  are  now  being  solved  by  Mr.  Frederick  W.  Taylor,  Ex- 
President  American  Society  Mechanical  Engineers,  by  means 
of  elementary  time  study,  the  task  and  the  differential  piece 
rate.  (See  paper  1003,  Trans.  Am.  Soc.  M.  E.,  by  F.  W.  Tay- 
lor.) All  members  of  our  organization  should  study  carefully 
the  work  that  is  now  being  done  by  Mr.  Taylor  and  his  col- 
laborators, Messrs.  Sanford  E.  Thompson,  H.  L.  Gantt,  C.  J. 
Earth,  H.  K.  Hathaway,  and  also  the  cost  analyses  investiga- 
tions that  are  now  being  made  by  Messrs.  H.  P.  Gillette  and 
R.  T.  Dana. 
527 

There  is  a  tremendous  field,  in  all  branches  of  all  me- 
chanical trades,  for  descriptions  and  illustrations  in  print  of 
the  best  methods  used  by  the  best  mechanics  in  working  at 
their  trade.  We  particularly  request  photographs  showing 
such  methods  to  the  best  advantage. 


To  be   pre-eminently   successful :    (a)    A   mechanic   must 
know  his  trade;  (b)  he  must  be  quick  motioned;  and  (c)  he 
must  use  the  fewest  possible  motions  to  accomplish  the  de- 
""sired  result. 
529 

It  is  a  fact  beyond  dispute  that  the  fastest  bricklayers, 
and   generally  the  best   bricklayers,  are  those   who   use  the 
fewest  motions,  and  not  those  who  are  naturally  the  quickest 
motioned. 
530 

A  bricklayer  can  do  no  better  service  for  his  craft  than 

140 


MOTION    STUDY. 


to  devise  methods  for  laying  brick  with  fewer  motions  than 

are  at  present  practiced  by  bricklayers. 

531 

We  present  herein  charts  of  the  methods  used  by  our  best 
bricklayers. 
532 

It   would   not   be   feasible   to   illustrate   all   the   different 
methods  used  by  all  of  our  bricklayers  ;  furthermore  it  would 
be  confusing. 
533 

The  purpose  of  the  illustrations  is  to  teach   apprentices 
that  a  brick  can  be  laid  with  very  few  motions,  if  each  motion 
is  made  for  a  certain  desired  effect,  and  that  a  combination  of 
these  motions  gives  the  certain  desired  result. 
534 

It  is  a  recognized  fact  among  bricklayers,  that  they  use 
one  set  of  motions  when  they  are  trying  to  exceed  the  speed 
of  a   fellow   workman,   and   another   set   when   they   are  not 
especially  rushed. 
535 

When  a  bricklayer  shows  an  apprentice  how  to  lay  brick 
he  invariably  teaches  the  slow  method.  The  result  is,  the 
apprentice  learns  to  place  the  brick  in  the  right  place  with 
the  right  amount  of  mortar  under  and  against  it,  but  the 
method  used  involves  a  great  many  more  motions  than  are 
necessary. 
536 

The  apprentice,  after  becoming  an  expert  in  this  way, 
must  then  attempt  to  get  out  of  the  slow  habits,  due  to 
unnecessary  motions,  and  to  learn  to  lay  brick  by  a  method 
that  will  enable  him  to  complete  his  portion  in  the  time  that 
is  allotted  to  journeymen. 
537 

These  illustrations  will  enable  the  apprentice  to  earn  his 
money  from  the  first  week  he  starts  to  work. 
538 

The  rules  will  narrow  down  his  first  lessons  to  a  few  vital 
principles  and  motions.    They  show  what  he  should  learn  first, 
as  well  as  how  he  should  learn  it. 
539 

These  rules  and  charts  will  enable  the  apprentice  to  earn 
large  wages  immediately,  because  he  has  here  a  series  of  in- 


1 42  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

structions   that   show    each  and   every   motion   in   the   proper 
sequence.  They  eliminate  the  "wrong  way,"  all  experimenting, 
and  the  incompetent  teacher. 
540 

We  do  not  want  any  bricklayer  not  well  acquainted  with 
the  method  and  motions  herein  laid  down  to  waste  either  his 
own  time  or  the  time  of  the  apprentice  teaching  the  latter. 
541 

Now  as  to  the  journeyman  bricklayer,  himself,  we  have  a 
difficult  problem  to  handle.  We  have  found  that  some  brick- 
layers with  good  intentions  cannot  be  made  to  leave  off  their 
old  habits  of  making  a  dozen  or  more  motions  per  brick,  be- 
cause they  have  been  laying  brick  in  that  way  for  many 
years.  Yet,  by  hard  and  continued  work,  with  little  time  spent 
in  resting,  they  are  able  to  do  a  profitable  amount  of  work 

per  day. 
542 

It  is  not  wise  to  interfere  with  this  type  of  man. 
543 

Again,  there  is  the  bricklayer  who  can  adopt  any  method, 
but  who  cannot  get  such  good  results  from  new  methods. 
544 

We  must  have  the  best  work  in  spite  of  all  other  consid- 
erations.    Therefore,  it  is  not  wise  to  have  him  change  from 
the  method  under  which  he  is  most  skillful. 
545 

Another  type,  which  is  the  commonest  of  all,  is  the  man 
who,  unconsciously,  uses  our  method  when  he  is  rushed,  but 
who,  unconsciously,  uses  other  methods  when  he  is  not  rushed. 
546 

It  is  our  intention  to  increase  the  wages  of  those  men 
who  lay  brick  in  the  manner  described  in  this  system,  because 
we  know  that  with  the  usual  amount  of  effort  and  the  same 
number  of  motions  our  method  will  increase  the  number  of 
brick  laid  by  two  or  three  times  the  number  laid  under  un- 
systematic methods. 
547 

We  shall,  therefore,  continue  to  rate  our  bricklayers  by 
classes,  as  follows : 

(a)  Those  who  adapt  themselves  to  this  system.  Men 
of  this  class  shall  receive  a  substantial  increase  above  the 
minimum  rate  of  pay. 


MOTION    STUDY. 


143 


(b)  Those  who  can  adapt  themselves  in  part  to  this  sys- 
tem.    They  will  receive  more  money  than  the  minimum  rate. 

(c)  Those  who  are  not  able  to  adapt  themselves  to  this 
system,  but  who  can,  by  great  and  constant  effort,  accomplish 
a  fair  day's  work.    They  shall  receive  the  minimum  rate. 

(d)  Those  who  do  not  ever  attempt  to  lay  brick  in  ac- 
cordance  with    this    system.     They   shall   be    employed   only 
when  regular  bricklayers  are  scarce. 

548 

To  save  all  the  time  possible,  and  to  do  the  work  with  the 
least  manual  effort,  is  the  purpose  of  the  charts. 
549 

Apprentices  must  be  taught  to  make  up  charts  represent- 
ing their  own  motions. 
550 

They  must  be  permitted  to  use  a  reasonable  amount  of 
time  in  charting  the  times  of  the  operation  of  our  best  brick- 
layers, that  they  may  fully  compare  the  bricklayers'  methods 
with  the  charts  in  this  book,  and  that  they  may  also  see  their 
own  shortcomings,  by  comparison. 


Fig.  113. — Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work-     Fig.   114. — Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing Right  to  Left,    Spreading  ing    Right    to    Left.    Cutting    Off 
Mortar.  Mortar  Before  Brick  Is  Laid. 

551 

Foremen  must  be  careful  to  insist  that  the  rules  here 
given  are  followed  by  our  apprentices.  They  will  not  only 
lay  more  brick  by  following  them,  but  they  will  also  become 
more  valuable  additions  to  our  organization.  They  will  make 
better  foremen  bricklayers  for  us  than  men  with  a  much  wider 
experience  who  have  not  been  carefully  trained  under  our  sys- 
tem. 


144 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


552  The  plan  of  walls  and  the  motion  study  charts  inserted 
below  cover  the  twelve  following  cases  of  bricklaying : 

Plan  I.  Case  i — Pick  and  dip,  overhand,  right  to  left.  For 
actual  motion  studies,  see  Figs.  113,  114,  115  and  116. 

Plan  I.  Case  2 — Pick  and  dip,  overhand,  left  to  right.  See 
Fig.  117. 


Fig.   115.— Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work-    Fig.  116.— Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing Right  to  Left,   Buttering  the  ing    Right    to    Left,    Cutting    Off 
End  of  the  Laid  Brick.  Mortar  After  the  Brick  Is  Laid. 

Plan  I.  Case  3 — Pick  and  dip,  inside,  right  to  left,  illustrat- 
ed in  Figs.  118,  119,  120  and  121. 

Plan  I.  Case  4 — Pick  and  dip,  inside,  left  to  right.  See 
Figs.  6  and  122. 


Fig.  117. — Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work-    Fig.   118. — Interior  Face  Tier,   Work- 
ing Left  to  Right,   Buttering  the  ing   Right   to   Left,   Throwing 
End  of  the  Laid  Brick.  Mortar. 

Plan  II.  Case  5 — Pick  and  dip,  middle  of  wall,  right  to  left. 
Plan  II.  Case  6— Pick  and  dip,  middle  of  wall,  left  to  right. 


MOTION    STUDY. 


Fig.   119. — Interior  Face   Tier,  Work- 
ing Right  to   I  «ft,    Spreading 
Mortar. 


Fig.   120. — Interior  Face  Tier,   Work- 
ing   Right    to    Left.     Cutting    Off 
Mortar  Before   Brick  Is  Laid. 


Fig.   121. — Interior   Face  Tier,   Work- 
ing   Right    to    Left,    Tapping 
Down  Brick. 


Fig.   122.— Interior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing   Left    to    Right,    Cutting    Off 
Mortar  After   Brick    Is    Laid. 


Fig.  123.— Exterior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing Right  to  Left,    Spreading 
Mortar. 


Fig.  124. — Exterior  Face  Tier.  Work. 

ing    Left    to    Right.    Cutting    Off 

Mortar  After  the  Brick  Is  Laid. 


Fig    12."). — Exterior  Face  Tier.  Work- 
ing   Left    to    Right,    Cutting    Off 
Mortar  After  the  Brick  Is  Laid. 


Fig.  12fi. — Exterior  Fare  Tier,  Work- 
ing Left  to   Right.    Buttering  the 
End    of    the    Laid    Brick. 


146 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Fig.   127.— Interior  Face  Tier,  Work-    Fig.   128.— Interior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing Right  to  Left,    Spreading  ing  Left  to  Right,   Spreading 
Mortar.  Mortar. 

Plan  III  Case  7 — Stringing  mortar,  overhand,  right  to  left. 
See  Fig.  123. 

Plan  III.  Case  8 — Stringing  mortar,  overhand,  left  to  right. 
See  Figs.  124,  125  and  126. 

Plan  III.  Case  9 — Stringing  mortar,  inside,  right  to  left. 
See  Figs.  127  and  128. 

Plan  III.  Case  10 — Stringing  mortar,  inside,  left  to  right. 
See  Figs.  129  and  130. 


Fig.   129.— Interior  Face  Tier,  Work-    Fig.   130.— Interior  Face  Tier,  Work- 
ing Right   to   Left,    Throwing  ing  Left  to   Right,   Spreading 
Mortar.  Mortar. 

Plan  IV.  Case  n — Stringing  mortar,  middle  of  wall,  right 
to  left,  with  shove  joints. 


MOTION    STUDY. 


147 


Plan  IV.  Case   12 — Stringing  mortar,  middle  of  wall,  right 
to  left,  with  brick  and  brick  method. 
553 

Chart  No.  I  shows  the  number  of  motions  required  in  the 
process  of  laying  a  face  brick  under  the  old  fashioned  method 
provided  no  two  motions  are  done  simultaneously. 

While  chart  No.  I  shows  about  all  the  defects  of  all  brick- 
layers, it  is  not  probable  that  any  one  first  class  bricklayer 
would  use   all  'of  the   eighteen   operations   as   shown   on  this 
chart. 
554 

Cases  I  to  4. — See  Chart  I.  for  explanation. 
555 

Case  5.  Traveling  Right  to  Left. — Pick  the  brick  nearest 
at  hand,  and  carry  the  brick  and   mortar   in  a  straight  line 
from  the  stock  platform  to  place. 
556 

Deposit  the  brick  in  the  furthest  unfilled  4  ins.,  or  tier,  and 
drop  the  mortar  in  the  next  furthest  4  ins.,  or  tier,  at  exactly 
the  same  time. 
557 

The  momentum  of  the  brick  will  help  to  shove  the  joint 
full  of  mortar. 
558 

On  the  work  in  the  middle  of  the  wall,  never  cut  off  the 
mortar  that  is  pushed  up  above  the  top  of  the  bricks  oftener 
than  every  ten  bricks. 
559 

Deposit  it  in  the  middle  of  the  wall.     It  takes  no  more 
motions  to  cut  off  the  mortar  from  the  top  of  ten  bricks  than 
from  the  top  of  one  brick. 
560 

Case  6.  Traveling  Left  to  Right. — The  brick  and  the 
mortar  should  not  only  be  picked  up  at  the  same  time,  but 
they  must  also  be  deposited  at  the  same  time.  The  old  prac- 
tice of  dropping  first  the  mortar  and  then  the  brick  must  never 
be  used  on  our  work. 
561 

If  the  brick  and  mortar  are  deposited  in  the  same  tier, 
they  can  be  carried  in  almost  a  straight  line  from  stock  plat- 
form to  place,  and  can  be  deposited  at  exactly  the  same  time. 
562 

If  the  brick  is  carried  fast  from  the  stock  pile  to  place,  the 
momentum  will  help  to  shove  the  joint  full  of  mortar. 


148 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


M 

p 

rt 

% 

4-9 

y 

o 

O 

§ 

Sc' 

'Z 

W 

cd 

0 

x; 

f? 

(j 

$'% 

n  8 

*^ 

& 

jl 

1 

cd 

pc 

t 

u 

£ 

- 

ob 

^r 

I 

CO 

"5  c 
£° 

1 

o 

*. 

<u 
^ 

^2 
>> 

^ 

% 

§ 

o 

a" 

H 

JN 

12 

ua 

|S 
«| 

•3 
8 

i 

rt 
0) 

§ 

a 
3 

nd  carr 

Qi    T^ 

a-c 
.tJ^ 

ii  O 

4-5 

M 

! 

s 

|l 

H 

u 

a| 

J3 

8, 

W   ^ 

2 

£ 

|B 

0 

a 

1 

1 

O  -4^ 

T3  « 

0 
H 

o  ^ 

a 

,J 

*O  to 

'i 

«1s 

.s 

u 

rt 

-u 

$ 

o 

G  w. 

_cs 

13 

8 

'O'M 

0 

W   0) 

a 

8-5 

1 

2 

fl-H 

u 

8 

0) 

c 

o 

O  rt 

•ct 

0 

Sv 

n'i 

§ 

M* 

f 

•3  a 

E 

^c 

3 

5! 

.52 

0) 
JQ 

G 

_M 

'o,  *' 

—  E 

§ 

G  (« 

i 

V 

SJ 

H^ 

cn 

II 

w 

ClJ 

.si 

ll 

do 

1^ 

a 

to 
rt 

11 

mortal 

4d 

rt 

,£ 

O 

M 
C 
3 

3 

•^  b 
«et 

o  t 

38 

15 
r  <- 

.2 

a  ° 

* 

I 

*C  >> 

g^ 

^9 

ETHOD.  THE  EXTERIOR  4  INCHE 

ge  of  mortar  box  should  be  plumb  with  in 
lortar  box  should  be  21  in.  from  wall.  Me 

absolutely  necessary  to  reach  mortar  wit 

11 

w  a 

4)   3 

Jf 

.2 

1 

3  stepping  for  brick  will  be  necessary  on  sc 
not  nearer  than  1  ft.  nor  more  than  4  ft. 

the  same  time  that  the  mortar  is  reached 
p.  If  it  is  not  picked  UD  at  the  same  time 

,G 
o    • 

sj 

^^ 

!; 

i» 
f^ 

°  P 

Is 

1 
i! 

|| 

x  c 

•«Jc 

II 

^•c 

ll 

0) 

W 
0) 

0) 

a 
•3 

(U 

1 

0) 

"rt 

1 
O 

'B. 

1 

)  as  to  require  no  additional  spreading  and  s 
;lse  the  next  two  spaces  must  be  filled  out 

the  trowel  properly  no  spreading  and  no 

space  is  not  filled  out.  If  mortar  is  cut 
jr  on  end  of  brick.  Do  not  throw  it  on  me 

Id  still  while  mortar  is  thrown  on  wall.  Whe 
ly  at  every  second  brick.  It  takes  no  longe 

t  can  be  used  to  butter  that  end  of  the  las 
box. 

sistency,  with  no  lumps  in  it,  and  the  righ 
em  run,  no  tapping  with  the  trowel  will  1 

13 
1 

2 

.G     - 

bo  o 

|c 
II 

•s  ° 

tener  than  every  second  brick,  and  when 
L  the  trowel,  and  do  not  make  another  mot 
nt  another  motion. 

O 

o 
0) 

o 

be 

C 

*>> 

CC 
HJ 

>o 

0 
^4 

(J 
^ 
D, 

Q 

Q 
U 

On  the  scaffold  the  inside  ed 
On  floor  the  inside  edge  of  rr 

<u 

1 

c 

rt 

O 

O 

Q 

Provide  mortar  of  right  con 
through.  Keep  tender  on 

If  tubs  are  kept  4  ft.  apart  n 
On  floor  keep  brick  in  a  pile 

Brick  must  be  reached  for  at 
time  the  mortar  is  picked  u 

G  "*"* 

4) 

u-S 

•S« 

fi 

3-2 

Carry  stock  from  the  staging 
or  hitch.  It  is  important  1 

S 

1 

8  . 

.sis 

W    IH 

a  o 

O  rt 

C  a 

PQ 

ii 

IS 

The  mortar  must  be  thrown  sc 
the  previous  brick  laid,  or 

If  the  mortar  is  thrown  from 

If  mortar  is  not  cut  off,  this 
trowel  to  box.  or  else  butt( 

Fill  out  this  space  if  brick  is  he 
out  of  ioints;  cut  this  off  on 

When  this  mortar  is  cut  off  i 
on  the  trowel  back  to  the 

If  the  mortar  is  the  right  con 
possible  without  having  th 

|§ 
+j  rt 

4J.bc 

1 

HI 
!J1 

v  x 

0  Si^ 

o  EfcS 

Q 

Total  number  of  motions  per 

D 

T5 

cr 

_o 

rt 
C 

£              M.*** 

•8 

TJ 

<u 

0) 

H» 

t-,  G 

s  £  •£§'** 

|5 

I'M 

a 

a 

^^ 

Q 

4H 

3^ 

5c 

a 

jj 

a 

*w 



£>-> 

a 

i 

§ 

-*< 

OlfS       O   ^H« 
S           §^ 

O 

O 

o 

r 

o  C 
G'" 

o 

O 

0 

|| 

W 

0 

0' 

O 

bO 

Q 

^ 

,-j 

_; 

VH^-: 

ta 

"o 

0   ^ 

it! 

"S 

te 

'o 

I  •  s^ 

>  >.    o'C^ 

&£  s0.. 

!l 

l| 

•8  " 

a-g 

11 

J» 

15 

-•£ 

o 

l! 

3  "t 

<U  C 

2    IH 
-3    0 

bfl  U 
c  d 

&l 

ting  o 
ortar. 

M  *: 

C  03 
w  ^, 
O  o 

be  ° 

ting  o 
ortar. 

M  i-,' 

C  rt 

st 

0  o 

iC 

f  ,r 

1 

^^ 

"i 

o 

m 

S 

la 

J 

Q 

l§ 

1% 
O 

S^ 

Q 

r 

-H 

S^ 

^s 

Q 

4l 

«  c 

»H 

<M 

•"3 

-*i 

»o 

t~- 

oo 

OS 

o 

•H 

•^ 

TO 

Tti 

«0 

0 

CX3 

o| 

MOTION    STUDY. 


149 


** 

w 

0        ! 

o     i 

S 

O       [ 

J 

rt 

+-1 

3 

— 

c 
rt 

5 

4) 

0 

•5 

1 

S 

a 

1 

0) 

* 

fi 

1^ 

1 

OS 

c 

o 

M 

O 

d 

0 

s  " 

£ 

4 

Q 

4) 
rj 

e 

C 

c 

03 

•S  tj 

| 

U 

oi 

1 

0 

•d 

1 

x 

0)   ^ 

a 

3 

2 

<D 

O 

| 

rQ            1 

n 

"5  n^ 

4> 

-? 

[^ 

5P 

4) 

4)^j  j 

Be 

o 

3 

a 

1 

5^; 

c 

fi 

^^ 

1 

J 

«^ 

c 

^ 
j 

c 

a 

|-c 

o 

-5 

d  1 

"Q 

K 

«! 

rt  ^ 

1 

3 

•^ 

1 

i!s 

4) 

c 

£ 

V- 

l> 

£ 

§13 

<ii 

4) 

« 

o 

4) 

cd 

o  ^ 

+J 

^   ^ 

.^ 

2 

5 

-H  u^ 

Q 

^4 

•^  o 

4) 

£ 

|1 

cd 

3^ 

S£_. 

'o 

0 

,c 

f> 

a 

ed'> 

•^ 

.- 

4> 
C 

3"'c 

t:  L; 

,Q 

^2  c 

o 

13 

a  a 

2 

o 

•g^ 

"2 

«^a 

•a  5 

"o 

ei  '^ 

+J- 

il 

-3 

X 

1  ° 

a 

^£ 

ed  X 

fi 
3 

O  ^ 

0 

|  ' 

c 

0 

+j 

-4-J 

4) 

g 

•H 

tn  :^- 

13 

O 

O  *~ 

d 

Q 

<u  a 

L" 

H 

4) 

4) 

^ 

^Cn 

£H 

^  -^ 

n   n 

fi 

'^   rC 

JH 

-M  -*-> 

' 

y 

_i^   > 

Ctf 

'crt  ^ 

j-H      VH 

O 

C 

T> 

-^  (^ 

"*"* 

c 

J 

S 

11 

i 

«! 

""B 

'll 

1 

fi 

=•£ 

C 

I 

• 

a 

«  rt 

3 

3  c 

•5  ^ 

W 

^•^ 

_r; 

^  d 

•^ 

h- 

3 

0) 

-^  ^ 

s 

""O 

"*"*  r^ 

to 

4)^0 

1^ 

C 

rt 

^rt 

3 

rt 

-M  c 

3 

4J 

cd 

c 

"5  ^ 

3  > 

h 

f 

(. 

H 
W 

3 

X, 

5 

xes  are  too  1 

:t.  apart  and 

!! 

«! 

"c3  "^ 
is  be 

c^ 

sJ 
g 

is 

e 

0 

ll 

nj   ^ 
4)    3 

X     Q 

require  the  1< 

In 

T3 

conveyed  to 
rtar  is  denosi 

si 

O 

x  u 

t£  4J 

3  C 

o  m 

s^ 

t 
t 

f> 

c 

t— 

Q 

^ 

rti 

"*l 

^•° 

*-"  ° 

35 

*-  s 

0 

IS  c 

J*l 

§ 

| 

ll 

3 

o-a 

jf    « 

Is 

fi 

'°l 

i 

'3 

0" 

c3  ^ 

J 

4 

rt 

-*-1 

0.& 

fi    0 

c3 

X  p 

M  g 

S  • 

•-1 

6  -^ 

0   0 

c 

(• 

J 
ll 

a 

til 

>. 

u 

brick  am 
;  farthest 

not  more 

-•x 
^  w 
u 

M  ^ 

3    r 

|! 

^ 

2& 

1 

SI 

| 

4) 
^2 
U 
4) 
> 
4) 
T3 

II 

-g  a 

4J.fi' 

UJ 

C 
O 

0 

^ 

p 

step  is  necessa 

2- 

aS 

C  cti 

•§« 

d^ 

2^ 
d^ 

u 

u 

X 

o 

:  only  selection  < 
.e  exterior  4  ins 

en  conveying  n 
i  the  path.  Ke 

rt 

0 

ii 

|§ 

mortar  must  b< 
e  next  brick  is 

spreading  shoul 

^Si; 

i» 

Si 

o 
3 

f 

c 

« 

1"° 

r^ 

i- 

c   S 

S"J2 

^ 

o 
& 

af 

0)   C 

o 

r 

"s 

u  ." 

TJ 

1 

T) 

-o 

(_ 

•  £P  ^. 

(fl^'*** 

•*-> 

•^      - 

+-> 

13    C^H) 

••-J 

T3  t^ 

4-J 

-4-i 

-*-> 

rO  I>» 

+-> 

'IJ 

-*-* 

•"tn 

*^ 

^ 

•II* 

'a 
o 

'fi 

0 

fi 

|.S 

fi 
D 

1^ 

I5 

e 

0 

a 

o 

'fi 

O 

|.£ 

a 

o 

'fi 

o 

'fi 

O 

O 

'fi 

O 

H 

^    ^ 

M 

c 

^ 

H 

Motions  per 
Brick. 

Jiff 

^1 

Reaching 
for  Mortar. 

Working  up 
Mortar. 

Step 
for  Bn'ck. 

IS 
*° 

^  _^ 

S'S 

2 

j 

t!  o 

0  -^ 

pc 

C° 

£ 

i! 

0  0 

15 

bo 
'S  ^ 

ll 
M 

6  ,• 

6£« 

c  "C 
'£  o 

^s 

O 

Dispos  pg  of 
Mortar. 

o  v; 

at 
•l"° 

Cutting  off  j 
Mortar. 

Disposing  of  1 
Mortar. 

c 

Q 

•E£ 
|| 

C 

o  ^ 

P 

"o 

C   rt 

11 

Q 

ao 

T!  ° 

r 

3^ 

_ 

•M 

n 

«*• 

tn 

•o 

^ 

QO 

05 

0 

^H 

<M 

^5 

S 

10 

1 

5 

GO 

c 

*J 

150 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


) 

[I 

5 

t) 

^ 

0 

f— 

H 

5 

d 

) 

3 

e 

i 

.9 

13 

c 
t 

> 

2 

c 

3 

a 

^ 

2 

> 

3 

ij 

rt 

I— 

^- 

5 

s 

a 

0 

1 

c 

[J 

4 

UJ 

5 

H 

3 

si 

c. 

i 

en 

M 

? 

g 

^ 

h- 

T 

H 

* 

| 

| 

1 

^ 

o 

o 

S 

c 

i 

i 

^4 

,Q 

J 

c 

c 

) 

2 

M 

^ 

a 

| 

3 

& 

3 

6 

j 

J 

bO 

a 

H 

rj 

H 

t 
> 

fi 
p 

i 

i 
j 

O 

C 

ansisten 

a 

w 

u 

a 

o 

a 
3 

3 

^  motio 

Q 

1 

o 

o 

P 

H 

^3 

G 

o 

H 

II 

D 

e 

H 

O 

^ 

H-* 

c 

U 

g 

G 

1 

H* 

^ 

U 

o 

T3 

c 

3 

<^-i 

D 

cfl 

£ 

y 

2 

rt 

c 

3 

^H 

^ 

• 

3 

^* 

3 

^ 

5 
f 
p 

3 
j 

$ 
O 

a 

t3 

u 

cr 
<u 

a 

a 

a 

^4 

y 

•c 

^ 

p 
1 

H 

^ 
<J 

H 

mortar  e 

e  mortal 

not  ove 

y 
C 

S 

motion 

3 

0 

y 

C 

^2 

^s 
1 

"2 

rt 

1 

pq 

0) 

a 
in 

c 

p 

.. 

en 

M 

£ 

<s 

HN 

<2 

0 

,D 

0 

C 

^ 

5 

H 

i 

a 

0> 

a 

<u 

IH 

•0 

0 

1-1 

1 

o 

c 

5 

•JJ 

X 

_§ 

3 

g 

r] 

S 

.5 

cfl 

"o 

o 

1 

5 
3 

o 

0 

rO 

o 

a 

si 

0 

| 

0 

1 

1 

1 

5 
4 

i 

cfl 

| 

.1 

M 
S 
g 

U) 

£? 

o 

0) 

a 
s 

t 

0 

5 

I 

01 

K 

<u 

Convey 

1 

pq 

I 

Q 

1 

a 

02 

1 

o 
Q 

i 

pq 

13 
o 

p 

Motions 
per  Brick. 
t  *  '  f  S 

i 

H, 

'a 

0 

Omit. 

* 

a 

0 

^ 

HN 

H, 

H. 

L  Omit. 

i 

U5 

•d 

« 

* 

a 

o 

Omit. 

'a 

o 

3T 

M 

{i 

a  .^ 
q.y 

ri 

«^ 

VH 

§3 

p 

^^ 

Working  up 
Mortar. 

W 

^ 

jl 

i    tj 

a'C 
y  -ij 

.1! 

S  X 

c 

PP 

y 

1 

P 

'(/)  C 

15 

M 

i! 

02 

»». 

b£  n 

I1 

'o 

•S| 

t/5  )S 

Q 

S 

Cutting  off 
Mortar. 

I  Disposing  ot 
Mortar. 

c 
£ 

1 

a 
a 

|  Cutting  off 
Mortar. 

Disposing  of 
Mortar. 

GO 

a 

1 

6 
2 

-  H 

^H 

•M 

CO 

* 

« 

e 

t. 

00 

OJ 

0 

jH 

(M 

CO 

3 

2 

S 

t- 

00 

MOTION    STUDY. 


5 

i 

1 

j 

5 

^ 

0 

K 

£ 

4 

2, 

fl 

<u 

' 

i, 

0 

D 

_d 
to 

ij 

•^  >. 

. 

—  rt 

s) 

0 

^  S 

C 

J 

£ 

Cj    <D 

i 

OJ 

0    (LI 

u 

r^ 

Ci. 

a  ^ 

E 

H 

CJ 

1 

G 

0 

|| 

(H 

"o 

^  "" 

d 

H. 

d 

5^ 

-i 

c 
.2 

1 

-H 

6f 

o 

^ 

j^ 

j-i  O 

k; 

^ 

g 

^ 

VH 

_^- 

2 

o  c 

H-* 

o 

d. 

u 

o 

T"    ^ 

aj 

1! 

'5 

c 

"C 

a 

-0   <L> 

^ 

o 

.2 

o 

U   K> 

^ 

6 

OJ 

o 

w 

-g 

5^ 

D 

*-" 

c 

s 

C 

0 

C  rt 

f 

5 

nj 

^0 

"'•* 

o 

*"" 

VH     ^ 

j 

ri 

q 

0) 

0 

0 

z; 

o 

6 

c 

g 

,Q 

0^ 

3 

'C 

!_, 

T 

0 
c« 

II 

3 

"5*^ 

^ 

3 

^ 

'SI 

c 

^*  c 

_ 

•5 

^ 

•^ 

cS 
r; 

_0 

-c'5 

C 

Q 

^ 

x 

^ 

5 

^  " 

| 

o3 

_0 

s 

0 

c 

m  C 

o 

"-> 

•^ 

•^   C 

c 

^ 

Q 

y 

i£ 

ii  rt 

1) 

U 

m 

o 

.H 

03 

_fl 

rt 

_fe 

Sj 

i)    U 

•^ 

•J^ 

u 

^C  'C 

O 

c 

^O 

j-j 

^ 

•*-*  ^D 

s 

O 

cH" 

S 

-f  - 

t^ 

OC 

£ 

W.X 

c! 

n 

^ 

o'C**" 

lr 

1 

g 

0 

g 

0 

IN 

g 

O 

-+• 

-1" 

1 

•** 

a 

O 

a 

o 

1 

c 

a 

o 

a 

0 

a 

0 

g 

0 

a 
o 

••< 

I 

H 

c  <•>«*» 

I5. 

J 

as 

Reaching 
for  Mortar. 

•Sw§ 

1 

j| 

1 

Mortar, 
Box  to  Wall.  | 

15 

1? 

S 

^  ^-.' 

to 

0  ^ 

O 

Disposing  of 
Mortar. 

Laying  Brick 
on  Mortar. 

il 

Disposing  of  1 
Mortar. 

o 

o  ^ 

c  t 

'+3  O 
0 

Disposing  of 
I  Mortar. 

oo 

fi 

6 
g 

ro 

, 

50 

. 

X) 

35 

s 

<N 

2 

1C 

22 

c 

g 

^ 

^^ 

1 

0 

.2 

152 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


.JO 

•£: 


.§> 


MOT10X    STUDY. 


154 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


MOTION    STUDY.  i$* 

563 

Cases  7  to  10.     See  Chart  III.  for  explanation. 
564 

Case  ii.  Traveling  Right  to  Left. — Pick  up  the  two  near- 
est brick  on  the  scaffold,  and  carry  them  to  place  in  as  nearly 
a  straight  line  as  possible.  Deposit  them  at  exactly  the  same 

time  in  different  tiers. 
565 

Case  12.  Traveling  Right  to  Left. — On  work  where  un- 
filled vertical  joints  in  the  middle  of  the  wall  are  desirable 
and  on  work  that  is  to  be  grouted,  pick  up  the  two  nearest 
brick,  carry  them  toward  place,  and  when  they  are  about  a 
foot  from  place  put  them  together  in  the  air.  Then  deposit 
them  in  the  same  tier.  This  makes  the  air  space  between  them 
as  small  as  possible,  and  saves  time. 
566 

You   cannot  deposit  them   at  the   same   instant   and   get 
shove  joints  full  of  mortar,  unless  they  are  in  different  tiers. 
567 

The  following  rules  are  made  on  the  supposition  that  the 

work  is  being  done  from  the  Gilbreth  scaffolds.     When  it  is 
done  on  the  floor,  or  from  other  kinds  of  scaffolds,  the  work 
should  be  done  as  nearly  as  is  possible   in   accordance  with 
these  rules. 
568 

Stepping  for  mortar  (i)  and  reaching  for  mortar  (2)  must 
be  done  exactly  at  the  same  time. 
569 

The  same  is  true  of  stepping  for  brick   (4)   and  reaching 
for  brick  (5). 
570 

The  apprentice  must  make  it  a  point  to  stand  where  he 
can  pick  up  his  stock  with  both  hands  at  the  same  instant  with 
the  least  effort. 
571 

After  he  has  found  that  spot  on  the  bricklayers' 
platform  where  each  foot  should  be,  he  must  stand 
there  without  stepping,  and  lay  as  far  as  possible  in  each  di- 
rection, without  making  a  step  or  lifting  either  shoe  complete- 
ly off  the  platform. 
572 

We  find,  after  many  years  of  actual  practice,  that  if 
the  scaffold  horses  are  set  up  anywhere  from  10  ft. 


156  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

to  10  ft.  6  ins.  apart,  and  if  two  mortar  boxes,  each  2  ft. 
2  ins.  wide,  are  placed  in  each  bay,  one  of  them  being 
hard  against  the  left  hand  upright  and  the  other  divided 
evenly  between  that  box  and  the  right  hand  upright,  then  the 
bricklayer  can  stand  on  any  part  of  the  bricklayers'  platform 

and  reach  into  a  mortar  box  and  also  reach  the  brick  pile. 
573 

If  the  horses  and  mortar  boxes  are  spaced  as  stated  above, 
operations  numbers  I  and  4  can  be  omitted. 
574 

We  have  found  that  I  ft.  5  ins.  is  the  shortest  distance 
that  the  bricklayer  can  work  in  comfortably.  Consequently, 
we  have  designed  the  patent  horse  so  that  when  the  foot  is 
butted  against  the  wall,  the  edge  of  the  stock  platform  is  ex- 
actly I  ft.  5  ins.  away  from  the  wall. 
575 

We  have  also  found  that  the  bricklayer  picks  up  his  stock 
with  the  least  fatigue  from  a  platform  2  ft.  above  the  level  on 
which  he  stands.  The  same  is  true  of  the  height  of  the  wall 
on  which  he  lays  the  brick.  We  have  consequently  made  the 
stock  platform  2  ft.  higher  than  the  bricklayers'  platform. 
We  have  arranged  the  lifting  jacks  to  work  on  8-in.  notches, 
so  that  the  stock  platform  and  the  top  oi  the  wall  will  be  at 
the  same  level.  This  is  the  most  convenient  and  comfortable 
arrangement  for  the  bricklayer.  It  cuts  down  the  distance  for 
reaching  for  mortar  (2),  reaching  for  brick  (5),  conveying  the 
brick  from  the  staging  to  the  wall  (8),  and  conveying  the 
mortar  from  the  staging  to  the  wall  (7). 
576 

The  bricklayer  should  always  pick  up  those  brick  first 

that  are  on  the  side  of  the  stock  platform  that  is  nearest  the 

wall. 
577 

He   should   pick   up   the    mortar   from   that   part  of   the 
box  that  is  nearest  the  wall,  in  order  to  reduce  the  conveying 

distance. 
578 

He   should   use   the   stock  that  is   far   away  only   when 

he  has  none  near  the  wall. 
579 

Working  up  the  mortar  with  the  trowel    (3)   should  be 
dispensed  with  by  having  a  tender  on  the  stock  platform  with 


MOTION    STUDY. 


157 


a  water  bucket  and  hoe  (see  Fig.  88)  to  keep  the  mortar  at  the 

right  consistency  for  the  speediest  bricklaying. 

580 

Even  with  a  small  number  of  masons,  it  pays  to  put  a 
tender  on  the  stock  platform.  He  can  not  only  temper  up 
the  mortar,  but  he  can  devote  any  spare  time  to  piling  up  the 
brick  on  the  inside  of  the  stock  platform  with  their  faces  up, 
so  that  the  time  of  picking  out  the  right  brick  (6),  can  be 
reduced  to  almost  nothing. 
581 

The  time  needed  to  convey  the  mortar  from  the  staging 
to  the  wall    (7),  depends  not  only  on  the  distance  that  the 


Fig.   131. — Spreading  Mortar  with  One  Motion. 

mortar  box  is  from  the  wall,  but  also  on  the  amount  of  mortar 
that  is  taken  at  each  trowelfnl.  This  is  one  of  the  points  where 
the    stringing    mortar    method    outclasses    the    pick    and    dip 
method  for  speed. 
582 

Spreading  mortar  (10)  should  never  require  over  one  mo- 
tion per  brick.  (See  Figs.  113,  119  and  131.)  In  most  cases 
of  common  brick  work,  the  mortar  should  be  thrown  from  the 
trowel  so  as  to  require  no  further  spreading.  See  Figs.  6  and  7. 
583 

The  apprentice  who  spreads  his  mortar  with  two  or 
more  motions,  or  strokes  of  the  trowel,  should  be 
watched  carefully.  He  should  be  made  to  count  the  mo- 
tions that  he  makes  in  laying  each  brick,  until  he  is  able  to 
lay  brick  in  the  manner  and  with  the  same  number  of  motions 
laid  down  in  this  svstcm. 


158  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

584 

Cutting  off  the  mortar  that  projects  over  the  edge  of  the 
wall  before  the  brick  is  laid  (n),  is  entirely  unnecessary.  (See 
Figs.  114  and  120.)     This  should  never  be  done  on  common 
brick  work. 
585 

Cutting  off  mortar  after  the  brick  is  rubbed  into  the  mor- 
tar (14)  will  furnish  the  mortar  for  the  next  end  joint.     (See 
Figs.  116,  122,  124  and  125.) 
586 

Buttering  the  end  joint  (12)  should  be  omitted  at  process 
(n),  and  should  be  done  only  at  process  (14).  (See  Figs.  115, 
117,  126  and  132.) 


Fig.  132.— Buttering  the  End  of  the  Brick  in  Hand. 


587 


Rubbing  the  brick  into  the  mortar  (13)  will  require  al- 
most no  time  or  effort,  certainly  not  over  one-half  a  second, 
provided  the  joints  are  the  right  thickness  and  the  brick  are 
properly  wet.  (See  Figs.  116  and  122.) 


588 

Foremen  must,  therefore,  see  that  the  brick  are  constantly 
kept  at  the  right  degree  of  wetness,  not  only  to  insure  good 
work  but  also  for  speed. 
589 

The  foreman  must  personally  lay  out  the  story  pole  for 
those  heights  of  laying  that  will  make  the  most  speed  as  well 
as  the  best  work. 
590 

Mortar  on  the  trowel  that  is  cut  off  from  under  the  brick 
should  be  put  on  the  end  of  the  brick  previously  laid,  for  filling 


MOTION    STUDY.  159 

the  end  joint.     (See  Figs.  115,  117  and  126.)     It  should  never 

be  thrown  from  the  trowel  back  into  the  mortar  box. 

591 

Many  masons  have  the  habit  of  constantly  throwing  the 
mortar  back  into  the  box.     A  large  portion  of  this  daubs  up 
the  bricks  instead  of  landing  in  the  box ;  besides,  it  means  an 
unnecessary  motion  every  time. 
592 

Tapping  brick  down  to  grade  with  the  trowel  should  not 
be  necessary,  if  the  mortar  is  of  the  right  consistency,  the 
brick  is  wet  enough  and  the  joints  are  the  right  size ;  but  if  a 
tapping  is  necessary,  tap  the  brick  one  hard  tap,  instead  of 
several  light  taps.  (See  Fig.  121.)  This  reduces  the  opera- 
tion of  tapping  to  one  motion  of  not  over  one-half  second. 
593 

Nearly  all  bricklayers  tap  the  brick  from  habit,  not  be- 
cause it  is  necessary. 
594 

These  charts  of  each  case   should  be  used  as   examples 
by  apprentices  as  to  the  methods  they  should  first  learn  and 
which  motions  they  should  use  also  as  the  total  of  motions 
for  each  process. 
595 

After  the  apprentice  has  learned  the  twelve  different 
processes  exactly  as  shown,  he  should  be  permitted 
to  practice  any  other  method  that  will  accomplish  the  same 
quality  of  work  in  the  same  amount  of  time,  as  there  are  many 
different  ways  of  laying  brick. 
596 

In  filling  in  the  middle  of  a  wall  it  is  always  quicker  to 
lay  those  brick  nearest  the  overhand  side  first  and  those  near- 
est the  inside  face  last.  This  order  will  allow  the  carrying  of 
the  brick  from  the  stock  platform  to  the  wall  with  the  most 
uniform  speed,  without  a  hitch  or  a  change  of  direction  of  the 
motion. 
597 

Close  watching  of  bricklayers  will  disclose  the  remarkable 
fact  that  years  of  constantly  training  the  left  hand  to  tell  by 
feeling  the  top  side  from  the  bottom  side  of  a  brick,  forms  the 
habit  of  turning  a  brick  over  in  the  hand  so  as  to  have  it  right 
side  up,  even  if  it  is  being  laid  in  the  filling  tiers.  Few  brick- 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

layers  realize  that  they  do  this,  as  it  has  become  automatic 

with  them  to  do  it  for  the  face  tiers. 

598 

When  seen  to  do  this  while  laying  on  the  filling  tiers,  they 
should  receive  a  few  reminders  that  they  are  not  to  do  so,  as  it 
requires  just  so  many  more  unnecessary  motions  and  fatigues 
them  for  no  purpose,  making  them  require  just  so  much  more 
rest. 
599 

Teach  them  to  make  absolutely  no  motions  and  to  have 
their  hands  travel  no  distance  that  does  not  give  results. 
600 

In  the  selection  of  these  methods  as  adopted  here  for  the 
training  of  our  young  men,  we  have  followed  the  best  of  the 
working  methods  of  the  men  in  our  organization — which  con- 
sist of  bricklayers  from  many  different  nations,  who  have 
adapted  themselves  to  the  different  conditions  existing  in 
various  parts  of  the  United  States. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

METHODS  OF  LAYING  BRICK  UNDER  SPECIAL 
CONDITIONS. 

601 

When  laying  brick  in  freezing  weather,  keep  the  brick  as 
dry  as  possible.     Heat  the  brick  clear  through. 
602 

L^se  mortar  made  hot  by  the  use  of  hot  water  and 
hot  sand  but  do  not  use  hot  lime  mortar  made'  hot  by  the 
slaking  of  the  lime,  for  hot  lime  is  not  completely  slaked  and 
if  used  will  continue  to  slake  and  disturb  the  cement  after 

it  has  commenced  to  set  and  decrease  or  ruin  its  strength. 
603 

Use  sharp  coarse  sand.  Do  not  fill  the  side  joints  any  more 
than  is  absolutely  necessary,  but  slush  the  top  course  of  the 
wall  solid  before  quitting  time,  to  keep  out  rain  and  snow. 

Keep  the  wall  backed  up  solid  all  the  time. 
604 

Keep  the  wall  covered  nights,  not  only  so  that  the  top  of 
the  wall  will  be  kept  dry,  but  also  so  that  the  water  running 
off  the  cover  of  the  wall  will  not  drip  down  on  the  face  of  the 
wall. 
605 

In  very  cold  weather,  the  bricks  and  mortar  should  be  re- 
heated around  a  salamander  on  the  scaffold. 
606 

Special  care   must  be  taken  to  brace  work  laid   in  cold 

weather. 
607 

If  two  kinds  of  brick  are  on  the  same  wall,  it  will  generally 

heave  toward  the  side  of  the  thinnest  joints. 
608 

If  the  sun  snines  on  one  side  and  it  is  freezing  on  the 

other,  it  will  heave  toward  the  sun. 
609 

The  covering  must  not  only  be  water  tight,  but  must  also 
be  made  so  that  the  snow  will  not  blow  in  on  top  of  wall. 
After  every  snow  storm,  tops  of  walls,  sills,  projections  and 

161 


162  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

scaffolds  must  be  swept  off  clean,  or  snow  will  melt  and  run 

into  the  wall. 

610 

In  cold  weather  salt  may  be  used  in  small  quantities  in  the 
mortar,  but  it  is  better  to  get  along  without  it  if  possible.  It 
will  make  more  efflorescence  on  the  surface  of  the  face  brick 
when  the  work  dries  out,  and  it  keeps  the  mortar  damp  for  a 
much  longer  time  than  it  would  be  without  it. 
611 

When  bricks  are  laid  on  a  curved  vertical   surface,  the 
bricks  must  always  be  laid  with  a  heavy  roll  to  look  right,  but 
there  is  never  any  excuse  for  lipping  brick. 
612 

The  correct  amount  of  roll  can  be  determined  by  putting 
the  lower  corners  1-32  in.  inside  the  line  of  the  brick  directly 
under  those  corners  of  the  ashlar  line,  and  the  center  of  the 
top  edge  1-32  in.  outside  the  ashlar  line. 
613 

If  the  curve  is  of  so  short  radius  that  the  two  upper  cor- 
ners of  the  brick  project  so  far  as  to  look  badly,  then  the  brick 
must  be  shortened  until  each  stretcher  is  made  short  enough 
to  reduce  the  fault  or  else  Flemish  bond  or  Flemish  spiral  bond 
must  be  used. 
614 

This  latter  will  also  reduce  the  amount  that  any  part  of 
any  brick  is  in  or  out  from  the  ashlar  line. 
615 

All  brick  work  below  ground  must  be  laid  without  over- 
hanging lips  or  corbels,  or  the  frost  will  get  a  hold  on  them 
and  heave  the  brick  work. 
616 

When  building  a  wall  up  against  the  wall  of  an  adjoining 
property,  have  the  face  of  the  wall  of  the  next  property  sur- 
veyed to  determine  the  exact  building  line  of  the  wall  of  your 
building. 
617 

If  the  wall  of  the  abutter  overhangs  or  encroaches  on  our 
job,  notify  the  owner.  If  it  is  clear  and  sets  back  from  our 
job,  be  careful  not  to  encroach.  Build  the  exterior  property 
line  face  in  a  manner  that  will  show  good  work  and  a  good  face 
in  case  it  is  ever  exposed  by  the  razing  of  the  adjoining  wall. 


METHODS   OF   LAYING   BRICK.  ^3 

618 

If  you  should  follow  the  lines  of  the  wall  of  the  next  prop- 
erty and  encroach,  the  owner  of  our  job  may  be  obliged  to 
cut  off  or  take  down  his  wall  when  a  new  building  is  built 

from  a  correct  survey  on  the  adjoining  lot. 
619 

If  any  one  orders  you  to  follow  any  other  line  than  that 
shown  on  the  drawings,  you  must  receive  orders  in  writing 
before  proceeding  with  the  work. 
620 

Few  bricklayers  know  how  to  lay  fire  brick  on  surfaces 
that  will  be  exposed  to  long  continued  high  temperatures. 
621 

Engineers  who  have  to  construct  ovens  and  furnaces  in- 
variably secure  the  services  of  a  superintendent  who  has  an 
established  record  for  good  work  in  this  line. 
622 

But  it  is  possible  for  any  bricklayer  who  will  follow  direc- 
tions to  do  the  work.     The  secret  of  success  is  simply  to  have 
close  joints  between  the  bricks. 
623 

The  brick  must  be  kept  in  a  tub  of  water,  under  water, 

until  they  are  laid  in  the  wall. 
624 

The  mortar,  regardless  of  what  it  is  made,  must  be  as  soft 
as  a  thick  soup.     Reground  second  hand  fire  brick  of  good 
quality  that  have  been  taken  out  of  a  furnace  lining  makes  the 
most  reliable  fire  resisting  mortar. 
625 

Do  not  lay  the  brick  with  a  trowel. 
626 

Reach  down  into  the  water  and  pick  up  a  brick. 
627 

Dip  the  brick  immediately  down  into  the  mortar,  so  that 
its  bottom  and  one  end  will  be  coated  with  a  thin  soft  layer  of 
mortar. 
628 

Lay  the  brick  with  a  hammer  instead  of  a  trowel. 
629 

The  main  object  is  to  lay  the  brick  with  the  thinnest  pos- 
sible joint. 
630 

No  mortar  at  all  is  much  better  than  a  large  joint. 


1 64  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

631 

Never  mind  how  much  mortar  runs  down  onto  the  face 
of  the  work;  never  mind  how  much  mortar  runs  out  of  the 
joints ;  never  mind  if  the  work  is  not  level. 
632 

Keep  the  joints  as  close  as  possible. 
633 

The  mortar  should  be  so  soft,  the  bricks  so  wet,  and  the 

joints  so  tight,  that  five  courses  of  brick  should  measure  no 

more  when  laid  up  in  the  wall  than  when  stacked  up  dry. 
634 

A  hot  fire  must  not  be  built  against  fire  brick  that  are  not 
perfectly  dry,  otherwise  the  brick  will  be  severely  injured  by 
the  steam  in  them. 
635 

The  fire  brick  must  have  ample  time  to   dry  out  thor- 
oughly before  heating  up.    If  this  is  not  possible  it  is  far  bettei 
to  lay  them  dry  instead  of  wet. 
636 

By  what  is  said  above  it  is  not  meant  that  a  trowel  will 
not  be  used  at  all.  After  a  course  of  brick  have  been  laid  with 
a  hammer,  there  will  undoubtedly  be  some  end  and  side  joints 
that  can  be  slushed  full  with  a  trowel,  but  the  trowel  should 
not  be  used  at  all  during  the  process  of  laying  the  brick. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

FINISHING,  JOINTING  AND  POINTING. 
637 

All  bricklayers  must  be  told  how  the  wall  is  going  to  be 

finished. 
638 

Inform     the     bricklayer     whether     the     wall     is     to     be 
(a)  plastered  directly  upon  its  surface,  (b)  furred,  lathed  and 
plastered,    (c)    painted,    (d)   whitewashed,   or   (e)    left  as  the 
bricklayer  leaves  it. 
639 

This  will  prevent  the  bricklayer  from  doing  unnecessary 
work  and  will  also  enable  him  to  lay  stress  on  that  class  of 
workmanship  that  is  best  suited  for  the  purposes  of  the  par- 
ticular finish  used. 


Fig.  133.— Two  Man  Straight  Edge  for  Jointing. 

640 

For  example : 

(a)  If  the  plaster  is  applied  directly,  the  joints  must  be 
left  ragged  and  raked  out  deep. 

(b)  If  the  wall  is  to  be  furred,  no  jointing  nor  striking  is 
necessary,  smoky  brick  can  be  laid  on  the  face.  Provision  for 
nailing  must  be  made. 

(c)  If  the  wall  is  to  be  painted,  work  should  be  jointed 
or  struck,  not  only  for  looks,  but  also  to  collect  the  minimum 
amount  of  dust.     All  holes  and  pits  in  either  brick  or  joints 
must  be  thoroughly  filled  with  mortar. 

165 


1 66  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

(d)     If  the  wall  is  to  be  whitewashed,  the  whitewash  can 
be  put  on  thick  enough  to  fill  all  pits,  Jointing  and  striking 
are  not  so  necessary. 
641 

All  jointing  must  be  done  in  the  following  manner:    The 
joint  must  first  be  smoothed  so  as  to  remove  any  distinct  line 
where  the  edge  of  the  brick  leaves  off,  and  where  the  mortar 
of  the  joint  begins. 
642 

After  the  joint  has  been  made  smooth  and  flush  with  the 
face  of  the  brick,  the  joint  must  be  rubbed  with  a  jointer  close 
to  the  top  of  the  edge  of  the  brick. 


Fig.   134.— One  Man   Straight  Edge   for   Jointing. 

643 

The  jointer  must  be  used  with  a  straightedge  about  8  ft. 
long,  %  in.  thick,  and  3  ins.  wide,  preferably  used  by  two  men 
at  the  same  time.     (See  Figs.  133  and  134.) 
644 

The  jointer  must  make  only  a  slight  impression  in  the 
mortar,  and  must  not  be  pushed  in  to  a  point  where  it  discloses 
the  variation  in  thickness  of  the  joint,  unless  called  for  in  the 
specifications. 
645 

A  straightedge  must  always  be  used  for  the  reason  that 
it  not  only  makes  better  appearing  work,  but  the  work  is 
much  cheaper  to  do.  The  straightedge,  of  course,  is  not  used 
for  the  vertical  joints.  These  should  be  ruled  even  less  deep 
than  the  horizontal  joints.  Always  complete  the  vertical  joint- 
ing before  ruling  the  horizontal  joint. 


FINISHING,   JOINTING    AND    POINTING. 


167 


646 


The  finish  of  the  joints  on  the  exterior  face  varies  under 
different  conditions. 
647 

Figure    135  shows  the  seven   most   common   methods   of 

finishing-  joints. 

(A)  A  joint  made  in  this  manner  will  appear  smaller 
than  it  really  is.  Where  the  mortar  is  not  noticeably  different 
in  color  from  the  color  of  the  brick,  this  is  probably  the  best 
way  of  hiding  the  inaccuracies  of  thickness  of  the  different 
brirk  in  the  same  course. 


Fig.    135. — Method   of   Finishing  Joints. 

(B)  This  finish  is  similar  to  finish  (A),  except  that  it  is 
deeper  and  makes  the  joint  look  much  wider  than  does  fin- 
ish (A). 

(C)  This  style  of  finish  is  made  by  holding  the  handle 
of  the  trowel  down  below  the  joint,  and  smoothing  the  joint 
down  with  the  blade  of  the  trowel.     It  is  supposed  to  shed 
the  rain    much  better  than   finish    (D),  but   in   practice  it  is 
probably  but  little  better  than  any  of  the  other  finishes,  espe- 
cially when  plenty  of  good  Portland  cement  is   used  in  the 
mortar.  The  main  objection  to  this  method  of  finishing  is  that 
it  takes  the  eye  away  from  the  top  edge  of  the  courses  of  brick, 
which  are  the  real  straight  lines,  hides  the  accuracy  of  these 
lines,  and  exposes  and  exaggerates  the  inaccurate  lower  edges 
of  the  bricks  of  different  thickness,  by  accenting  their  shad- 
ows on  the  sloping  surface  of  the  joint. 

(D)  This  style  of  finish  is  made  by  smoothing  up  the 
surface  of  the  joint  while  holding  the  handle  of  the  trowel 


1 68  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

up  above  the  joint.  Theoretically,  this  finish  does  not  shed  the 
water  as  well  as  does  finish  (C),  but  it  requires  less  skill  to 
make,  and  it  hides  the  uneven  lower  edges  and  accents  the 
straight  and  even  top  edges  of  the  brick,  as  it  leaves  no  shadows 
at  all. 

(E)  This  finish  is  made  by  a  half  round  jointer.     This 
method  of  finishing  can  be  done  quicker  than  either   (A)  or 
(B),  but  it  does  not  look  so  well  for  most  work. 

(F)  This   style   of   finishing   is   used   with   coarse   sand 
where   certain  textures  of  wall   surfaces   are  required.     The 
effect  is  secured  by  giving  the  brick  a  tap  with  the  trowel 
after  the  mortar  has  been  cut  off. 

(G)  This  method  of  finishing  is  used  where   wide  joint 
effects  are  desired.    The  work  is  done  with  a  jointer.    For  the 
best  effects,  it  should  be  done  exactly  as  shown,  i.  e.,  with 
the  jointer  resting  on  the  top  edge  of  the  brick  and  with  the 
projecting  mortar  hiding  the  lower  edge  of  the  brick. 

648 

When  brickwork  is  painted  and  striped  to  represent  the 
joints,  the  best  results  can  be  obtained  by  locating  the  stripe 
on  the  face  of  the  brick  adjoining  the  top  edge  to  represent 
the  horizontal  joints,  and  on  the  face  of  the  brick  adjoining  the 
end  of  the  brick  to  represent  the  end  joints. 
649 

If  the  striping  is  done  as  directed,  the  inaccuracies  of  the 
wall  will  apparently  be  decreased.     If  the  stripe  is  located  on 
the  mortar  joints,  the  roughness  of  the  workmanship  of  the 
wall  will  apparently  be  increased. 
650 

The  following  process  must  be  followed  when  pointing 
brick  work : 

(a)  Drench  thoroughly  with  a  hose  for  several  minutes 
until  the  brick  and  mortar  will  not  soak  up  any  more  water. 

(b)  Apply   strong   muriatic   acid   until   the   particles   of 
sand  and  the  surfaces  of  the  brick  are  cleaned  of  cement. 

(c)  Wash  thoroughly  with  a  hose  under  high  pressure 
until  all  traces  of  the  acid  have  been  washed  off. 

(d)  Rub  in  a  very  thin  layer,  of  neat  Portland  cement  in- 
to the  surfaces  of  the  sand  and  brick. 

(e)  Immediately  put  in  the  new  pointing.    This  process 
will  make  new  pointing  adhere  to  old  as  firmly  as  if  all  were 


FINISHING,    JOINTING    AXD    POINTING.  169 

put  in  at  one  time,  as  is  proved  by  many  pieces  of  work  that 

have  stood  the  test  for  fifteen  years. 

651 

The  entire  secret  lies  in  getting  absolutely  clean  surfaces 
of  sand  or  brick  or  stone  to  adhere  to  and  these  clean  portions 
act  as  dowels  between  the  old  work  and  the  new. 
652 

Care  must  be  taken,  when  using  acid,  to  keep  ropes  away 

1'rom  it  or  its  fumes,  as  a  few  drops  of  the  acid  will  ruin  their 

strength. 
653 

Keep    falls    out   from    under   the    staging,    or    they    may 
be  injured  by  the  acid  and  the  workmen  may  get  hurt. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

ARCHES    AND    CHIMNEY   BREASTS. 
654 

The  cutting  of  brick  arches  in  the  shanty  on  wet  dayj 
should  be  used  as  a  reward  to  the  most  faithful  bricklayers, 
and  those  who  have  operated  most  nearly  in  accordance  with 
this  system  even  if  it  is  not  more  economical  than  cutting  the 
arches  on  the  scaffold. 
655 

Make   the    detail    so   as   to   require   the   least   amount   of 
cutting  possible  on  each  brick. 
656 

Where  there  are  a  large  number  of  arches  to  be  cut  to 
the  same   pattern,  it  will  be  found   economical  to  make   the 
pattern  out  of  sheet  metal  instead  of  paper. 
657 

All  brick  work  to  be  cut  should  be  laid  out  on  stiff  thick 
paper  by  the  foreman.     After  it  is  laid  out,  with  what  rep- 
resents each  brick  numbered  and  tacked  to  a  board,  the  joints 
should  be  cut  out  with  a  sharp  knife. 
658 

These  boards,  with  each  paper  brick  nailed  in  place, 
should  then  be  given  to  the  bricklayers,  who  should  draw  the 
tacks,  mark  out  the  shape  of  each  paper  on  a  brick,  num- 
ber the  brrek  the  same  as  the  paper  pattern,  and  then  tack  the 
pattern  back  on  the  board. 
659 

The  brick,  as  fast  as  they  are  cut,  should  be  laid  on  the 

floor  face  up. 
660 

When  the.  arch  is  completed,  it  should  be  packed  carefully 
in  hay  or  straw  into  a  box  or  barrel. 
661 

The  barrel  should  be  marked  with  the  name  of  the  brick- 
layer, the  number  of  the  arch,  and  the  time  it  took  to  cut  it. 
662 

Do  not  have  anyone  but  a  foreman  or  a  first  class  brick- 

170 


ARCHES    AND    CHIMNEY    BREASTS.  171 

layer  lay  out  the  arch  on  paper,  or  the  arch  will  cost  more 

done  this  way  than  cut  on  the  scaffold. 

663 

Do  not  pack  more  than  one  arch  in  one  barrel,  or  the  cost 
of  sorting  the  brick  will  be  excessive. 
664 

Do  not  take  the  brick  out  of  the  barrel  until  the  barrel 
has  been  placed  near  the  place  where  the  arch  is  to  be  laid. 

Have  the  bricklayer  who  cut  the  arch  lay  it. 
665 

The  foreman  mason  must  write  on  the  blue  prints  of  the 
elevations  the  names  of  the  bricklayers  on  the  various  portions 
of  the  work  that  they  build.  This  will  enable  the  foreman  to 
locate  the  blame  for  a  soffit  that  looks  badly  when  the  center 
is  taken  dowrn. 
666 

The  moral  effect  is  also  in  the  interest  of  good  work. 
667 

Extra   speed   also   can   be   obtained   by   letting  the  brick- 
layer know  that  his  name  and  the  hours  and  minutes  it  took 
him  to  build  this  arch  are  written  down  on  the  blue  print. 
668 

The  greatest  amount  of  labor  on  cutting  a  straight  arch 
is  expended  on  the  soffit  or  bottom  face. 
669 

An  arch  straight  on  top  and  curved  underneath,  requires 
no  cutting  of  the  surface  underneath.     It  must  simply  be  split 

off  to  a  line,  to  the  right  thickness. 
670 

This  requires  very  little  labor,  and  the  natural  surface  of 
the  brick  forms  the  soffit. 
671 

The  more  flare  to  the  skewbacks,  that  is  the  more  they 
slant  from  the  vertical,  the  more  courses  of  brick  in  the  arch, 
and  the  more  difficult  the  cutting  of  each  individual  brick. 
672 

The  more  the  skewback  flares,  up  to  reasonable  limits,  the 
better  the  arch  looks. 
673 

The  less  it  flares,  the  less  it  costs  to  cut  the  brick  and  to 
lay  them. 
674 

There  is  no  arch  so  cheap  to  cut  and  to  lay  as  the  one 


172 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


where  the  joints  are  radial  to  the  curve  of  the  soffit.     (See  Fig. 

136.) 
675 

The  more  camber  to  a  straight  arch,  the  less  cutting  to 
the  surfaces  of  the  brick  that  rest  on  the  centering. 
676 

Give  the  top  line  of  a  straight  arch  a  little  camber,  but  not 
nearly  as  much  as  the  soffit,  for  it  is  apt  to  settle  a  little  when 
completed,  and  it  always  appears  to  the  eye  to  be  a  little 
sagged  anyway. 


Fig.   136. — Building  Brick  Arches. 


677 


The  rubbing  of  the  soffit  of  brick  arches  should  not  be 

necessary,  if  the  bricks  are  cut  properly. 
678 

If  they  are  to  be  rubbed,  the  brick  should  be  put  against 
a  carborundum  wheel,   as   it  will   do  the  work  quicker  than 
any  other  method. 
679 

A  rubbed  brick  will  never,  at  best,  look  any  better  than  a 
piece  of  sandpapered  wood  carving. 
680 

Foremen  must  see  that  the  angle  of  the  skewback  is  made 
identical  to  that  shown  on  the  architect's  plans. 


ARCHES  AND  CHIMNEY  BREASTS. 


173 


681 


No  alteration  shall  be  made  unless  ordered  by  the  archi- 
tect in  writing. 
682 

It  is  of  importance  that  all  skewbacks  of  similar  arches 
shall  be  made  at  exactly  the  same  angle  from  the  horizontal. 


Fig.  137.— Method  of  Building  a  Straight  Arch. 


683 


As  bricklayers'  time  costs  too  much  to  have  them  making 
measurements,  the  foreman  must  provide  them  with  wooden 
ske.wback  patterns,  like  O  in  Fig.  137,  with  all  the  courses 
marked  on  them. 


^4VMAH 

'ERSITY 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


G84 


Supports  for  wooden  centers  for  straight  arches  can  be 
best  held  in  place  by  boards  or  upright  joists  resting  on  the 
sill,  as  shown  in  Fig.   137. 
685 

The  uprights  can  be  held  in  place  by  a  spreader,  G,  and 
by  nails  driven  into  the  brickwork.  The  nails  will  hold  better 
in  the  green  mortar  of  the  jamb  if  they  are  not  driven  clear 
up  to  the  head.  Fig.  137  also  shows  places  where  the  lines 
for  ranging  the  joints  should  be  strung. 


Fig.  138. — Rowlock  Arch  Bonded  by  Rings. 
(Note  that  crosses  indicate  real  headers.) 

686 

The  best  results  can  be  obtained  by  giving  the  center  a 
slight  camber  of  say  1/16  to  %-in.  rise  for  each  foot  of  span 
of  the  opening,  or  the  arch  will  appear  to  the  eye  to  be  sagged. 
687 

All  joints  in  the  first  line  of  joints  above  the  soffit  should 
be  the  same  distance  above  the  wooden  center,  or  the  camber 
will  be  noticeable. 


ARCHES  AND  CHIMNEY  BREASTS. 


1/5 


688 

Each  course  of  brick  should  be  the  same  width  on  the  top, 
measured  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  its  radial  joints,  and  not 
on  the  level  line  of  the  top  of  the  arch. 
689 

Each  course  should  be  cut  to  the  full  width  of  the  brick 
placed  in  the  positions  of  A,  B  and  C. 
690 

It  is  a  common  practice  to  space  off  evenly  the  courses 
at  the  top  of  the  arch,  but  this  costs  more  and  does  not  look 


Fig.    139.— Rowlock   Arch   with   Bonded    Soffit,   and   Bonded   by   Rings. 

as  well  as  when  each  course  is  spaced  by  marking  it  off  with 
the  full  width  of  the  brick  (plus  joint)  held  in  the  positions 
as  shown  by  A,  B,  C,  and  then  marking  off  the  bottom  joints 
on  the  wooden  center  by  radial  lines  extending  from  the  upper 
marks  to  a  center  found  by  extending  the  lines  of  the  skew- 
backs.  These  lines  reprsenting  the  joints  should  be  extended 
up  to  a  straightedge,  F,  placed  one  course  higher  than  the  top 
of  the  arch,  so  as  to  be  out  of  the  way  of  the  top  brick  that 
are  being  laid. 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


691 


The  bricks  to  be  cut  and  laid  adjoining  a  skewback  can 
be  measured  and  marked  most  quickly  if  a  line  corresponding 
to  and  parallel  with  the  skewback  is  marked  upon  the  finished 
wall  as  shown  by  the  dotted  line  DE  on  Fig.  137. 
692 

The  line  must  start  from  an  even  numbered  or  correspond- 
ing course  below  and  of  the  same  bond  as  the  first  course  of 
the  skewback. 


Fig.  140.— Arch  Bonded  on  Face  and  Soffit. 


693 


This  line  will  enable  the  bricklayer  to  take  the  measure- 
ments instantly  along  the  top  edge  and  bottom  edge  of  the 
corresponding  brick  to  be  cut.  H'  can  be  marked  for  cutting 

to  correspond  to  H',  K'  to  K,  etc. 
694 

All  arches  must  be  thoroughly  bonded. 


ARCHES  AND  CHIMNEY  BREASTS. 


177 


695 


If  the  soffit  is  not  to  show  at  completion,  it  shall  be  built 
similar  to  Fig.  138,  i.  e.,  with  all  stretches  in  the  lower  ring. 
The  next  ring  should  be  all  bats,  all  stretchers  and  all  bats ; 
the  third  ring  should  be  all  stretches,  and  so  on. 
696 

If  the  soffit  of  the  arch  is  to  show  at  completion,  as  in  Fig. 
139,  the  lower  ring  must  be  bonded  as  shown,  and  the  2d  and 
3d  rings  must  be  bonded  in  the  same  manner  as  Fig.  138. 


Fig.    141. — Rowlock    Arch    Over    Window    Frame. 


697 


This  makes  a  better  looking  arch  than  Fig.  138,  but  it  is 
no  stronger. 
698 

If  the  face  and  soffit  are  both  bonded,  the  arch  should  be 
built  similar  to  Fig.  140,  and  the  filling  at  A  and  B  should  be 
all  rowlock  headers. 
699 

These  rings  do  not  need  to  be  bonded  into  the  face  of 
the  arch,  as  the  regular  headers  of  the  wall  will  tie  it  all  to- 


178  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

gether — furthermore,  whole  brick  unbonded  will  be  stronger, 
and  will  also  be  much  cheaper  than  brick  cut  to  fit  the  brick 
on  the  face  of  the  arch. 
700 

If    the   lower   ring   of   a   rowlock   arch   is   laid   on   top   of 
wooden  lintels  that  will  remain  in  place,  the  lower  ring  does 
not  need  to  be  bonded  in  itself,  but  instead  can  be  bonded  by 
the  ring  over  it.     See  Fig.  138. 
701 

Arches  over  windows  seldom  come  on  the  same  level  clear 
through  the  wall,  in  which  case  the  arches,  whether  bonded  on 
the  face  or  not,  should  be  built  similar  to  Fig.  141. 
702 

The  rings  are  bonded  on  each  other  instead  of  in  them- 
selves. 


Fig.   142. — Details  of  Trimmer  Arch. 


703 


The  lower  ring  on  the  outside  should  be  leveled  up  to 
receive   the   inside   rings,   which   should   be   laid   out   to   and 
against  the  back  of  the  outside  arch. 
704 

On  account  of  the  shrinkage  of  wooden  joists,  it  is  advis- 
able to  start  the  trimmer  arch  as  low  as  possible,  and  to  end 
it  as  high  as  possible.  In  cases  of  this  sort,  the  arch  must 
have  a  slot  for  forming  the  skewback,  instead  of  a  corbelling, 
as  the  latter  will  interfere  with  the  furring  of  the  story  below. 
705 

A  set-in  i  in.  deep  2  courses  high  is  all  that  is  necessary  to 
hold  any  4-in.  trimmer  arch.     (See  Fig.  142.) 
706 

When  making  chimney  breasts,  do  not  forget  to  set  in  two 
courses  of  brick  the  entire  length  of  the  chimney  breast  to 
form  the  skewback  of  the  trimmer  arch.  See  Fig.  142. 


ARCHES    AXD    CHIMXEY    BREASTS.  179 

707 

When  flues  are  carried  over  to  one  side  it  is  necessary  to 
cut  and  fit  the  flue  lining.    This  requires  considerable  skill. 
708 

Small   sizes,   made   of   soft  material,   can   be    cut   with   a 
hammer  and  chisel  if  the  pipe  is  placed  vertically  on  end  and 
filled  with  sand. 
709 

The  large  sizes  of  the  hardest  of  vitrified  lining  can  best 
be  cut  by  standing  on  end  and  striking  downward  with  a 
bricklayer's  hammer.  Strike  until  the  pipe  is  made  thin,  then 
break  off  the  tops  of  the  thin  sections  with  a  hammer.  The 
downward  blow  tends  to  crack  the  pipe  least.  Pipes  can  be 
cut  quickly  in  this  way  without  cracking. 
710 

Fireplaces  should  be  located  as  nearly  in  the  center  of 
the  chimney  breast  as  possible.  The  top  of  the  fireplace 
should  be  brought  to  the  center  evenly  from  each  side,  until 
the  size  of  the  flue  is  reached.  The  flue  should  then  be  built 
toward  that  side  of  the  fireplace  above  that  has  the  fewest 
number  of  flues  on  it.  This  will  assist  in  locating  the  fireplace 
above  in  the  middle  of  the  breast. 
711 

The   flues   should    have    no    flat    places   that    will    collect 
mortar  dropped  from  above  while  building,  nor  collect  soot 
after  the  fireplace  is  used. 
712 

At  every  bend  in  the  flue,  leave  an  opening  at  least  2  ft. 
high  for  a  board  that  will  permit  the  mortar  dropped  from 
above  to  fall  out  on  the  floor.     If  the  flue  has  clay  flue  lining 
fewer  clean-out  holes  will  be  required. 
713 

Flues  not  lined  must  be  plastered  smooth. 
714 

All  joints  in  the  brick  work  of  chimneys  must  be  filled 
absolutely  full  of  mortar. 
715 

All  withes  must  be  tied  into  breasts  at  least  every  five 
courses. 
716 

Be  extremely  careful  to  fill  all  joints  between  headers  on 
chimneys,  as  expansion  and  contraction  will  sometimes  permit 
smoke  and  fire  to  escape  in  the  straight  joint  between  headers. 


180  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

717 

All  brickwork  on  chimneys  and  chimney  breasts  must  be 
kept  away  from  the  wooden  floors.  Extra  precautions  must 
be  taken  to  fill  all  the  joints  and  to  plaster  up  the  inside  of  all 
withes,  so  that  no  fire  or  heat  can  come  through  and  start  a 
fire  in  the  dry  wood  surrounding  it.  There  should  always  be 
a  space  at  least  2  ins.  wide  between  the  brick  and  the  wood. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

TEARING  DOWN,  CUTTING  OUT  AND  PATCHING 

BRICKWORK. 
718 

Wherever  possible,  walls  to  be  taken  down  should  be 
thrown  over  in  large  sections,  instead  of  tearing  down  a  small 
section  at  a  time,  because  the  bricks  will  be  in  better  condition. 
(See  Fig.  143.) 


Fig.   143. — Wall   Thrown   Over   in   Large   Sections   to   Reduce   Breakage  of 

the   Brick. 

719 

When  large  quantities  of  brick  are  to  be  taken  down,  as 
on  the  eight  story  building  that  we  took  down  for  the  Mutual 
Life  Insurance  Company  at  San  Francisco,  wooden  chutes  are 
the  most  economical.     (See  Figs.  144  to  146.) 
720 

Arrange  these  chutes  so  that  their  direction  will  change 
at  least  once  per  story,  or  else  put  in  wooden  baffle  plates  hung 
loose  from  the  top  side  of  the  chute,  so  that  the  bricks  will  not 
travel  fast  enough  to  break  up. 
721 

At  each  floor  level  provide  an  opening  on  the  top  side  of 
the  chute  for  relining  the  bottom  as  fast  as  it  wears  thin. 

181 


1 82 


722 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


The  more  care  that  is  taken  in  designing  the  chute,  the 
more  bricks  will  be  in  condition  to  be  used  again. 


Fig.   144.— Wooden   Chute  for  Conveying  Brick   from  Demolished  Walls. 


Fig.    145.— Wooden    Chute   for   Conveying  Brick   from  Demolished  Walls. 


723 


When  cutting  out  old  brickwork,  the  greatest  speed  can 
be  obtained  by  using  a  short  chisel  made  with  an  octagonal 
shaped  shank. 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      183 


724 


The  brick  can  be  cut  out  the  fastest  if  the  chisel  is  put 
on  the  lines  shown  in  Fig.  147,  and  if  the  pieces  are  removed 
in  exactly  the  order  numbered  in  this  figure. 
725 

If  a  large  hole  is  to  be  cut  out,  the  greatest  speed  can 
be  obtained  by  cutting  out  one  complete  course,  with  each 
brick  removed  in  the  manner  shown,  and  then  proceeding  on 
the  next  course  above. 


Fig.   146. — Wooden    Chute   for   Conveying-  Brick    from  Demolished  Walls. 

726 

It  is,  obviously  possible  to  work  fastest  by   cutting  out 
from  the  bottom,  as  the  pieces  will  then  drop  as  fast  as  they 
are  loosened. 
727 

If  the  cutting  is  done  from  the  top  downwards,  the  pieces 
must  be  removed  as  fast  as  loosened. 


1 84 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


728 

When  second  hand  brick  are  used,  the  greatest  care  must 
be  used  not  to  lay  brick  that  have  any  smoke  stains  on  them 
on  the  line. 
729 

If  such  brick  are  ever  whitewashed,  the  smoke  will  stain 
through  and  give  a  bad  appearance  to  the  wall. 
730 

The  purpose  for  which  a  wall  is  to  be  used  should  deter- 
mine whether  or  not  all  of  the  interior  vertical  joints  in  the 
wall  should  be  entirely  filled  with  mortar.  Where  dryness, 


I  I 


7 

/ 
/ 

X 
/   \ 

6 

5 

\      / 
\  / 
y 
/ 

/\ 

/     "> 

4- 

s    3 
\ 

xx 

/ 

\ 
//^ 

I 

\ 

\ 
\ 
\ 

Fig.   147.— Method  of  Cutting  Out  Brickwork. 

least  condensation  on  the  inside,  and  general  serviceability 
are  required,  the  best  method  of  bricklaying  for  exterior  walls 
of  buildings  is  what  is  called  the  "brick  and  brick"  method. 
In  this  method  the  bricks  in  the  middle  of  the  wall  are  laid 
with  the  stretchers  touching  each  other  end  to  end,  and  the 
headers  touching  each  other  side  to  side,  with  no  attempt  to 
get  shove  joints.  There  is  no  special  attempt  to  fill  the  vertical 
joints  by  shoving  except  on  the  outside  face  tier  and  the  inside 
face  tier. 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      185 

731 

The  brick  on  the  interior  of  the  wall  must  be  laid  in  soft 
mortar,  the  brick  being  so  wet  and  the  mortar  so  soft  that  the 
mortar  will  run  well  down  into  all  the  spaces. 
732 

We  realize  that  this  is  revolutionary,  and  against  all  old- 
fashioned  doctrines ;  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  we  are 
building  under  conditions  today  that  are  distinctly  different 
and  that  upset  many  of  the  old  traditions  in  brickwork. 
733 

We  are  using  better  mortar  today  than  ever  before.     The 
low  price  of  our  best  cement  removes  ail  excuse  for  using  any 
mortar  that  will  not  be  much  harder  than  the  brick  with  which 
it  is  used. 
734 

The  modern  use  of  hollow  brick  has  taught  us  that  a  cer- 
tain number  of  air  spaces  in  a  wall  are  advantageous  in  keep- 
ing out  moisture.  We  now  look  with  pity  on  the  man  who 
used  to  create  a  disturbance  if  he  found  a  space  between  two 
bricks  that  lacked  one  thimbleful  of  mortar,  while  he  would 
not  hesitate  afterward  to  cut  through  the  wall  and  make  a 
window  opening  five  feet  square  in  the  same  place. 
735 

The  exterior  tiers  on  the  exterior  wall  must  be  completely 
filled    with    mortar,    but    on    the    interior   tiers    it    is    practically 
impossible  to  get  shove  joints  in  each  and  every  case. 
736 

Specifications   on   our   best  work   have   called   for   shove 
joints  for  years,  though  it  is  a  well  known  fact  among  brick- 
layers that  it  is  next  to  impossible  to  shove  each  and  every 
joint  full  of  mortar. 
737 

Furthermore,  when  the  fingers  of  the  bricklayers  get 
worn  so  thin  that  they  are  nearly  ready  to  bleed,  as  is  often 
the  case,  it  is  still  more  difficult  to  get  them  to  shove  the  brick 
into  the  mortar.  Then  comes  the  practice  of  slushing  up  the 
unfilled  joints  with  trowels  full  of  mortar.  While  joints  so 
filled  appear  full  of  mortar,  the  work  is  not  properly  done.  All 
this  finally  results  in  the  brick  being  laid  the  width  of  a  joint 
of  mortar  apart  for  slushing. 
738 

Laying  the  interior  stretchers  so  that   they  touch   each 


186  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

other  end  to  end,  and  the  interior  headers  touching  each  other 
side  to  side,  results,  in  actual  practice,  in  getting  about  ten 
brick  in  the  wall  where  nine  brick  with  shove  joints  would  be. 
739 

The  wall  will,  under  actual  working  conditions,  have  a 
much  smaller  amount  of  unfilled  voids.  The  brick  will  have 
a  greater  length  of  lap  or  bond,  on  the  brick  above  and  below. 
740 

In  freezing  weather  especially,  when  shove  joints  should 
never  be  used  on  account  of  the  certain  heaving  of  the  freezing 
mortar,  this  is  undoubtedly  the  ideal  way  to  lay  brick. 
741 

Furthermore,   the   bricks   will   be   laid   exactly   as  planned, 
and  it  will  be  easier  to  obtain  the  desired  arrangement  of  cross 
joints. 
742 

It  is  the  easiest  way  for  the  bricklayer,  and  he  is  doing 
honest  work.  With  shove  joints  he  is  not  always  able  to  do 
what  he  is  expected  to  do,  and  he  lays  the  brick  a  wide  joint 
apart.  Then,  under  certain  conditions,  these  joints  may  be 
"slushed,"  which  will  prevent  the  next  brick  from  pushing  the 
mortar  into  the  unfilled  joints  of  the  course  below,  and  there 
will  be  about  10  per  cent,  less  brick  in  the  filling  at  the  finish. 
743 

Walls  built  as  above  described  may  be  plastered  sooner, 
with  less  danger  of  uneven  discoloring  or  spotting.  A  wall  so 
built  will  dry  out  much  sooner.  There  are  important  features 
for  the  comfort  of  the  tenant  or  the  operative  who  is  to  move 
in  the  day  the  building  is  finished,  as  is  the  case  with  our 
American  office  buildings,  hotels,  apartment  houses  and  fac- 
tories. 
744 

We  realize  that  many  intelligent  people  will  not  under- 
stand and  believe  that  the  "brick  and  brick,'  or  "brick-touch- 
ing-on-their-vertical-joints,"  method  is  the  best  way  to  lay 
brick  on  buildings,  but  every  bricklayer  knows  this  method 
and  approves  of  it,  provided  good  soft  mortar  or  grouting  is 

used. 
745 

Knowing  the  general  prejudice  in  favor  of  shove  joints, 
we  would  not  advocate  the  "brick  and  brick"  method,  if  it  were 
not  for  the  fact  that  we  cannot  be  suspected  of  any  other  mo- 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      187 

tives  than  that  of  saving  money  for  the  owners  for  whom  we 
work,  as  all  of  our  work  is  and  will  be  done  on  the  basis  of 
cost-plus-a-fixed  sum  only,  and  under  this  form  of  contract  all 
savings  go  to  the  owner. 
746 

And  what  are  the  disadvantages  of  the  "brick  and  brick" 
method?  None,  except  the  prejudice  against  it  held  by  those 
who  have  been  taught,  without  any  real  proof  or  reason,  that 
shove  joints  (which  we  do  not  really  get  except  on  a  part  of 
each  bricklayer's  work),  are  the  best. 
747 

The  foregoing  applies  only  to  building  construction.  Do 
not  misunderstand  it.  This  method  does  not  apply  where  ab- 
solutely filled  joints  are  required,  such  as  on  hydraulic  work, 
sewers,  and  on  work  subject  to  alternate  wetting,  freezing  and 
thawing. 
748 

On  sewrer  and  chimney  construction,  and  on  all  work  that 
does   not   require   extreme   accuracy,   and   where   there    is    no 
danger  of  shoving  the  face  work  out  of  line,  no  other  method 
than  shove  joints  should  be  tolerated. 
749 

When  large  horizontal  joints  on  face  work  are  required 
there  are  three  ways  of  obtaining  them : 

(a)  By  using  stiff  mortar. 

(b)  By  using  mortar  of  very  coarse  sand. 

(c)  By  bedding  house  slate  or  thin  tile  back  in  the  joints. 

It  is  not  possible  to  make  hard  and  fast  rules  on  this  sub- 
ject, as  conditions  demand  sometimes  one  method,  sometimes 
another. 

750 

Joints  made  by  the  third  process  will  certainly  shrink  the 
least.     This  is  'often  an  important  consideration. 
751 

Until  very  recently,  it  has  been  the  custom  to  consider 
that,  the  smaller  the  joints  the  better  the  work. 
752 

Modern  mortar  composed  of  Portland  cement  has 
changed  all  such  ideas.  It  is  rare  to  find  a  brick  to-day  that 
is  as  strong  as  good  mortar  made  with  a  fairly  large  propor- 
tion of  Portland  cement,  and  Portland  cement  is  so  cheap  to- 
day that  there  is  no  excuse  for  not  using  it. 


1 88  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

753 

Therefore,  the  size  of  the  joints  should  be  increased  on 
common  work  until  there  is  no  question  as  to  the  quality  of 
workmanship  of  the  bedding  of  each  and  every  brick. 
754 

Every  inspector  knows  that  with  tight  joints  the  great 
difficulty    is    to  get  brick  bedded  in  such  a  manner  that,  if 
the  laid  brick  should  be  lifted,  it  would  not  still  show  a  hollow 
or  a  mark  of  the  trowel  in  the  mortar. 
755 

There  is  therefore  no  danger  from  a  strength  standpoint 
in  getting  too  large  joints,  if  the  mortar  is  stronger  than  the 
brick. 
756 

On  certain  kinds  of  face  work,  the  desired  effects  of  tex- 
ture cannot  be  obtained  except  with  unusually  large  joints, 
especially  bed  joints.     The  architect's  orders  in  this  respect 
must  be  executed  literally. 
757 

The  foreman  must  see  that  the  mortar  furnished  for  this 
work  is  stiff  enough  and  coarse  enough  to  give  the  desired 
thickness  of  joints  without  running  or  sagging  from  the  bot- 
tom edge  of  the  brick  above  the  joint. 
758 

If  local  conditions  are  such  as  to  make  it  difficult  to  ob- 
tain joints  of  the  thickness  required  by  the  architect,  small 
pieces  of  tile  or  house  slate  must  be  bedded  in  the  joints  back 
far  enough  not  to  show,  but  sufficient  to  give  the  architect  ex- 
actly what  he  wants  without  any  substitutes  or  excuses  what- 
ever. 
759 

The  greatest  care  must  be  taken  in  measuring  the  in- 
gredients of  each  batch  of  face  mortar  especially  for  wide 
joints,  or  the  wall  will  have  a  spotted  effect  due  to  different 
color  which  is  caused  by  varying  the  proportions  of  ingred- 
ients. 
760 

It  is  also  very  important  that  no  part  of  wide  joint  work 
dries  out  quickly,  or  it  will  be  permanently  of  a  lighter  color 
than  that  mortar  which  dries  out  slowly. 
761 

It  is  generally  good  practice  to  lay  up  several  4  in.  sam- 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      189 

pies  of  face  brick  work  about  3  ft.  long  and  5  courses  high, 
jointed  in  several  different  ways,  for  the  architect's  inspection, 
selection  and  approval  before  laying  brick  on  the  wall. 
762 

After  the  sample  is  approved  by  the  architect,  see  that  all 
bricklayers  on  the  face  work  are  provided  with  the  same  kind 
of  jointers. 
763 

Keep  the  sample  where  they  can  all  see  it,  in  order  to  have 
all  of  the  work  as  uniform  as  possible. 
764 

All  face  brick  work  should  be  backed  up  at  least  4  ins. 
before  it  is  left  at  quitting  time,  or  the  mortar  will  surely  dry 
out  a  lighter  color,  and  its  strength  will  be  much  decreased. 
765 

If  it  is  not  possible  to  back  the  face  brick  work  up  4  ins. 
before  quitting,  plastering  the  back  of  the  face  brick  y2  in.  is 
the  next  best  protection. 
766 

If  brick  is  laid  with  terra  cotta,  the  laying  of  the  terra 
cotta,  if  it  is  combined  with  brick,  is  generally  considered  to  be 
bricklayer's  work. 
767 

All  portions  of  terra  cotta  blocks  inside  the  face  of  the 
wall  should  be  filled  solid  with  bricks  and  mortar  or  concrete 
at  least  as  strong  in  compression  as  the  terra  cotta  itself. 
768 

The  filling  of  the  holes  in  the  back  of  terra  cotta  should 

be  done  only  when  the  terra  cotta  is  standing  on  its  vertical 

face. 
769 

If  the  terra  cotta  varies  sufficiently  in  thickness  in  a  direc- 
tion crosswise  of  the  walls,  or  say  at  least  4  ins.  from  the 
courses  under  and  above  it,  sufficient  lap  will  be  furnished  by 

the  terra  cotta  itself. 
770 

But  if  it   does   not  afford   sufficient  lap  for  the  headers 
above  or  below  it,  then  the  holes  in  the  back  must  be  filled 
with  brick. 
771 

The  brick  should  project  at  least  4  ins. 
772 

Do  not  fill  the  terra  cotta  until  it  is  about  readv  to  set  on 


190 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


the  wall,  or  the    terra    cotta    will    probably    be    broken    in 

handling. 

773 

Do  not  attempt  to  lay  the  terra  cotta  first  and  to  fill  the 
holes  as  it  is  backed  up,  unless  you  deduct  the  entne  width 
of  the  terra  cotta  from  the  working  thickness  of  the  wall. 
774 

Do  not  fill  that  part  of  the  terra  cotta  that  projects  be- 
yond the  face  of  the  wall,  unless  to  keep  out  snow  and  rain. 
775 

Terra  cotta  shrinks  so  much,  and  so  unevenly  in  the  bak- 
ing that  it  seldom  lays  evenly  to  the  marks  made  for  it. 


Fig.  148.  Fig.  149. 

Correct  Way  of  Shaping-  Brick  for  Filling  Putlog  Holes. 

776 

It  is  generally  better  practice  first  to  lay  an  entire  course 
on  the  wall  dry  and  to  mark  the  joints  on  the  course  under- 
neath, then  to  roll  it  over  on  its  back,  bed  it,  and  roll  it  for- 
ward into  the  mortar. 
776a 

A  putlog  hole  must  be  filled  in  the  following  manner: 

(a)  The  interior  of  the  hole  must  be  dampened. 

(b)  The  hole  must  be  filled  with  more  mortar  than  is 
actually  required  to  fill  the  joints,  and  the  mortar  must  be  plas- 
tered on  to  each  face  of  the  hole. 

(c)  The  brick  must  be  cut  wedge  shaped  on  the  back. 
(See  Figs.  148  and  149.) 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      191 

(d)  The  brick  must  be   hammered   so   that   the  mortar 
is  squeezed  out  on  all  joints.     (See  Fig.  150.) 

(e)  Use  the  same  mixture  of  mortar  as  on  the  rest  of  the 
wall. 

(f)  If  the  hole  is  not  solid  full  of  mortar  and  filled  in 
the  manner  described,  the  mortar  will  dry  out  lighter  in  color 
than  the  rest  of  the  surrounding  wall. 

(g)  Do   not   do   the   jointing  bettei    than   the   adjoining 
jointivig.     If  the   surrounding  jointing  is  bad,   do   not  try  to 
correct  it  all  on  one  brick.     Make  the  jointing  around  the  one 
brick  ;ust  as  bad  as  that  which  adjoins  it.  This  applies  also 
to  all  patching  and  toothing. 


Fig.    150. — Correct   Method   of  Filling  Putlog   Holes. 


777 


Clear  out  all  putlog  holes  and  toothers  before  mortar  sets 
hard.  It  is  much  cheaper  to  clear  it  out  while  it  is  soft.  In 
the  case  of  toothers,  cut  out  the  temporary  bat  before  the  mor- 
tar hardens,  as  the  toother  is  apt  to  break  off  during  the  cut- 
ting out  of  the  bat,  if  the  mortar  is  hard. 
778 

When  laying  the  end  of  a  new  brick  wall  with  a  straighl 
joint  up  against  an  old  brick  wall,  use  no  mortar  in  the  joint 
between  the  new  and  the  old  face  brick,  or  the  shrinkage  will 
surely  show  a  crack  in  the  straight  vertical  joint. 


192  BRICKLAYING  SYSTEM. 

779 

When  it  is  desired  to  increase  the  thickness  of  an  old 
wall  by  lining  it  up  with  a  new  wall,  many  different  methods 
may  be  employed  for  bonding  the  new  work  to  the  old. 
780 

Undoubtedly  the  best  way,  and  the  one  that  will  give  a 
perfect  result  without  any  iron  ties,  is  to  cut  pockets  in  the  old 
wall,  as  shown  in  Fig.  151,  from  the  top  of  one  header  course 
up  to  the  bottom  of  the  next  header  course  above. 


Section        B-B. 

Fig.   151.— Pocket  Method  for  Joining  New  Walls  to   Old. 


781 


These  pockets  should  be  one  tier  deep,  3  ft.  long  and  4  ft. 
apart  on  blank  walls.  They  should  be  splayed  in  on  their 
vertical  edges  so  that  the  bricks  will  dovetail  in.  All  old  mor- 
tar must  be  cut  out  clean,  unless  it  is  considerably  harder  than 
the  brick  to  which  it  is  attached.  In  any  case,  all  shelving 
surfaces  should  be  cut  down  level. 
782 

As  soon  as  the  new  lining  wall  is  built  up  as  high  as  the 
bottom  of  the  hole,  the  entire  hole  is  to  be  bricked  up  as 
shown,  with  nothing  but  the  hardest  of  headers,  laid  header 
over  header  with  the  softest  of  mortar,  and  with  the  thinnest 
of  joints. 
783 

Each  brick  should  be  pounded  inward  and  downward,  the 
top  course  being  thoroughly  wedged  off  with  brick  and  house 
slate. 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      193 

7~84 

Do  not  have  any  wedging  project  that  will  interfere  with 
the  header  course  of  the  new  wall  getting  a  good  bond  on  the 
top  course  of  the  new  block. 
785 

Many   bricklayers   build   these    blocks    with    every   other 
course  a  header.     Bonding  out  to  the  face  of  the  new  wall 
every  other  course  with  headers  of  these  blocks  is  wrong. 
786 

The  purpose  of  these  blocks  is  to  form  a  ledge  on  which 
to  put  the  regular  headers  of  the  lining  wall.  This  ledge  is 
sure  to  carry  the  most  of  the  weight  of  a  large  part  of  the 
lining  wall,  unless  the  lining  wall  is  laid  up  slowly  and  with 
very  close  joints. 
787 

Unless  the  block  are  all  headers  and  thoroughly  wedged 

and  dovetailed,  they  will  either  shear  off  or  draw  out. 
788 

Lining  wall  should  generally  be  laid  with  close  joints  to 
reduce  the  amount  of  shrinking. 
789 

A  cheaper  method,  but  one  not  so  good,  consists  of  using 
bolts   extending  through    the  old    wall   and    the   new  lining. 
Large  washers  under  the  head  and  nut  of  the  bolts  keep  the 
lining  from  splitting  from  the  old  wall. 
790 

On  general  principles  never  do  any  toothing  unless  it  is 
absolutely  necessary,  because  of  the  difficulty  in  getting  first 
class  work  on  the  filling  of  the  toothers. 
791 

Blocking  is  much  stronger  than  toothing. 
792 

Consequently,  if  it  is  necessary  to  tooth,  tooth  the  outside 
tier  only. 
793 

The   interior  4  ins.   or   tier   must   be  blocked   instead   of 
toothed.     (See  Fig.  152.) 
794 

When  building  out  for  blocking,  always  corbel  with  a  l/2 
stretcher  on  all  interior  tiers  at  once,  and  always  set  back  a  l/2 

stretcher  at  a  time.     (See  Figs.  152,  153  and  154.) 
795 

If  any  other  bond  than  common  bond  is  used  on  a  wall 
one  portion  of  which  is  built  up  before  it  is  all  built  up,  tooth- 


194 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


ing  should  be  used,  but  if  common  bond  is  used  and  the  great- 
est strength  is  required,  blocking  can  be  used  to  great  ad- 
vantage. 


Fig.     152.— Toothing    Face    Tiers,  Fig'.  153.— Racking   Split   Blocking. 

Blocking  Filling   Tiers. 
796 

Do  not  carry  the  bond  around  the  end  of  the  blocking, 

as  this  weakens  the  block. 
797 

The  more  stretchers  used  the  better  the  new  block  is  tied 
to  the  old  block.     (See  Figs.  154  and  155.) 


Fig.  154. — Racking  Straight  Blocking. 

(Note  the  distance  saved  on  the  end  of  the  wall  by  blocking  racking  in- 
stead of  course  racking.) 

798 

Always  run  the  stretchers  out  on  every  other  course  to 
show  their  ends  on  the  end  of  the  block.     The  courses  in  be- 
tween must  have  brick  with  their  sides  on  the  end  of  the  block. 
(See  Fig.  154.) 
799 

Bear  in  mind  that  the  off-sets  on  the  blocking  of  the  wall 
that  is  built  first  will  have  to  carry  more  than  their  normal 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK.      195 

800 

load.  The  first  wall  will  have  completed  its  shrinking  before 
the  second  wall  is  built,  and  as  the  second  wall  is  built  it  will 
shrink  and  throw  extra  weight  on  the  blocking  of  the  first. 


Fig.    155. — Tie   Irons,    or    Band    Irons. 


801 


The  top  of  all  blocking  must  be  cleaned  off  so  that  the 
new  work  will  get  a  good  hold,  and  a  good  bearing. 


196 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


802 

The  new  blocking  must  be  made  of  stretchers  that  run 
into  and  against  the  old  blocking  every  other  course. 
803 

If  blocking  or  toothing  must  be  used,  a  liberal  supply  of 
tie  irons  should  be  built  in  at  least  2  ft.  each  way  to  hold  the 
walls  together  while  shrinking  and  setting.  (See  Fig.  155.) 


i     .  i 


i        i 


Jx  lilxli  I*  I 


WINDOW  SILL 

I        I        I  ~ 


|x    |^| 


Iff  h 


Fig.  156. — Racking  Back  Under  and  Over  a  Window. 


804 


If  blocking  and  toothing  are  practiced  only  where  abso- 
lutely needed,  it  will  soon  be  noticed  how  seldom  they  are 
really  necessary. 
805 

There  are  many  ways  to  do  without  blocking,  even  when 
it  is  desirable  to  build  one  wall  up  a  story  or  two  higher  than 
another,  as  follows : 


TEARING,  CUTTING  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK. 


197 


(a)  Racking  back.     (See  Fig.   156.) 

(b)  Racking   back    and   toothing   only    over   the    header 
course.    As  the  toother  over  the  header  is  only  one-quarter  of 


Fig.  157.  Fig.  158. 

Correct  Way  of  Shaping  Brick  for  Filling  Toother- 


Fig.  159.— Correct  Way  of  Filling  Toother. 

a  brick  long,  it  can  be  easily  filled  with  mortar  under  the  pres- 
sure of  driving  the  header  in  place.     (See  Fig.  156.) 

(c)  Racking  back  under  and  over  a  window,  taking  ad- 
vantage of  the  straight  line  of  the  window  jamb  and  the  skew- 
back.  (See  Fig.  156.) 


198  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

806 

If  toothing  or  blocking  must  be  used,  do  not  have  the 
toothing  or  blocking  any  higher  in  a  plumb  line  than  is 
necessary,  that  is,  either  rack  back  a  part  of  the  way  (see  Fig. 
155)  or  set  over  on  a  new  line  several  feet  away. 


j.    160.—%    Toothers. 


Fig.    161.— San   Francisco   Band   Irons. 


807 


In  filling  a  toother,  cut  the  back  portion  of  the  top  and 
bottom  sides  of  the  brick  (see  Figs.  157  and  158)  so  that  the 


TEARIXG.  CCTTIXG  AND  PATCHING  BRICKWORK. 


199 


brick  forms  a  wedge  when  it  is  driven  diagonally  toward  the 

back  corner  into  the  pocket  of  the  toother. 

808 

This  pocket  must  be  previously  completely  filled  with 
mortar  which  has  been  rubbed  hard  into  all  its  surfaces,  top 

as  well  as  bottorr. 
809 

The  brick  must  be  plastered  on  top,  bottom  and  end  be- 
fore driving  into  the  pocket.     (See  Fig.  159.) 
810 

Figure  160  is  an  example  of  "^  toothing."  In  some 
cases  this  is  the  best  method  of  toothing,  because  the  perma- 
ntnt  bat  actually  carries  its  proportional  weight,  and  because 
the  tooth  pocket  en  the  new  wall,  being  only  *4  of  a  brick- 
deep,  can  easily  be  completely  filled  with  mortar. 
811 

Figure  161  illustrates  the  conventional  method  in  San 
Francisco  of  tying  walls  all  the  way  round  a  building  at  all 
floor  levels  by  using  4x^-111.  bars  with  interlocking  hooks 
at  the  end.  Extra  sets  of  bars  are  employed  where  toothing 
occurs,  as  shown. 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

BOND. 
812 

The  word  ''bond"  has  two  meanings : 

(a)  From  a  pattern  standpoint,  bond  means  the  relative 
arrangement  of  the  vertical  joints. 

(b)  From  the  standpoint  of  strength,  bond  means  the 
amount  of  lap  one  brick  has  on  another,  to  tie  two  bricks  to- 
gether. 

813 

No  brick  should  ever  be  lapped  less  than  one-quarter  of 
the  brick  on  which  it  rests. 
814 

No  closer  should  ever  be  less  in  length  than  a  quarter  of  a 
brick. 
815 

Bricks,  terra  cotta,  stone  and  other  blocks  are  imbedded 
in  mortar  for  four  reasons : 

(a)  To  bring  their  tops  to  the  right  height,  or  level. 

(b)  To   provide   a    method   of   distributing   the   weight 
evenly. 

(c)  To  cement  the  bricks  together. 

(d)  To  keep  out  air,  rain,  water  or  moisture. 
816 

Every  effort  should  be  put  forth  to  make  the  bricks 
and  mortar  adhere  as  of  one  mass ;  but  the  real  purpose  of 
bond  is  to  make  the  bricks  stand  up  and  carry  their  weight 
even  though  there  is  no  adhesion  between  the  brick  and  the 
mortar. 
817 

All  walls  must  be  "laid  out  to  bond"  before  starting  the 
actual  laying  of  the  brick  in  mortar  regardless  of  the  kind  of 
bricks  that  are  used  and  of  the  place  where  they  are  used. 
818 

If  the  bricks  are  common  bricks  of  "run  of  kiln"  quality, 
they  will  vary  in  length  considerably. 

200 


BOND.  201 

819 

A  course  of  brick  should  be  laid  dry  on  the  wall  in  order 
to  make  sure  that  the  different  bricklayers  start  their  pieces  to 
the  common  bond  of  the  wall.  Otherwise  there  may  be  a 
small  piece  of  brick  required  for  the  closer  between  the  work 
of  each  two  men  on  the  wall. 
820 

It  takes  about  three  times  as  long  to  cut  and  lay  a  closer 
as  to  lay  a  whole  brick  for  a  closer. 
821 

Therefore,  even  on  rough  inside  work,  the  bond  must  be 
laid  out  dry  for  the  sake  of  saving  the  time  necessary  to  cut 
the  closer  on  each  course. 
822 

One  whole  course  must  be  laid  on  the  wall. 
823 

It  is  not  enough  to  lay  three  or  four  brick,  then  pass  them 
along,  marking  them   as   they   are  laid  over  and  over  again. 
Bricks  vary  so  much  in  length  that  the  only  safe  thing  to  do  is 
to  lay  out  one  whole  course. 
824 

The  bond  laid  out  on  a  straight  wall  is  not  affected  nor 
changed  by  any  pilaster,  regardless  of  its  amount  of  projec- 
tion or  shape  of  plan,  provided,  (a)  that  all  angles  and  cor- 
ners of  the  pilaster  are  square ;  (b)  that  the  pilaster  has  no 
brick  less  than  full  size  in  it ;  and  (c)  that  the  bricks  are  of 
correct  proportional  measurements.  See  Bond  Chart  No.  2. 
825 

It  is,  however,  safer  to  lay  out  the  bond  as  running  in 
the  straight  line  of  the  plane  of  the  main  wall,  and  also  to  lay 
it  out  to  fit  the  entire  perimeter  of  the  pilaster. 
826 

Any  openings  or  breaks  in  the  wall  must  be  laid  out  to 
showr  the  way  the  bond  will  work  out  over  the  top  of  these 
openings. 
827 

If  some  one  of  the  accepted  patterns  will  not  work  out 
then    several    stretchers   must    be   clipped,   to   shift  the    bond 
gradually. 
828 

Do  not,  under  any  circumstances,  shift  the  openings  or 
breaks  in  the  wall  to  fit  the  bond,  unless  ordered  to  do  so  by 
the  architect  in  writing.  Even  then,  due  consideration  must 


202  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

be  given  to  the  effect  on  the  trim  around  the  inside  of  the 

openings. 

S29 

The  laying  out  of  the  bond  on  plumb  bond  work   (i.  e., 
absolutely  plumb  joints)   requires  a  great  deal  of  judgment, 
and  must  be  entrusted  only  to  the  bricklayer  who  is  known  to 
be  able  to  do  it  properly. 
830 

The  foreman  must,  in  any  case,  check  up  the  layout  before 
the  men  have  laid  more  than  two  courses. 
831 

In  laying  out  the  bond  on  any  wall  where  the  bricks  are 
culled  for  color,  due  consideration  must  be  given  to  the  fact 
that  the  longest  brick  will  be  used  at  the  bottom  of  the  wall 
and  the  shortest  brick  will  be  laid  at  the  top  of  the  wall. 
832 

This  is  necessary  because  the  brick  that  are  burnt   the 
least  will  not  only  be  the  largest  but  also  the  most  perfect  in 
shape,  because  the  longer  they  are  burnt  the  more  they  will 
shrink  in  all  dimensions. 
833 

Those  brick  that  are  burnt  the  longest,  being  at  the  top 
of  the  wall,  are  so  high   above  the   ground  that  their  inac- 
curacies in  shape  will  never  be  noticed. 
834 

Therefore,  it  is  not  safe  to  proceed  by  the  layout  of  the 
first  cull  of  brick  on  the  wall  until  a  course  of  the  last  cull 
is  also  "laid  out"  on  top  of  the  brick  of  the  first  cull,  to  see 
how  much  difference  there  will  be  in  the  length  of  the  brick 
and  the  size  of  the  end  joints. 
835 

With  some  makes  of  brick,  this  difference  is  so  great  that 
plumb  bond  cannot  be  carried.  Then  the  bond  must  either  be 
started  new  over  belt  courses,  or  projections,  or  have  courses 
of  full  headers  introduced  at  least  as  often  as  the  culls  change, 
or  else  not  use  all  of  the  culls  on  any  one  wall. 
836 

Oftentimes  different  culls  can  be  used  on  different  walls, 
but  there  is  then  generally  difficulty  in  getting  the  two  walls 
to  lay  up  alike,  as  the  bed  joints  on  the  smaller  culls  must  be 
made  much  larger  to  be  level  with  those  built  of  the  larger 
culls. 


BOND.  203 

837 

in  any  case,  the  following  rules  must  be  observed  when 
laying  out  bond  : 

(a)  Lay  out  dry  the  entire  length  of  the  wall,  at  least 
one  course  of  the  culls  that  will  be  used  at  the  bottom  of  the 
wall. 

(b)  Lay  out  dry  the  entire  length  of  the  wall  at  least 
one  course  of  each  of  the  upper  culls. 

(c)  Lay  out  jambs  of  all  openings  above  the  first  course 
as  if  they  occurred  in  the  first  course.     Shove  the  bond  back 
until  it  fits  the  jambs  of  the  openings,  unless  the  2-in.  piece 
will  make  the  bond  fit  the  jamb. 

(d)  Shoving  the  bond  back  will  require  one  or  more  ?<• 
brick  for  stretchers   in  the  walls  above  and  below  the  open- 
ings.    These  will  do  more  good  than  harm.     They  will  never 
be  noticed,  and  may  become  very  welcome  if,  for  any  reason, 
the  bricks  actual!}'  used  happen  to  be  shorter  than  those  with 
which  the  bond  was  laid  out. 

(e)  In  other  words  lay  out  the  bond  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  wall  before  you  start  laying  any  of  the  wall.     Then 
when   you   carry   plumb   bond   you   will   not   have   clusters   of 
short  brick  in  the  wall  from  top  to  bottom  or  any  undesirable 
bond  around  jambs,  corners,  angles,  or  at  the  junctions  with 
other  work. 

838 

On  short  lengths  of  wall  that  do  not  lay  out  to  full  bond 
(i.  e.,  requiring  a  three-quarter  brick),  start  from  the  angle 
with  a  three-quarter.  Or,  in  other  words,  run  the  piece  into 

the  angle. 
839 

There  is  no  way  of  bonding  brick  to  a  backing  that  is  so 
effective  as  with  real  brick  headers  that  show  on  the  face  as 
headers. 
840 

Figures  162  and  163  show  the  interior  court  of  the  St. 
Francis  Hotel,  at  San  Francisco.  The  entire  face  of  this  court, 
8  stories  high,  peeled  off  by  buckling,  due  to  expansion  by  the 
heat  of  the  great  fire.  These  figures  show  how  valueless  the 
"blind"  (clipped  diagonal)  header  is  for  bonding  face  brick  to 
the  backing. 


204 


841 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Galvanized  iron  ties  should  always  be  used  in  connection 
with  blind  or  clipped  brick  headers. 
842 

The  metal  ties  will  hold  in  case  of  buckling  due  to  heat, 
and  the  clipped  headers  (see  Bond  Chart  No.  2)  will  help  to 
hold  in  case  the  metal  ties  rust  off  as  a  result  of  not  covering 
the  ties  completely  with  mortar. 
843 

There  are  many  kinds  and  patterns  of  anchor  irons. 
Those  that  are  the  least  expensive  to  brick  in  are  those  that 
bend  up  only.  If  anchor  irons  have  projections  that  bend 
down  they  are  harder  for  the  bricklayer  to  build  in. 


Fig.  162.— Court  of  St.  Francis  Hotel,   San  Francisco,  After  the  Great  Fire. 

844 

In  building  in  iron  anchors,  be  sure  to  lay  the  brick  as 
hard  against  the  anchor  as  possible,  so  that  it  will  have  no 
loose  motion  or  play  whatever. 
815 

The  building  laws  of  many  cities  call  for  bond  stones  in 
brick  piers. 
846 

These  must  be  avoided  on  our  work  wherever  possible,  as 
recent  fires  have  shown  them  to  be  very  dangerous,  due  to  the 
disintegration  of  the  stone  by  heat. 


BOND. 


205 


847 


The  various  isometric  drawings  and  transverse  sections  in 
this  system  are  drawn  with  intention  of  showing  the  appren- 


Fig.  163. — St.  Francis  Hotel.  San  Francisco.  After  the  Great  Fire. 
(Note  the  diagonal  headers.) 

tice  the  bond  of  the  various  tiers  in  themselves  and  to  the 
adjoining  tiers.  The  general  features  of  bond  will  be  better 
understood,  and  the  individual  drawings  will  serve  their  pur- 
pose better  if  the  following  rules  are  carefully  studied : 


206  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

(a)  A  wall  consists  of  three  different  kinds  of  tiers:  (i) 
outside  face  tier,  (2)  inside  face  tier  and  (3)  filling  tiers. 

(b)  All  interior  or  filling  tiers  should  have  the  end  joints 
of  the  stretchers  on  a  straight  line  with  each  other  and  in  line 
with  the  end  joints  between  the  stretchers  on  the  outside  face 
tier  as  in  Bond  Chart  No.  I,  if  the  outside  face  tier  is  of  the 
same  kind  of  brick  and  will  bond  with  the  filling  tier. 

(c)  If  the  filling  tiers,  for  any  reason,  cannot  be  made  to 
bond  with  the  outside  face  tier,  they  should  be  made  to  lay  in 
a  straight  line  in  themselves  across  the  wall  and  in  line  with 
the  end  joints  between  the  stretchers  of  the  inside  face  tier. 
vSee  Bond  Charts  No.  3,  No.  4,  No.  5. 

(d)  If  the  filling  tiers,  for  any  reason,  cannot  be  made  to 
bond  with  either  the  outside  face  tier  or  the  inside  face  tier, 
then  the  filling  tiers  shall  be  laid  with  the  end  joints  between 
the  stretchers  in  a  straight  line  with  each  other,  and  special 
care  shall  be  made  to  see  that  the  joints  break  evenly  over  the 
center  of  the  stretchers  of  the  course  immediately  below  the 
course  being  laid.     This  will  require  extra  precautions,  as  the 
course  below  is  covered  with  mortar  to  receive  the  next  course. 
While,  if  the  stretchers  will  lay  to  bond  with  either  the  outside 
face  or  the  inside  face  tier,  the  breaking  of  the  joints  of  the 
course  below  on  the  filling  tiers  will  be  automatic,  and  will 
therefore,  require  no  watching  of  the  location  of  the  joints  of 
the  course  below. 

(e)  If  the  wall  is  an  even  number  of  tiers  thick,  and  the 
outside  face,  filling,  and  inside  face  tiers  all  bond  with  each 
other,  that  is,  are  all   laid  with  the  same  size  of  brick  and 
same  size  of  joints,  then  the  end  joints  between  the  stretchers 
should    run    through    the    entire   thickness   of   the   wall    in    a 
straight  line. 

(f)  If  the  wall  is  an  uneven  number  of  tiers  thick,  and 
the  outside  face,  filling  and  inside  face  tiers  all  bond  with  each 
other,  then  the  end  joints  of  all  stretchers  of  the  filling  and 
outside  face  tiers   should  be  in  a  straight   line   and  the   end 
joints  of  the  stretchers  in  the  inside  face  tier  must  be  located 
opposite  the  center  of  the  stretchers  of  the  filling  tiers,  in  or- 
der that  the  bond  will  lay  out  properly  on  the  jambs  of  any 
openings  that  may  occur,  or  be  afterwards  built  in  the  wall. 


BOND.  207 

If  the  wall  is  laid  differently  than  described  in  rule  "e"  or  rule 
"f,"  the  bricks  on  the  jambs  will  require  a  lot  of  unnecessary 
cutting. 

(g)  If  the  wall  is  an  even  number  of  tiers  thick,  whether 
or  not  the  bricks  on  the  various  tiers  are  of  the  same  thick- 
ness, have  the  headers  throughout  the  entire  wall  come  on  as 
nearly  the  same  course,  as  possible,  except  when  the  brick  are 
not  proportioned  properly. 

(h)  Use  only  full  headers  (every  brick  a  header)  on  the 
header  courses  of  the  interior  tiers.  See  Bond  Charts  Xo.  8, 
No.  9,  No.  10. 

(i)  If  the  wall  is  an  uneven  number  of  tiers  thick,  lay 
headers  on  the  outside  face  tier,  and  on  all  filling  tiers, 
then  lay  stretchers  on  the  inside  face  tier.  (See  Bond  Chart 
No.  5,  No.  7,  No.  10.) 

On  the  next  course  above  lay  all  headers  on  the  inside  face 
tier,  and  on  the  filling'  tiers,  and  then  lay  a  stretcher  on  the 
outside  face  tier. 

(j)  On  walls  of  uneven  number  of  tiers  thick,  always  lay 
the  header  on  the  outside  face  tier  on  the  course  below  the 
header  on  the  inside  face  tier, or  the  wall  will  have  to  be  backed 
up  solid,  i.  e.,  the  entire  width  of  the  wall,  on  the  inside  to  the 
height  of  the  bottom  of  the  header  on  the  outside  face  tier 
before  laying  the  header  on  the  outside  tier.  This  will  make 
the  inside  face  tier  in  the  way  of  the  bricklayer  while  he  is  lay- 
ing the  outside  face  tier. 

(k)  When  a  Flemish  header  is  used  on  either  the  outside 
face  tier  or  the  inside  face  tier,  always  back  up  the  stretcher 
of  the  Flemish  header  course  with  a  stretcher,  for  if  a  header 
is  put  in  this  space  it  will  upset  the  scheme  of  the  bond  as 
outlined  above. 

(1)  When  the  top  of  a  header  occurring  on  either  the 
outside  face  tier  or  the  inside  face  tier  is  lower  than  the  level 
of  the  filling  tiers,  level  up  on  top  of  the  header  with  a  split 
brick  and  put  on  the  headers  exactly  the  same  as  herein 
described. 

(m)  There  are  countless  other  ways  that  a  wall  can  be 
bonded  so  that  it  will  serve  its  purpose,  but  the  methods 


208  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

here  laid  down  are  the  quickest,  strongest  and  most  econom- 
ical of  time  and  money. 
848 

A  careful  examination  of  the  racking  ends  of  the  isometric 
figures   will   illustrate   fully  the   actual  working   of  the  fore- 
going rules. 
849 

Where  face  brick  do  not  lay  up  even  courses,  that  is,  even 
heights,  with  the  backing  up  brick,  some  arrangement  must 
be  made  whereby  the  backing  is  made  level  with  the  top  of 
the  course  that  is  under  the  header,  to  receive  the  face  brick 
headers. 
850 

There  are  three  ways  that  this  may  be  accomplished : 

(a)  By  changing  the  number  of  courses  between  headers 
on  the  face  brick,  and  putting  a  header  on  every  time  the  top 
of  the  face  brick  comes  level  with  the  top  of  a  "backing  up" 
course. 

(b)  By  laying  a  course  of  split  brick  on  the  backing,  to 
come  up  level  with  the  top  of  the  face  brick  course  that  is 
under  the  header. 

(c)  By  laying  a  course  of  bull  headers,  that  is,  headers 
laid   on   edge   instead  of   in  the   usual   way,   on  the   flat.     This 
method  should  not  be  used,  however,  unless  the  brick  are  difficult 
to  split, 

851 

If  the   face  brick   header  is   a   full   header,  this   leveling 
must  be  done  the  entire  length  of  the  wall.     But  if  it  is  a 
Flemish  header,  the  leveling  need  be  done  only  by  a  split  bat 
directly  under,  and  a  split  bat  over  the  Flemish  header. 
852 

After  the  four  inches  directly  back  of  the  face  four  inches 
are  brought  up  to  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  course  of  face 
brick  directly  under  the  header,  the  face  brick  header  is  laid. 
853 

Generally  when  a  split  is  needed  under  the  interior  half 
of  the  face  brick  header,  another  split  is  needed  on  top  of  the 
interior  half  of  the  face  brick  headers  to  bring  that  tier  (the 
tier  directly  behind  the  face  brick)  back  again  to  even  courses 
with  the  balance  of  the  backing. 


BOND.  209 

854 

If  this  is  required  it  should  be  done  at  once.    Never  bring 
the  backing,  instead,  to  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  face  brick 
header. 
855 

Common  bond  consists  of  several  courses  of  stretchers  fol- 
lowed by  one  row  of  either  Flemish  or  full  headers.    See  Bond 
Chart  No.  i. 
856 

Use  common  bond  everywhere  on  the  inside  face  of  all 
walls  where  strength,  economy  and  speed  only  are  desired. 
857 

Common  bond  is  the  strongest  of  all  bonds.  It  is  also  the 
cheapest  and  quickest  to  lay.  It  should,  therefore,  be  used  on 
all  walls  over  8  ins.  thick  for  backing  up,  regardless  of  the 
bond  used  on  the  face.  It  should  be  used  for  both  sides  of  all 
walls  where  the  greatest  strength  for  the  least  cost  is  desired. 
858 

As  to  the  number  of  courses  of  stretchers  required  be- 
tween the  headers,  and  as  to  whether  the  header  course  is  to 
be  of  full  headers  or  Flemish  headers,  depends  on  the  quality 
of  the  bricks,  their  size,  the  kind  of  mortar  used,  the  weight 
on  the  wall,  the  local  building  ordinance,  and  the  architect's 
specifications. 
859 

Always  use  the  strongest  brick  for  the  headers. 
860 

In  the  absence  of  orders  or  rules  to  the  contrary,  headers 
are  to  have  not  less  than  five  courses  of  stretchers  nor  more 
than  seven  courses  of  stretchers  between  them. 
861 

The  number  should  always  be  odd,  so  that  the  header 
course  will  start  with  the  same  bonds  from  the  lead  every  time. 
The  header  course  on  the  inside  is  to  be  put  either  on  the  same 
course  or  on  the  next  above  the  header  on  the  outside  of  the 
wall. 
862 

The  headers  are  also  to  be  laid  in  the  middle  of  the  wall 
with  full  header  courses  on  the  same  course  as  the  header  on 
the  line,  regardless  of  whether  the  header  on  the  line  is  a  full 
header  or  a  Flemish  header. 


2io  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

863 

The  course  above  the  header  on  the  line  is  to  be  all  full 
headers  in  the  middle  of  the  wall,  breaking  joints  endwise  on 
the  headers  on  the  course  below. 
864 

Do  not  use  a  2-in.  piece  instead  of  a  ^4-in.  closer  in  the 
header  course  to  break  the  joints  over  the  stretcher  courses  of 
common  bond. 
865 

If  the  mortar  has  a  large  proportion  of  Portland  cement 
and  sand  and  the  bricks  are  first  class   and  very  hard,  the 
strongest  bond  is  one  Flemish  header  course  to  seven  courses 
of  stretchers. 
866 

If  there  is  some  doubt  about  either  the  quality  of  the  mor- 
tar or  the  material  of  the  headers,  it  should  be  a  course  of  full 
headers  to  every  seven  courses  of  stretchers. 
867 

In  countries  subject  to  severe  earthquakes,  the  best  prac- 
tice has  been  found  to  be  five  courses  of  stretchers  followed 
by  one  course  of  full  headers. 
868 

Fig.  164  shows  a  San  Francisco  building  which  was  eight 
stories  high,  with  self  supporting  brick  walls.  Common  bond 
was  here  used,  with  five  courses  of  stretchers  between  courses 
of  full  headers.  This  proves  that  every  sixth  course  is  as  often 
as  headers  are  needed,  even  in  earthquake  countries. 
869 

The  generally  accepted  bond  for  the  most  economy  and 
speed  in  the  New  England  states  is  seven  courses  of  stretchers 
between  Flemish  headers. 
870 

In  no  case  should  the  header  occur  oftener  than  every 
sixth  course,  even  in  the  most  important  and  heaviest  loaded 
work,  for  the  reason  that  nearly  every  wall  needs  more 
stretchers  than  it  has,  and  every  course  of  headers  deprives 
the  wall  of  one  course  of  stretchers  on  the  outside  face  tier  and 
on  the  inside  face  tier,  and  deprives  the  wall  of  stretchers  on  at 
least  two  courses  on  each  interior  tier. 
871 

The  various  tests  made  to  determine  the  correct  number 


BOND. 


211 


Fig.   164. — Wall  of  Mutual  Life  Insurance  Co.'s  Building,   San   Francisco, 
After   the   Fire. 


212  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

of  courses  of  stretchers  between  headers  are  misleading,  be- 
cause they  have  always  been  made  on  short  lengths  of  walls 
which  are  not  comparable  with  actual  working  conditions. 
When  short  lengths  of  walls  are  crushed,  the  oftener  the 
headers  occur,  the  higher  the  results ;  but  under  actual  condi- 
tions, where  long  walls  are  built,  the  need  of  more  stretchers 
due  to  uneven  loading  and  settling,  and  shrinking  is  evidenced 
by  the  racking  cracks  that  are  not  uncommon  in  all  localities. 
S72 

Many  authorities  claim  that  English  bond  and  English 
cross  bond,  with  the  lap  of  only  a  quarter  of  a  brick,  are  the 
strongest,  because  they  have  courses  of  full  headers  every 
second  course.  This  is  a  great  mistake,  as  is  proved  by  the 
walls  themselves.  A  wall  failing  for  want  of  header  courses  is 
rare.  Walls  with  racking  cracks  between  the  stretchers  are 
very  common. 
873 

Many  old  brick  buildings  show  racking  cracks  on  the  face 
of  the  walls  due  to  settlement  or  expansion  and  contraction 
due  to  changes  in  temperature,  but  few  buildings  can  be  seen 
with  any  damage  or  cracks  due  to  splitting  for  want  'of 
headers. 
874 

We   have   taken   down  buildings  with   walls   laid  up    19 
courses  between  headers  and  with  no  sign  of  splitting  due  to 
lack  of  headers. 
875 

We  have  never  seen  or  heard  of  a  case  of  a  wall  splitting 
lengthwise  vertically  with  seven  courses  of  stretchers  between 
headers,  and  a  careful  examination  of  thousands  of  brick 
walls  convinces  us  that  the  weakest  point  is  the  lack  of 
stretchers,  as  shown  by  racking  cracks,  and  that  the  more 
courses  of  stretchers,  the  more  strength  in  this  direction. 
876 

Superintendents  will,  however,  use  the  bond  called  for  in 
architect's  specification. 
877 

Fig.  165  represents  a  photograph  of  the  shops  of  the 
Leland  Stanford,  Jr.,  University  at  Palo  Alto,  California,  taken 
immediately  after  the  great  earthquake  of  April  18.  iqo6.  Care- 


BOND. 


213 


ful  examination  of  the  cracks  of  this  building  show  the  neces- 
sity of  using  more  stretchers  even  at  the  sacrifice  of  headers. 
878 

Note  that  the  brick  is  plastered  to  imitate  stone  work. 
879 

Figs  166  and  167  give  additional  evidence  as  to  the  num- 
ber   of    courses    of    stretchers    that    should    be    laid    between 
header  courses. 
880 

These  figures  show  both  sides  of  a  12-in.  wall  in  a  N.  Y. 
C.  &  H.  R.  R.  R.  freight  shed.  At  the  time  of  the  accident  the 
wall  was  but  a  few  days  old,  and  the  mortar  still  green.  A 


Fig.   165.— Three  Earthquake  Cracks,   Showing  Lack  of  Stretchers. 

train  of  gravel  cars  was  backed  against  the  wall  so  hard  as  to 
knock  a  hole  clear  through  the  wall.     The  wall  showed  no 
injury  at  all,  except  as  shown  in  the  pictures. 
881 

The  figures  show  how  the  wall  looked  immediately  after 
the  accident,   the  only  change  being  that  the   railway  track 
used  for  grading  has  been  moved  a  few  feet  to  the  right. 
882 

The  brick  in  this  wall  are  laid  common  bond  with  seven 
courses  of  stretchers  between  courses  of  full  headers. 


214  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

883 

All  other  bonds  than  common  bond  are  to  be  considered 
as  purely  ornamental. 


Fig.  166. 


Fig.  167. 
Two  Views   of  a  Wall  Pierced  by  a  Gravel  Train. 


884 


They  can  be  divided  into  two  classes : 

(a)  Those  that  change  the  bond  at  the  corners,  i.  e., 
where  all  the  even  numbered  courses  are  not  plumb  with  one 
another. 


BOND. 


215 


(b)     Those  that  do  not  change  the  bond  at  the  corners^ 
i.  e.,  where  all  the  even  numbered  courses  are  plumb  with  one 
another. 
885 

Those  bonds- that  change  the  bond  can  be  run  out  to  the 
corner  with  a  brick  header  2  ins.  wide  on  the  corner.  See 
Bond  Chart  Xo.  8,  Xo.  14,  Xo.  16.  The  bond  of  the  corner 
can  be  maintained  as  headers  and  stretchers  alternately  and 
the  bond  can  be  changed  by  the  usual  practice  of  putting  in 
two  y±  brick. 
886 

The  bond  is  also  sometimes  maintained  by  putting  a  half 
brick  near  the  corner;    but  this  does  not  look  so  well.     See 
Bond  Chart  Xo.  9,  Xo.  10,  Xo.  n. 
887 

The   2-in.   piece  next  to  an   opening   or   a   corner  is   not 
allowed  in  some  specifications,  but  there  are  cases  where  it  is 
absolutely  necessary  either  to  have  the  2-in.  piece,  or  else  to 
have  the  bond  out  of  plumb. 
888 

The  2-in.  piece  is  sometimes  placed  one-half  brick  from 
the  corner,  see  Bond  Chart  XTo.  5,  and  sometimes  put  on  the 
corner  such  as  a  header  2  ins.  wide.    See  Bond  Chart  Xo.  12, 
Xo.  13. 
889 

The  position  of  the  2-in  piece  is  determined  by  the  follow- 
ing features : 

(a)  Whether  or  not  the  pattern  of  the  bond  is  such  that 
the  pattern  runs  around  the  corner.     See  Bond  Chart  XTo.  14. 

(b)  Whether   or  not   a   border   effect   on   the   corner   is 
desired.    See  Bond  Chart  Xo.  9,  XTo.  10. 

(c)  Whether  or  not  the  location  of  the  2-in.  piece  inter- 
feres with  the  symmetry  of  the  pattern.     See  Bond  Chart  No. 

15. 

890 

In  the  absence  of  any  definite  instructions  from  the  archi- 
tect, ornamental  bonds  are  to  have  at  least  one  header  to 
every  ten  stretchers  showing  on  the  face  of  the  wall,  and,  if 
the  bond  will  not  permit  as  many  headers  as  this  showing  on 
the  face,  then  additional  blind  or  diagonal  and  galvanized  iron 


216  BRICKLAYING  SYSTEM. 

headers  must  be  put  in  at  the  rate  of  one  additional  blind 
header  for  every  five  extra  stretchers  that  show  on  the  face  of 
the  wall. 
891 

"All-Stretcher  Bond"  is  the  correct  name  for  the  arrange- 
ment of  brick  that  shows  nothing  but  stretchers  on  the  face 
of  the  wall.    See  Bond  Chart  No.  2. 
892 

This    bond    is    also    sometimes    called    "running    bond," 
"plumb  bond"  or  "stretcher  bond." 
893 

The  building  ordinances  of  the   city  of  New  York  say 
that  walls  of  all  stretcher  bond  "shall  be  4  ins.  thicker  than  the 
walls  are  required  to  be  under  any  section  of  this  code." 
894 

This  bond  is  the  weakest  of  all,  unless  it  is  tied  in  with 
brick  that  are  8  ins.  square.     Brick  of  this  shape  are  hard  to 
obtain  in  most  localities,  and  are  generally  of  a  slightly  differ- 
ent shade  or  thickness  from  the  standard  brick. 
895 

If  the  bonding  stretchers  (8x8x2^4)  are  not  used,  diag- 
onal headers  must  be  used  sometimes.    The  latter  are  not  satis- 
factory, as  is  shown  by  Fig.   163,  and  should  be  supplemented 
by  metal  ties. 
896 

If  metal  ties  are  used  extreme  care  should  be  exerted  to 
have  them  completely  covered  with  Portland  cement  or  they 
will  surely  rust  out  sooner  or  later,  even  if  galvanized. 
897 

Many  walls  can  be  seen  in  the  old  South  Cove  section  of 
Boston  which  have  split  from  the  top  to  bottom,  due  to  the 
rusting  off  of  metal  ties. 
898 

Many  such  walls  may  be  seen  there,  also,  which  have  been 
repaired  by  cutting  holes  completely  through  the  walls  two 
feet  long,  two  courses  high  and  five  feet  apart  on  centers  hori- 
zontally, and  seven  courses  between  vertically,  and  filling 
these  holes  completely  full  of  headers. 
899 

Walls  repaired  in  this  manner  have  become  serviceable 
again  without  further  attention  or  repairs. 


BOND.  217 

900 

Flemish  bond  consists  of  courses  of  alternate  headers  and 
stretchers,  with  the  center  of  the  headers  located  plumb  over 
the  center  of  the  stretchers  beneath  them. 

901 

Under  no  consideration  must  two  stretchers  adjoin  each 

other  in  the  same  course. 

902 

No  joint  must  come  under  or  over  a  header  even  in  the 

smallest  pier,  return  or  reveal.     This  is  a  matter  often  disre- 
garded but  must  never  occur  on  our  work. 
903 

For  the  strongest,  quickest  and  most  economical  results, 
real  headers  should  not  be  extended  into  the  backing  oftener 
than  every  sixth  or  eighth  course.  The  headers  in  the  five  or 
seven  intervening  courses  should  be  imitation,  or  bat,  headers. 
904 

There  are  several  ways  of  laying  out  the  bond  on  the 

leads. 
905 

The  bond  on  each  face  from  the  corner,  and  also  out  from 
the  angle,  can  be  a  header  with  a  three-quarter  over  and  under 
it  (See  Bond  Chart  No.  4),  or  it  can  be  made  with  a  header  and 
2-in.  piece  with  a  stretcher  over  and  under  it  (See  Bond  Chart 
No.  5),  or  it  can  be  made  with  the  end  of  the  brick  made  2  ins. 
wide  with  a  half  brick  over  and  under  it  (See  Bond  Chart  No. 
3),  or  any  combination  of  these  three  lay-outs. 
906 

This  last  method  does  not  look  as  well  as  that  of  Bond 
Chart  No.  4,  No.  5,  and  should  be  used  only  when  the  lay-out 
fits  the  short  piece  of  wall  that  way. 
907 

It  is  perfectly  good  practice  to  use,  or  not  to  use,  the  2-m. 
piece  near  the  corner  and  near  the  angle,  but,  as  it  gives  a 
border  effect  to  the  end  of  the  wall,  if  used  at  all  it  should  be 
used  on  both  ends  of  the  wall  and  on  each  side  of  the  corner 
and  the  angle,  if  possible,  for  the  sake  of  symmetry. 
908 

When  the  2-in.  piece  is  used  next  to  the  header  on  a 
corner,  it  should  always  be  considered  a  part  of  the  stretcher 
that  goes  along  side  of  it.  On  black  header  or  other  colored 
pattern  Flemish  bond,  the  2-in.  piece  must  be  colored  the 


2l8  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

same  as  the  stretchers  and  must  never  be  considered  as  a  half 

header. 

909 

In  running  into  an  angle  the  end  of  a  stretcher  sometimes 
comes  to  within  2  ins.,  or  half  a  header  of  the  angle.     In  this 
case,  of  course,  the  exposed  2  ins.  between  the  stretcher  and 
the  angle  is  half  a  header,  and  must  be  colored  as  a  header. 
910 

Take  extra  care  to  have  the  two  end  joints  the  same  width 
on  the  2-in.  piece.    If  care  is  not  taken  on  any  cut  brick  the  cut 
side  of  the  brick  will  make  the  narrower  joint  of  the  two. 
911 

Flemish  bond  has  no  decided  diagonal  lines,  and  conse- 
quently it  is  not  so  important  to  have  the  courses  of  brick  laid 
to  exact  heights  as  it  is  that  the  horizontal  joints  be  the  same 
thickness  for  uniform  appearing  work. 
912 

It  is  essential  that  the  plumb  bond  pole  be  used,  or  the 
inaccuracy  will  be  very  noticeable. 

913 

Flemish  bond  is  much  cheaper  to  lay  than  English  bond 

or  English  cross  bond;  when  the  brick  are  not  proportioned  on 
the  basis  of  the  length  of  two  headers  plus  one  joint  equaling 
the  length  of  one  stretcher. 
914 

If  the  brick  are  proportioned  as  above,  the  cost  of  the 
three  above  mentioned  bonds  is  about  the  same. 
915 

English  bond  consists  of  alternate  courses  of  full  headers 
and  stretchers,  the  headers  being  plumb  over  each  other  and 
the  stretchers  being  plumb  over  each  other,  the  headers  being 
divided  equally  over  the  stretchers  and  over  the  joints  between 
the  stretchers.  See  Bond  Chart  No.  6,  No.  7. 
916 

The  bond  can  start  from  the  angle  and  from  the  corner 
after  the  rules  of  Flemish  bond. 
917 

If  bricks  of  different  colors  are  used  with  English  bond,  it 
is   desirable   that   the   pattern   start   the   same   distance   from 
each  side  of  the  corner  and  from  each  side  of  the  angle. 
918 

It  is  also  generally  desirable  that  the  header  comes  on  the 


BOND. 


219 


same  course  on  all  of  the  walls,  angles,  and  around  the 
corners,  all  the  way  around  the  building,  for  the  reason  that, 
owing  to  the  extra  number  of  joints,  the  header  course  shows 
up  a  different  shade  of  color  and  presents  a  belt-like  ap- 
pearance. 
919 

If  the  brick  are  not  made  so  that  the  length  of  two  headers 
plus  one  joint  is  equal  to  the  length  of  one  stretcher,  this  bond 
will  require  a  great  deal  of  cutting  and  placing  of  occasional 
long  bats  in  the  header  course  or  of  clipping  the  ends  off  all 
stretchers  or  at  regular  intervals. 
920 

The  plumb  bond   pole  is  necessary  for  the  best  results. 
With  English  bond,  when  bricks  vary  in  thickness,  laying  to 
uniform  heights  for  each  course  is  not  so  important  as  having 
the  same  thickness  of  horizontal  joints. 
921 

If  English  bond  or  any  of  the  cross  bonds  are  to  be  used, 
due  precautions  in  selection  must  be  taken  at  the  time  that 
the  brick  are  purchased  to  insure  getting  brick  that  are  cor- 
rectly proportioned. 
922 

The  majority  of  American  brick  do  not  lend  themselves 
readily  to  any  of  the  "cross  bonds"  because  they  are  generally 
made  with  too  great  a  length  in  proportion  to  their  width. 
The  result  is  that  two  headers  plus  one  end  joint  is  not  as  long 
as  one  stretcher. 
923 

English  cross  bond  is  the  same  as  English  bond,  except 
that  the  stretcher  courses  break  joints  evenly  over  each  other. 
See  Bond  Chart  No.  8,  No.  9,  No.  10. 
924 

This  feature  will  either  change  the  bond  every  course  on 
the  corner  or  next  to  the  corner. 
925 

It  can  be  changed  next  to  the  corner  by  putting  in  a  half 
brick,  or  by  two  three-quarter  bricks  in  every  second  stretcher 

course  on  each  side  of  the  corner  and  each  side  of  the  angle 
926 

Which  of  the  above  three  methods  should  be  used  depends 
on  several  conditions,  as  follows: 


220  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

(a)  Whether  a  border  effect  is  desired  on  the  corner. 
See  Bond  Chart  No.  9,  No.  10. 

(b)  Whether  the  headers  are  desired  on  the  same  course 
for  a  continuous  bond  effect,  as  in  Bond  Chart  No.  9,  No.  n, 
or  on  different  courses,  as  in  Bond  Chart  No.  8,  No.  10. 

(c)  Whether  the  bond  is  run  out  to  the  corner  and  to 
the  angle  using  the  2-in.  end  on  the  header  end  of  the  corner 
brick.    See  Bond  Chart  No.  8,  No.  n. 

(d)  Whether   it   is   desired   to   have  the   diagonal   lines 
run  around  the  corner  in  an  unbroken  line.     See  Bond  Chart 
No.  8,  No.  ii. 

927 

English  cross  bond  lends  itself  particularly  well  to  orna- 
mental brickwork  on  account  of  its  diagonal  lines  of  joints 
and  the  St.  George's  cross  effect.    See  Bond  Chart  No.  26  and 
No.  23. 
928 

For  the  best  effects  it  is  necessary  to  use  the  plumb  bond 
pole  and  the  story  pole  with  the  bricks  laid  to  exactly  even 
heights,  or  the  diagonal  lines  will  not  be  straight. 
929 

For  best  results  it  is  more  important  that  bricks  are  pro 
portioned  correctly  than  for  English  bond. 
930 

Garden  wall  bond  consists  of  three  stretchers  to  one  head- 
er on  every  course.    See  Bond  Chart  No.  13. 
931 

Garden  wall  bond  is  especially  adapted  to  boundary  walls 

and  any  other  walls  not  over  8  ins.,  or  two  brick,  thick. 
932 

As  each  header  is  completely  surrounded  by  stretchers, 
the  bricklayer  can  favor  the  inaccuracies  in  length  of  the  head- 
ers by  averaging  the  position  of  the  faces  of  the  adjoining 
stretchers  in  and  out  from  the  ashlar  line. 
933 

Flemish  spiral  bond  is  particularly  adapted  to  chimneys 
and  stairway  towers  and  bays  of  small  radius,  as  it  cuts  down 
the  amount  of  rolling  necessary  on  curved  surfaces.    See  bond 
chart  No.  72. 
934 

The  bond  can  be  swung  back  and  forth  if  desired,  or  car- 
ried all  in  one  direction.     See  bond  chart  No.  73. 


BOND.  221 

935 

The   general   appearance   of   any   brickwork   where   each 
course  ends  with  a  cut  brick,  such  as  paved  work,  will  be  much 
improved  if  the  piece  is  placed  so  that  the   cut  edge  of  the 
closer  is  away  from  the  end  of  the  work. 
936 

This  hides  the  irregularities  of  the  cut  edge. 
937 

If  the  cut  edge  is  placed  on  the  exterior  edge  of  the  pav- 
ing, or  against  the  border  of  the  paving,  the  inaccuracies  of  the 
cut  edges  will  be  exaggerated;  first,  because  the  cut  edges 
appear  where  the  eye  unconsciously  expects  them  ;  and,  sec- 
ond, because  they  are  all  together  in  a  straight  line. 
938 

On  herringbone  paving,  and  in  fact  all  other  patterns  of 
paving,  do  not  cut  the  pieces  and  closers  until  the  large  por- 
tions of  the  body  of  the  paving  are  done. 
939 

An  analysis  of  motion   study  will  instantly  reveal  a  tre- 
mendous  saving  of  motions  and  time,  if  the   closers   are  all 
made  and  placed  at  one  operation. 
940 

When  paving,  whether  in  sand  or  mortar,  prepare  guides 
for  a  template  or  straight  edge  to  slide  upon  that  will  spread 
off  the  bed  evenly  to  receive  the  brick  with  the  least  amount 
of  tamping. 
941 

In  other  words,  arrange  the  beds  with  a  guide  so  as  to 
require  just  enough  tamping  to  bed  the  brick  properly. 
942 

Ornamental  bonds  should  not  be  made  to  appear  as  com- 
plicated and  mysterious  as  they  were  in  the  days  when  arch 
cutters  housed  themselves  in  shacks  to  prevent  others  seeing 
the  method  used  to  cut  bricks. 
943 

The  place  that  requires  the  services  of  the  most  skilled 
bricklayer   is   in   reality   a   perfectly  plain   blank  wall,   where 
the    slightest    deviation    from    accuracy    and    uniformity   will 
show  up  with  the  most  prominence. 
944 

A  steel  tape  is  often  used  by  the  foremen  to  mark  out 
joints   in   a  wall    containing    ornamental    brickwork.     This 


222,  BRICKLAYING  SYSTEM. 

method  of  marking  should  not  be  used  as  it  delays  the  brick- 
layers too  long. 
945 

The  foreman  should  provide  bricklayers  with  plumb  bond 
poles  with  joint  notches  cut  in  each  of  the  four  edges.  See 
Fig.  no.  The  poles  should  have  marked  near  each  edge  the 
letter  or  symbol  of  the  courses  to  which  that  edge  applies. 
946 

A  plumb  bond  pole  thus  marked,  in  combination  with  a 
story  pole,  will  take  care  of  all  racking  patterns.  They  will 
require  no  other  attention,  no  matter  how  long  the  rack  is. 
947 

All   marks  on  the   plumb  bond  pole  for   making  plumb 
bond  should  be  made  at  the  center  of  the  vertical  joint,  not  at 
the  edge  of  the  brick,  except  where  wide  vertical  joints  are 
used.    See  Fig.  no. 
948 

Marks  on  the  story  pole  should  represent  the  top  edge  of 
the  brick,  not  the  center  of  the  mortar  joint. 
949 

This  method  will  simplify  and  make  accurate  those  prob- 
lems of  bricklaying  that  have  always  been  considered  diffi- 
cult by  bricklayers  and  foremen.  It  will  reduce  delays,  con- 
ferences and  arguments  on  the  scaffold.  It  will  put  all  of  the 
laying  out  in  the  hands  of  the  foreman,  who  can  get  the  wall 
laid  out  exactly  as  he  lays  it  out  on  a  pole  beforehand. 
950 

Not  only  must  the  brick  be  laid  with  plumb  bond,  and 
with  courses  at  even  heights,  but  they  must  be  also  all  of  one 
cull.  If  they  are  not,  they  should  not  be  culled  at  all,  or  the 
difference  in  thickness  of  the  horizontal  and  also  vertical 
joints  will  be  very  noticeable,  especially  if  the  wall  has  a 
decidedly  diagonal  pattern  on  the  face. 
951 

When  the  desired  effect  of  bond  is  obtained  by  different 
widths  of  the  vertical  joints,  as  in  bond  charts  Nos.  14,  15,  17, 
61,  instead  of  different  colors  or  culls  of  brick,  the  plumb  bond 
pole  must  be  notched  with  one  notch  at  the  center  of  each 
narrow  joint  and  two  notches  at  each  edge  of  each  wide  ver- 
tical joint. 


BOND.  223 

952 

On  large  patterns  of  bond,  as  for  example  the  Flemish 
double  cross  bonds,  it  is  sometimes  quite  impracticable  to 
have  the  work  symmetrical  on  all  corners.  In  such  cases  the 
foreman  must  start  the  pattern  at  the  most  important  corner, 
or  the  corner  most  seen,  or  else  divide  the  remaining  portions 
of  the  patterns  evenly  at  each  end  of  the  wall.  See  bond 
chart  No.  15,  No.  16. 
953 

In  case  the  bond  does  not  work  out  symmetrically  at  all 
corners,  judgment   must  be   used   to  decide  which  wall   it  is 
most  important  to  have  symmetrical  at  both  ends. 
954 

Ornamental  patterns  in  brickwork  are  expensive,  if  much 
measuring  and  cutting  of  brick  to  length  is  required. 
955 

Almost   any   decorative   pattern   can   be   built  with   little 
or  no  cutting,  if  the  work  is  laid  out  with  the  right  combina- 
tions of  courses  of  stretcher  bond,  English  cross  bond,  Flemish 
cross  and  Flemish  double  cross  bonds. 
956 

The  advantage  of  using  the  particular  bond  that  is  best 
adapted  to  the  particular  pattern,  is  due  to  the  fact  that  fewer 
joints  are  used  by  some  bonds  than   others   in   those  places 
where  joints  are  not  required. 
957 

These  joints  that  are  not  needed  can  be  made  much  nar- 
rower than  the  others,  thus  being  scarcely  noticeable.     See 
bond  chart  No.  54. 
958 

When  ornamental  bond  and  patterns  are  designed  without 
a  definite  drawing  showing  clearly  each  and  every  brick,  the 
foreman  should  lay  out  on  the  standard  scale  paper  a 
combination  of  brick  that  will  show  the  fewest  number  of 
joints  that  do  not  form  a  necessary  part  of  the  pattern. 
959 

The  diagrams  shown  in  this  system  are  given  by  way  of 
assistance  to  the  foremen  in  laying  out  bond  to  fit  the  archi- 
tect's design.  It  is  not  expected  that  they  will  exactly  fit,  but 
that  they  will  show  the  key  to  methods  that  will  tend  to  reduce 
costs  by  obviating  some  measuring  and  cutting. 


224  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 

960 

Following  the  methods  shown  here  will  surely  result  in 
cutting  down  the  labor  on  decorative  work. 
961 

Consult  the  office  drawings  for  additional  keys  for  special 
cases. 
962 

After  determining  the   particular   combination   of  bonds 
that  will  carry  out  the  architect's  design  with  the  lowest  labor 
cost,  submit  the  same  for  the  architect's  approval  before  pro- 
ceeding with  the  work. 
963 

A  very  large  proportion  of  the  ornamental  bonds  can  be 
reduced  to  a  simple  bond  of  symmetrical  arrangement  of  head- 
ers and  stretchers  by  arranging  certain  units  with  or  without 
borders. 
964 

Each  one  of  these  units  shown,  bond  chart  No.  25,  varies 
two  courses  in  height  and  one-half  brick  in  width. 
965 

These   units    can   be    made   by   various    arrangement    of 
headers  and  stretchers,  but  the  patterns  of  the  units  as  drawn 
are  the  least  expensive  from  a  labor  standpoint. 
966 

They  will  have  a  definite  symmetrical  bond  easily  remem- 
bered by  the  bricklayer  without  constantly  looking  at  a  detail 
drawing,  and  they  will  carry  out  any  pattern  with  the  least 
amount  of  cutting  of  brick  to  odd  or  uneven  lengths. 
967 

These  patterns  are  the  most  economical  where  the  brick 
are  of  such  proportions  that  two  headers  plus  one  joint  do  not 
exactly  equal  one  stretcher  in  length.     Furthermore,  they  re- 
quire the  least  possible  number  of  pieces  to  lay  to  the  line. 
968 

This  last  point  is  a  great  factor  in  reducing  labor  costs,  as 
very  few  brickyards  in  America  make  any  attempt  to  produce 
brick  of  exactly  correct  proportions. 
969 

Those  brick  that  are  supposed  to  be  of  the  correct  relative 
measurements  are  not  always  so,  because  of  unequal  shrinkage 
while  baking. 


BOND.  225 

970 

It  will  be  noticed  that  these  units  are  i,  2,  3  and  4,  alone, 
or  with  borders  around  them. 

971 

Some  of  these  ornamental  patterns  can  be  executed  in 
color  with  English  cross  bond  instead  of  the  bonds  as  shown 
here,  but  it  would  not  only  be  much  more  expensive  but  would 
not  be  nearly  so  accurate,  due  to  the  difficulty  of  keeping  the 
header  course  from  running  ahead  or  behind  the  bond  and  the 
consequent  difficulty  of  making  the  joints  in  the  header  course 
uniform  and  the  same  size  as  those  in  the  stretcher  courses. 

972 

There  are  countless  other  arrangements  of  joints  than  can 
be  made  to  carry  out  these  same  patterns,  but  the  arrangements 
as  shown,  made  of  the  standard  "bond  units,"  will  require 
fewer  standard  courses  and  consequently  fewer  plumb  bond 
poles  than  any  other  arrangement.  All  of  which,  conse- 
quently, cuts  down  the  complications  of  the  bricklayer's  work, 
reducing  cost  and  increasing  speed. 
973 

A  large  number  of  examples  of  regular  bond  are  given 
here,  to  show  that  any  pattern  or  bond  can  be  best  handled  by 
the  foreman  and  the  bricklayer  if  he  is  thoroughly  conversant 
with  the  laws  governing  bonds. 
974 

By  using  the  methods  here  shown  any  unusual  bond,  if 
regular,  that  is,  if  it  repeats  itself,  can  be  laid  accurately  with 
no  other  precautions  than  a  properly  laid  out  plumb  bond  pole 
and  story  pole. 


226 


BRICKLAYING  SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


227 


Bond  Chart  No.  i.  Isometric  view  showing  common  bond 
with  five  courses  of  stretchers  between  header  courses. 

The  walls  to  the  left  and  to  the  center  show  courses  of 
Flemish  headers,  while  the  wall  to  the  right  shows  courses  of 
full  headers. 

The  corners  should  start  with  full  length  headers  and 
stretchers  every  course  except  the  header  courses,  which 
should  be  either  a  three-quarter  brick  or  a  half  brick  plus  a 
three-quarter  brick  from  the  corner. 

On  short  lengths  of  wall  it  is  good  practice  to  run  the  bond 
straight  into  the  angle  as  it  works  out  from  using  full  length 
brick.  On  long  lengths  of  wall  it  is  generally  better  prac- 
tice to  start  the  angles  exactly  the  same  as  described  for  the 
corner,  and  to  have  the  piece  occur  in  the  middle  of  the 
course  between  leads. 

This  bond  with  the  header  course  made  with  flemish 
headers  is  the  strongest  and  most  economical  of  all  the  bonds. 
On  certain  work  it  is  less  objectionable  than  a  bond  having 
full  header  courses.  Courses  of  full  headers  always  present 
a  banded  effect,  owing  to  a  much  larger  number  of  joints,  and, 
on  culled  work,  owing  to  the  end  of  a  brick  being  generally  a 
slightly  different  color  than  the  side  of  a  brick. 

The  blocking  on  the  end  of  this  wall  shows  the  right  way 
to  build  blocking  on  common  work. 

The  headers  should  never  be  put  nearer  to  the  blocking 
than  as  shown.  The  purpose  of  the  blocking  is  to  make  a  tie 
lengthwise  of  the  wall  and  joints,  and  additional  headers 
would  tend  to  make  a  weakness  at  this  point. 

The  headers  that  are  bound  to  occur  in  the  end  of  the 
blocking  more  than  compensate  for  the  loss  of  headers  in 
the  header  course.  A  cross  on  a  brick  denotes  a  header. 


228 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  229 


Bond  Chart  No.  2.  Isometric  view  showing  all-stretcher 
bond  on  the  exterior  face  tier,  with  blind  headers  wherever 
there  is  a  cross.  The  interior  face  tier  is  common  bond. 

All-stretcher  bond  should  always  start  from  the  corner 
with  a  full  length  header  and  a  full  length  stretcher.  The 
piece,  if  any,  should  be  placed  either  in  the  middle  of  the 
course  between  the  two  leads,  or  adjoining  the  angle. 

It  is  always  desirable  to  start  the  angle  with  a  full  length 
header  and  stretcher,  but  it  costs  less  to  reduce  the  length  of 
the  half  brick  and  stretcher  adjoining  the  angle,  if  that  will 
save  cutting  between  the  leads. 

This  bond  should  never  be  used  except  under  orders  from 
the  architect,  as  it  is  more  expensive  and  not  so  strong  as  any 
of  the  bonds  that  have  real  headers. 

The  pilaster  shows  that  any  projection  of  whole  brick 
built  from  a  wall  does  not  change  the  bond  from  what  it  would 
be  if  it  ran  straight  through  and  past  the  pilaster. 


230 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM, 


BOND    CHARTS.  231 


Bond  Chart  No.  3.  Isometric  view  showing  Flemish  bond 
on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  interior  face 
tier. 

The  bonds  to  the  left  of  the  corner  and  to  the  right  of  the 
angle  are  alike,  and  the  bonds  to  the  right  of  the  corner  and 
to  the  left  of  the  angle  are  alike. 

It  is  generally  desirable,  when  one  of  the  faces  running 
to  the  angle  shows  a  2"  piece  or  half  a  header  adjoining  an 
angle,  to  put  a  2"  piece  on  the  other  wall  also  next  to  the 
corner  instead  of  as  shown  to  the  right  of  the  angle  in  this 
figure. 


232 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS,  233 


Bond  Chart  No.  4  Isometric  view  showing  Flemish  bond 
on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  interior  face 
tier. 

The  bond  on  both  sides  of  the  corner  and  angle  is  sym- 
metrical, starting  with  a  half  brick  and  a  three-quarter  brick 
alternately  on  each  side  of  the  corner  and  angle. 

The  2"  piece  is  permissible  at  any  time  that  the  length  of 
the  wall  spaces  out  for  the  2"  piece,  but  it  is  generally  better 
to  make  the  corner  or  the  angle  look  as  symmetrical  as  pos- 
sible, if  it  can  be  done  without  additional  cutting. 


234 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  235 


Bond  Chart  No.  5.  Isometric  view  showing  Flemish  bond 
on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  interior 
face  tier. 

The  bond  on  both  sides  of  the  corner  and  angle  is  sym- 
metrical, the  header  starting  with  a  whole  brick,  and  a  half 
brick  plus  one-quarter  brick  plus  a  whole  brick,  alternately,  on 
each  side  of  the  angle  and  the  corner. 

In  Flemish  bond  the  2"  piece  must  never  occur  between 
two  headers  nor  over  a  joint,  and  should  be  used  only  against 
the  brick  that  comes  next  the  corner  or  angle. 

In  Flemish  bond  the  header  must  never  come  over  or  un- 
der a  joint  and  must  always  be  plumb  over  the  center  of  the 
stretcher  under  it  and  over  it.  , 

All  odd  numbers  of  courses  must  be  alike  with  joints 
plumb  over  each  other  and  all  even  numbered  courses  must  be 
alike  with  joints  plumb  over  each  other. 


236 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  237 


Bond  Chart  No.  6.  Isometric  view  showing"  English  bond 
on  the  exterior  face  and  common  bond  on  the  interior  face  tier. 

This  bond  is  very  easy  to  lay  out,  but  is  quite  different 
when  headers  are  on  the  same  course  on  both  sides  of  angles 
and  corners  than  from  where  they  are  on  alternating  courses. 

This  figure  shows  both  faces  of  the  angles  symmetrical, 
the  headers  being  on  different  courses  wherever  the  face  of 
two  walls  intersect. 

This  is  the  easiest  way  to  lay  out  English  bond,  but  it  is 
often  undesirable  as  the  headers  do  not  occur  on  the  same 
courses. 

Full  headers  should  not  be  used  oftener  than  every  sixth 
or  eight  course. 

We  realize  that  this  is  contrary  to  much  that  has  been 
written,  but  it  is  undoubtedly  in  the  interests  of  the  best  work, 
as  is  shown  by  countless  examples  of  old  work  laid  English 
bond,  where  racking  cracks  invariably  show  themselves  be- 
fore there  is  any  splitting  between  tiers  when  laid  with  less 
than  seven  courses  between  headers. 

This  is  so  contrary  to  present  beliefs  and  practice,  that 
we  desire  to  call  particular  attention  to  this  fact. 

The  header  starts  on  each  side  of  the  corner  a  half  brick 
and  a  2"  piece  from  the  corner. 

The  header  starts  from  each  side  of  the  angle  three- 
quarters  of  a  brick  from  the  angle. 

If  desired,  a  2"  piece  and  a  header  may  be  used  in  place 
of  the  three-quarter  brick  at  the  angle,  but  it  makes  many 
more  joints  in  the  angle  and  is  not  so  desirable. 


238 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


239 


Bond  Chart  No.  7.  Isometric  view  showing  English  bond 
on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  interior 
face  tier. 

The  headers  on  the  left  section  are  on  a  different  course 
from  the  headers  on  the  central  and  right  section. 

Headers  should  always  occur  on  the  same  course  all  the 
way  around  the  building  or  else  change  at  every  corner  and 
angle. 

There  are  many  ways  that  English  bond  can  be  laid  from 
the  corner  and  the  angle. 

The  rules  to  be  followed  are:  (a)  no  lap  shall  ever  be  less 
than  one-quarter  of  a  brick ;  (b)  the  header  must  be  divided 
evenly  over  each  joint,  or  over  the  center  of  each  brick. 

Corresponding  joints  in  different  courses  must  be  plumb 
over  each  other,  every  header  course  being  like  every  other 
header  course  and  every  stretcher  course  like  every  other 
stretcher  course. 

Bricks  marked  "A"  may  be  either  stretchers  or  headers. 


240 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


241 


Bond  Chart  No.  8.  Isometric  view  showing  English  cross 
bond  on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  in- 
terior face  tier. 

The  header  courses  occur  on  different  courses  on  adjoining 
walls. 

The  change  in  the  bond  is  made  at  the  corner. 

The  diagonal  lines  run  upward  in  the  center  wall  and  are 
continued  around  the  corner  in  the  wall  to  the  left,  but  the 
diagonal  lines  in  the  wall  to  the  left  are  not  continued  around 
the  corner  in  the  center  wall. 

The  header  occurs  a  half  brick  from  the  corner  to  the  left 
of  the  corner  and  a  quarter  brick  from  the  corner  to  the  right 
of  the  corner. 

The  bond  changes  at  the  angle  by  continuing  the  stretcher 
courses  into  the  angle  without  cutting. 

The  header  occurs  one-quarter  brick  to  the  left  of  the 
angle  and  a  half  brick  from  the  right  of  the  angle. 

The  diagonal  lines  extend  up  the  center  wall  around  the 
angle  and  upward  on  the  wall  to  the  right,  but  the  diagonal 
lines  on  the  wall  to  the  right  do  not  continue  past  the  angle 
upwardly  in  the  center  wall. 


242 


LRICKLAYING  SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


Bond  Chart  No.  g.  Isometric  view  showing  English  cross 
bond  on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the  in- 
terior face  tier. 

The  header  courses  occur  on  the  same  courses  on  all  walls. 

The  corner  is  built  without  changing  the  bond  at  the 
corner. 

The  change  occurs  every  fourth  course  by  inserting  a  half 
brick  at  the  distance  of  a  whole  brick  from  the  corner  at  the 
right  of  the  corner,  and  a  half  brick  from  the  corner  to  the  left 
of  the  corner. 

The  bond  on  each  side  of  the  angle  is  symmetrical,  the 
bond  changing  on  each  side  of  the  angle  every  course. 

The  header  course  starts  three-quarters  of  a  brick  from 
the  angle  on  each  wall. 


244 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  245 


Bond  Chart  No.  10.  Isometric  view  showing  English- 
cross  bond  on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the 
interior  face  tier. 

The  header  courses  occui  on  different  courses  on  adjoin- 
ing walls. 

The  corner  is  built  without  changing  the  bond  at  the 
corner. 

The  change  occurs  by  inserting  a  half  brick  every  fourth 
course  at  the  distance  of  a  whole  brick  to  the  left  and  also  to 
the  right  of  the  corner. 

The  two  faces  of  the  angle  are  made  differently,  but  could 
be  made  exactly  alike  by  transposing  the  2"  piece  with  the 
header  in  every  header  course,  and  by  transposing  the  header 
and  the  whole  brick  in  every  second  stretcher  course  on  either 
side  of  the  angle. 


246 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  247 


Bond  Chart  No.  n.  Isometric  view  showing  English 
cross  bond  on  the  exterior  face  tier  and  common  bond  on  the 
interior  face  tier. 

The  header  courses  occur  on  the  same  course  on  all  walls. 

The  corner  is  built  alike  on  both  sides.  The  diagonal  line 
of  joints  runs  unbroken  on  one  wall  around  the  corner  and  on 
the  other  wall. 

This  bond  is  particularly  desirable  where  lines  of  diagonal 
joints  are  desired,  but  the  corner  itself  does  not  look  as  mas- 
sive and  strong  as  it  would  if  the  brick  showing  2"  on  each 
face  were  made  as  a  YA,  on  one  face. 

The  bond  is  changed  every  course  at  the  corner. 

The  header  occurs  2"  from  the  corner  on  each  face. 

The  angle  is  symmetrical  on  both  sides.  The  bond  is 
changed  every  course  at  the  angle  by  running  out  the  stretcher 
courses  into  the  angle  as  they  occur. 

This  maintains  the  diagonal  lines  up  one  face,  around  the 
angle  and  on  the  other  face. 


248 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  249 


Bond  Chart  No.  12.  Isometric  view  showing  header  two- 
stretcher  garden  wall  bond. 

When  this  bond  is  used  on  garden  or  boundary  walls,  it 
is  good  practice  to  have  every  header  a  real  header  extending 
through  the  wall,  showing  the  same  pattern  on  both  the  ex- 
terior and  interior  face  tiers. 

When  this  pattern  is  used  on  walls  thicker  than  8",  it  is 
generally  advisable  to  have  real  headers  only  on  every  fourth 
course. 

The  corners  and  angles  may  be  laid  as  shown,  or  in  ac- 
cordance with  any  of  the  rules  for  laying  corners  and  angles  in 
English  bond. 


25° 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


251 


Bond  Chart  No.  13.  Isometric  view  showing  header 
three-  stretcher  garden  wall  bond. 

When  this  bond  is  used  on  garden  or  boundary  walls  it  is 
good  practice  to  have  every  header  a  real  header  extending 
through  the  wall,  showing  the  same  pattern  on  both  the  ex- 
terior and  interior  face  tiers. 

When  this  pattern  is  used  on  walls  thicker  than  8",  it  is 
generally  advisable  to  have  real  headers  only  on  every  second 
header  course. 

Walls  exposed  on  both  sides  to  frost  and  weather  are  more 
apt  to  split  between  the  tiers  than  walls  used  in  building  con- 
struction, and  consequently  the  headers  should  occur  oftener. 

The  corners  and  angles  may  be  laid  as  shown,  or  in  ac- 
cordance with  any  of  the  rules  for  laying  corners  and  angles  in 
Flemish  and  English  bond. 


252 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  253 


Bond  Chart  No.  14.  Isometric  view  showing  Unit  6  on 
the  exterior  face  tier,  divided  symmetrically  on  the  corner  and 
evenly  on  the  angle. 

The  interior  face  tier  is  common  bond. 


254 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS.  255 


Bond  Chart  No.  15.  Isometric  view  showing  Unit  6  on 
the  exterior  face  tier,  divided  evenly  on  the  corner  and  sym- 
metrically on  the  angle. 

The  interior  face  tier  is  common  bond. 


256 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


257 


Bond  Chart  No.  16.  Isometric  view  showing  Unit  6  on 
the  exterior  face  tier,  divided  symmetrically  on  the  corner  and 
on  the  angle. 

The  interior  face  tier  is  common  bond. 

On  the  bond  charts  of  ornamental  bond  which  follow, 
charts  No.  17  to  No.  71,  the  vertical  arrangement  of  the 
headers  is  shown  by  the  vertical  key,  which  is  hatched  in.  The 
horizontal  arrangement  of  the  headers  is  given  in  the  captions. 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


i       r     r — n — n r~    i 


i    .1 


Bond  Chart  No.   17. 


Bond  Chart  No.  17  is  a  Flemish  cross-bond  where  the 
header  is  shifted  its  own  width  back  and  forth  from  a  vertical 
line. 

All  odd  numbered  courses  are  Flemish  header  courses,  and 
all  even  courses  are  stretchers  crossed  every  stretcher  course. 

The  different  shading  shows  effects  that  can  be  obtained 
by  different  culls  of  brick  or  by  wide  joints. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


259 


w»zy,--x- t^iiiLJiiiiF    I        vm        mi  _ ••  f .^wmfi 

WMft          WM^MMM          I          I          WT^ 


Bond  Chart  No.   18. 


Bond  Chart  No.  18.  The  bond  of  Bond  Chart  18  is  the 
same  as  Bond  Chart  17,  but  the  cross-hatching  is  located  dif- 
ferently. 


260 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


U 


Y/M 


"Mr 


wfa 


I       I 


-H 


_». 


Tl 


i       i 


Wh 


Bond  Chart  No.   19. 


Bond  Chart  No.  19.  This  bond  is  like  Flemish  bond,  ex- 
cept that  the  Flemish  header  courses  are  separated  by  two 
courses  of  quarter  lapped  stretchers ;  the  laps  travel  two 
courses  to  the  left  and  then  two  courses  to  the  right  alter- 
nately. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


261 


Bond  Chart  No.  20. 


Bond  Chart  No.  20  is  Flemish  cross  bond.  The  odd 
courses  are  Flemish  bond,  and  the  even  courses  are  stretchers 
crossed  every  second  time. 


262 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


fL  I 


L ,J 


^y  i-  ;:M 

r i   i   i ~Q 


^J i  jmjjJL,  ' 

a_         Wfm^mmmA 


••^W'^m. '    l 


-v. 


a» r-L 


^r-rH^f  i — r^TzTn~^rT~T  r~ri] 


^_  i     i     t ...? .  i    .1     i ..'    v%%SBm  ' 

^%j  J-;   • . .-..  J   /;/ .    .;j  ,-,.'••',.  .•.'.•fiww%x%,,/. 


ii    K.  ••  i . 


Bond  Chart  No.   21. 


Bond  Chart  No.  21   is  an  English  cross  bond,  a  pattern 
being  brought  out  by  the  use  of  two  culls  of  brick. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


263 


Bond  Chart  No.   22. 

Bond  Chart  No.  22  and  Bond  Chart  No.  23  are  the  same 
pattern  laid  out  with  header  two-stretcher  cross-bond  and 
English  cross-bond,  the  only  difference  being  in  the  number  of 
joints  which  is  much  larger  in  No.  23,  the  English  cross-bond, 
than  in  No.  22. 

Many  of  these  patterns  for  which  special  bonds  have  been 
shown  can  be  executed  in  English  cross-bond,  but  the  English 
cross-bond  will  require  more  labor,  especially  if  the  bricks 
are  not  proportioned  so  that  two-headers  plus  one  joint  equals 
the  length  of  one  stretcher. 


M    viiiiii    i    i^    i 


I     I    .!     I     f-  <3  ;J   .  r..  S ._  i . 


^w>J^/M — i     'w/'Jx^  i — v/myw/A     vwaMVA — i  ^w»j(      i — ij|a%;|?"'"t%|fl%2 

fe>.}.   j  Li  Li     J         J^i  ^ 


Bond  Chart  No.  23. 


264 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


I        .j.  ,       i.  ,      A        .  •       .,,\ _L 


%| J%PI  vmwwKA  wzffi 


^•L —       — ,,J»a — J^ — 


^       W 


l~"^n 


E~~  T — I 


(.  •.     ~.;J  ^ 


I__^L 


..L__^J- 


P        _^_        P 


.i ,..; 


J  ,.x  J  \....../,..\ 


...(,.. ! II,        ''I...        ^        J™F        ,,.B^        WS€%,,~ ^~ 

^^^^.,,.  ^Wt^ ..WWW/A  &"$<<{%,..  *"%¥%%$( V/%V//%A I 


Bond  Chart  No.   24. 


Bond  Chart  No.  24  is  a  garden  wall  cross  bond,  the  odd 
courses  are  header  three  stretchers,  and  the  even  courses  are 
stretchers  crossed. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


265 


Bond  Chart  No.   25. 


Bond  Chart  No.  25  shows  ten  units.  Each  successive  one 
is  a  half  brick  wider  and  two  courses  higher  than  the  one  that 
precedes  it. 


n±r 


Bond  Chart  No.   26. 

Bond  Chart  No.  26  is  unit  2,  shown  (a)  by  itself,  (b)  with 
a  horizontal  border,  (c)  with  a  vertical  border,  and  (d)  with 
a  horizontal  and  a  vertical  border.  It  consists  of  English 
cross-bond. 

Unit  No.  2  is  the  foundation  of  English  cross  bond,  Eng- 
lish bond  and  Flemish  bond. 


266 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   27. 


Bond  Chart  No.  27  is  unit  3.     It  consists  of  Flemish  bond 
in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


267 


Bond  Chart  No.   28. 


Bond  Chart  No.  28  is  unit  3  with  a  horizontal  border.     It 
consists  of  Flemish  bond  in  every  course. 


268 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


j  _     -_{ 


Bond  Chart  No.   29. 


Bond  Chart  No.  29  is   unit  3,  with   a  vertical   stretcher 
border.    It  consists  of  header,  three  stretchers  in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


269 


i       I 


\  ,  .1 


Bond  Chart  No.   30. 

Bond  Chart  No.  30  is  unit  No.  3,  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  Flemish  semi-cross 
bond.  The  odd  numbered  courses  being  Flemish  headers,  and 
the  even  numbered  courses  being  stretchers  crossed  on  each 
other  every  second  time. 


270 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


I       I 


U — UJ 


i  . 


J 


Bond  Chart  No.  31. 


Bond  Chart  No.  31  is  unit  No.  3  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header  two  stretchers 
on  every  course.  This  resembles  No.  30,  but  has  a  straight 
border. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


271 


Bond  Chart  No.   32. 


Bond  Chart  No.  32  is  unit  No.  3  with  a  two  stretcher  ver- 
tical border.  It  consists  of  header  five  stretchers  on  ever}' 
course. 


272 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.  33. 


Bond  Chart  33  is  unit  No.  3,  with  a  horizontal  and  a  ver- 
tical double  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header,  three 
stretchers  in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


273 


Bond  Chart  No.   34. 

Bond  Chart  No.  34  consists  of  unit  No.  4  with  the  odd 
numbered  courses  consisting  of  crossed  stretchers,  and  the 
even  numbered  courses  consisting  of  two-headers,  stretcher. 


274 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   35. 


Bond  Chart  No.  35   consists  of  unit  No.  4  with  a  hori- 
zontal stretcher  border. 

All  odd  numbered  courses  are  crossed  stretchers  and  the 
even  numbered  courses  are  two-headers,  stretcher. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


275 


m 


-jgaH- 


Bond  Chart  No. 


Bond  Chart  No.  36  consists  of  unit  No.  4  with  a  vertical 
stretcher  border,  odd  numbered  courses  being  crossed  stretch- 
ers, even  numbered  courses  being  header,  one-stretcher, 
header,  two-stretchers. 


276 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM 


iL   .  \ 


ILJ- 


J L Jm 


L    .  I 


I  1 


J J& 


,!„.]„ 


Bond  Chart  No.   37. 


Bond  Chart  No.  37  consists  of  unit  No.  4  with  a  horizontal 
and  a  vertical  stretcher  border,  the  odd  courses  being  crossed 
stretchers,  the  even  courses  being  Flemish  headers. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


277 


'JA    ^:<1    tf 


.:/::*. 


; •;:  \ 


BE 


I.....-V'  ,vr;":;pi 


.  _L ,:•  ,...„,  r,;.,  ,.ii  ,,^,  L, 


ai    r""<    vMitliA   WA    \JI%>M   WA    bSd 

yMtfmxh  _        I  ,.,:.... J WM//%& 


^-n^i-^i 


- 


^a 


L:;l 


rnazirx;-  ^..i'l  -  •(/  i,  -i  M 
^^ttc:-       ifr   . 

^^     .,.,.'      ^jfP^      -,,,,„      ^j^f^      ,xxxx^,      ^W/^      mag      ^ 


Bond  Chart  No.   38. 


Bond  Chart  No.  38  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  horizontal  header 
border. 


278 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   39. 


Bond  Chart  No.  39  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  header  border. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


279 


Bond  Chart  No.   40. 


Bond  Chart  No.  40  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  wide  horizontal 
border.  It  consists  of  two  headers  stretchers  crossed  on  every 
even  course,  and  stretcher  on  every  odd  course. 


280 


BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.  41. 

Bond  Chart  No.  41  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  horizontal  border 
five  stretchers  wide.  It  consists  of  alternating  courses  of 
crossed  stretchers,  the  courses  between  being-  two  headers, 
stretcher.  The  border  is  of  quarter  lapped  courses  of  stretch- 
ers, the  laps  changing  their  direction  at  the  units. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


281 


1          1          1 

i        i        i        i        i 

1         1    1 

1  l  _,  1         1        1         1         1        1         1 

w         1 

i        ii        i        \_~j_ 

1       1       1 

i        i        i        i        i 

1          1     1 

1                      feESJ                      |                     |                      | 

1       1       1 

1                      1                      1                     1                      I 

i          MM 

1                      1                      1           1                     1                      1 

1          1          1 

1                      1                      1                     1                      1 

1           1     1 

1          teri          1          i 

1          1          1 

l          l          1          1          1 

l==!          ! 

1           II           1           1      ! 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1          1     1 

1           B=i           1           1           1 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1           1           1      1           1           1 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1          1     1 

1          1          1          1          1          1          1          1 

l          l          l 

1           1           1           1           1 

1          1     1 

1           MM           1           1           1 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1     j 

,           !      !           \          ^_ 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1          1     1 

1           ^           1           1 

1          1          1 

1           1           1           II 

N==i                        1 

1           II           1           II 

1                       1                        1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1                        1            1 

1           N=i           1           1           1 

i                        1,1 

1           1           1           1           1 

1        m%        i        i        i    i        i        i 

i 

1           1           1           1           1 

\  ,  i      ; 

1           ^           1           1 

L,  i         p 

1           1           1           1           1 

W     ~3 

1            W/?\           1           1      1 

i 

1                                  1           1 

1       ...1...       ' 

r.  •  --xr-'  "M        i         i 

i       mt 

i        13^  -r  .J       i        i 

i  ,      ^^p      ,  i        i 

i  •     i  .] 

1          1st          1          1 

[.       ,\        i 

1         1         1        1         1 

Bond  Chart  No.   42. 

Bond  Chart  No.  42  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  two  stretcher 
vertical  border.  It  consists  of  crossed  stretchers  in  odd  course, 
and  of  header  two  stretchers,  header  three  stretchers  in  every 
even  course. 


282 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM, 


i     '.    'i1     i1  'i    'i    T    i 

3- 

i  i      i      t=j      i  i      i 

i      i      i      i      i      i      i 

i 

1             II              II             1             *«              1 

1 

1                           1              1             1             1              1 

1       1              1              NN             1       1              1 

i 

II              1              1             1             1             1 

j 

1             II              II              1             MM             1 

I 

H  —  rh  —  h  —  LW  —  r1!  —  h  —  ' 

-r- 

—  r1—  n  —  h  —  T  —  r_j  —  n~ 

i 

I          II          II          1          E3 

l 

1                   1                   III 

1         II          1          ••         II          1 

1                     1                      1                     1                      1                     1     ,          ,     1       - 

i 

b                'l                'l'                l'           'l                'l                T 

p- 

W%           II            1            IS           II           1 

mtm        i         i         i         i        i        i 

i 

'MA              II               II               1              bsd              1 

^               1               1               1              1                             1 

1       1               1              (=1              1       1              1 

i 

—  H  —  ^  —  4-r1  —  H  —  db  —  S- 

-^      H 

1                           VWA):                                                      \                          \                           1 

I             $ 

1            VMMMVft                             \      \            1 

\         ^ 

!          i  -     -:p           1(11 

1     £ 

i        ^^^^a         i    i        i 

1 

\         wm%&                  \                  i 

1          C 

Wfi         \         MH         1     l         l 

i         i         i         l         i         i         i 

1    A 

l         i     i         i-"-^         \         t=\ 

1        r 

M            \           1            WftZM            \            \ 

1           - 

\  '.'\        i    i         0      ^^        i    i         i 

1   A 

tmA           \      \            VMmWm.                            \ 

1      I 

W>            \            \            fe  -,J            1            1 

1 

^           1      1            1            K--                                1 

1       ! 

1            1            1           1            1           1 

1    A 

i       jam         it         i       Jf&X         i 

1       [ 

1          C 

i         $$%%%%%%         NM         ^  y         1 

r,  i 

Bond  Chart  No.   43. 


Bond  Chart  No.  43  is  unit  No.  4  with  a  two  stretcher 
horizontal  and  a  two-stretcher  vertical  border.  It  consists  of 
crossed  stretchers  in  every  odd  course,  and  of  header  stretcher, 
header  two-stretchers  in  every  even  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


283 


I       ,11 


33: 


X- 
„ 


Z: 
i 


Bond  Chart  No.   44. 

Bond  Chart  No.  44  is  unit  No.  5.     It  consists  of  header 
two  stretchers  in  every  course. 


A 

p 

B 
A 

Bond  Chart  No.   45. 

Bond  Chart  No.  45  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  horizontal 
stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header  two  stretchers  in  every 
course. 


284 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM, 


L .a JjjL, v%m(mM@>  - 


vw™     .JwwM...     y 


\  -  £  .:'i  . 


~r    ^—  ~wn~~~i 

W% ,,, , ,   j  , ^^,J_ 


±z2±nd 


^ rW&  <••>::.  \:-,,..,,:-\ 


p    ,  PC 


-L-^,  r.     ^L 


^        .,,^,.       I 


:  \  i  ; 

["       "";  T  !>'/.'       11 


Bond  Chart  No.   46. 


Bond  Chart  No.  46  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  vertical  stretcher 
border.     It  consists  of  header  four  stretchers  on  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


285 


Bond  Chart  No.  47. 

Bond  Chart  No.  47  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  stretcher  border. 

This   consists  of  header  three-stretcher  in   every  course. 


28b 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   48. 


Bond  Chart  No.  48  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  double-stretcher 
horizontal  border.  Each  course  consists  of  headers  two- 
stretchers. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


287 


Bond  Chart  No.  49. 

Bond  Chart  No.  49  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  vertical  double- 
stretcher  border;  it  consists  of  header  six-stretchers  in  every 
course. 


DIVERSITY 

-r 

A^ 


288 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


•.!„..  I. 


Bond  Chart  No.   50. 


Bond  Chart  No.  50  is  unit  No.  5,  with  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  double  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header,  four 
stretchers  in  every  course. 


0JL. \- 


r~    mm       \    ^mm 


Bond  Chart  No.   51. 


Bond  Chart  No.  51  is  unit  No.  5  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  header  border. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


289 


Bond  Chart  No.  52. 


Bond   Chart   No.   52   is   unit   No.    5   with   a   header  two- 
stretcher  header  horizontal  and  vertical  border. 


Bond  Chart  No.   53. 


Bond  Chart  No.  53  is  unit  No.  6.  This  is  a  Flemish  header 
cross  bond.  It  consists  of  stretchers  crossed  on  every  odd 
course,  and  of  Flemish  bond  on  every  even  course. 


290  BRICKLAYING   SYSTEM. 


J L LJ J L LJ J L 


I  .     .  I       .  I  .       I  . .  I       .  I  .       I  .     .  I       .  I  .  I  .     .  I J 


I         II 


II          I  .       I.I  _  J_  _  L  _  J  _  _J_  _  L  _  J 


.          . 

'  '    ''    '  'i  V  i'  'i 


II.     i.  __ 


II       II 


_L I  I I  .       II          I  .       II          I          II 


II        I.I        II.      I.I        I    I     •  I  .  I        II        I.I 


II       I       II       I       II       I 


I        II        I  .      II        I .      II        I.      II        I 
,11,     I.I     ,11,     I.I     ,11,     I.I     ,11,     I.I     ,  • , 
I.I        I  .      I.I        I .      II        I        II        I        I        I 


''      '  ' 


.    i    i        i    i        i    i 


I      I    .          II  II  II 


II         .  I   .          II  I   .         I.I  I   .          II 


J_J ,  I    I  , LJ ,11         I.I      ~ll         171         II 

l.l         I  .       II         i         II         I         II 


J L II         I I         II         II         II         II         II 


I  .     ,  I J-. I  .     ,  I .  I  .       I  .     .  I JL, I  .     .  I 

I       ,11.       I.I- 


I       .1 J_ II         I         II         I  .       II 


I 
^ 


1  '.    '.'    i1  '.    '.'    i1  '.    '.'    i1  '.    '.' 


Bond  Chart  No.   54. 

Bond  Chart  No.  54  is  unit  No.  6  with  some  joints  exag- 
gerated and  some  joints  diminished. 

This  is  a  Flemish  header  cross-bond,  the  odd  courses  be- 
ing crossed  stretchers,  and  the  even  courses  being  Flemish 
headers. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


291 


i.i 


..,1  /  I 


r,-,  .>..,.,... ^. 


Bond  Chart  No.  55. 


Bond  Chart  No.  55  is  unit  No.  6  with  a  horizontal 
stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  Flemish  courses  every  odd 
course,  and  of  stretchers  crossed  every  even  course. 


292 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


p     I 


I    '"-"4 


"i'  r 


Bond  Chart  No.   56. 

Bond  Chart  No.  56  is  unit  No.  6,  with  a  vertical  stretcher 
border.  It  consists  of  header,  two  stretchers,  cross  bond.  The 
odd  numbered  courses  are  stretchers  crossed  on  each  other 
every  course,  and  the  even  numbered  courses  are — header, 
two  stretchers. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


293 


Bond  Chart  No.    57. 

Bond  Chart  No.  57  is  unit  No.  6,  with  a  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header,  one  stretcher ; 
header,  two  stretchers,  cross  bond, — that  is — the  odd  num- 
bered courses  are  header,  one  stretcher,  and  header,  two 
stretchers, — and  the  even  numbered  courses  are — stretchers 
crossed  on  each  other  every  course. 


294 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


a       I       IL     .i 


ir~±r 


JBi    T    JB 


Bond  Chart  No. 


Bond  Chart  No.  58  is  unit  No.  6  with  a  horizontal  two- 
stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  stretchers  crossed  on  the  odd 
courses  and  Flemish  bond  on  the  even  courses. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


295 


Bond  Chart  No.   59. 


Bond  Chart  No.  59  is  unit  No.  6  with  a  vertical  two- 
stretchers  border.  It  consists  of  stretchers  crossed  on  the  odd 
courses  and  header  three  stretchers  on  the  even  courses. 


296 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   60. 


Bond  Chart  No.  60  is  unit  No.  6  with  header  two  stretcher 
header  border  horizontally  and  vertically. 


BOXD    CHARTS. 


297 


Bond  Chart  No.   61. 


Bond  Chart  No.  61  bears  a  close  resemblance  to  Bond 
Chart  No.  54.  It  consists  of  stretchers  crossed  on  every  odd 
course,  and  of  Flemish  courses  every  even  course. 


298 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   62. 

Bond  Chart  No.  62  is  the  same  as  unit  No.  6,  except  that 
the  brick  of  the  stretcher  course  is  divided  evenly  on  the 
header  of  the  course  over  it  instead  of  being  crossed  every 
second  stretcher  course. 

This  makes  the  stretchers  cross  twice  to  every  three 
stretcher  courses. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


299 


J JL 


J ,  I     I 


I     .         3  I    J:/.'.  ^  \   ^ 

E.L.-.- ,  j..,.,. .:.}    -I 
WmMh      vvmM 


TIL 


fl.l.; :...-J. 


Bond  Chart  No.   63. 


Bond  Chart  No.  63  is  unit  No.  7.     It  consists  cf  header 
three  stretchers  in  every  course. 


300 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


1          1     1 

1          1          II          1 

1        1         1 

1    1         1         1         1 

11         II 

1         III         1 

1          1         1 

1          I          I          11 

1          1     1 

1          1          II          1 

1        1        1 

II         III 

1         II          1 

1          11          1          1 

1         1        1 

1    1         1         1         1 

1         1    1 

II         III 

1        1        1 

1  ,      1  ,    ,  1      ,11, 

Bond  Chart  No.   64. 


Bond  Chart  No.  64  is  unit  No.  7  with  horizontal  stretcher 
border.    It  consists  of  header,  three  stretchers  in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


301 


Bond  Chart  No.   65. 


Bond  Chart  No.  65  is  unit  No.  7  with  a  vertical  stretcher 
border.     It  consists  of  header  five  stretchers  in  every  course. 


302 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


_L LJ 


JL L 


L J- 


I  L 


I  ,  I 


J L 


I  ,  I 


I  .  I 


J L 


I  L 


I.I          I 


gL.  I 


Bond  Chart  No.  66. 

Bond  Chart  No.  66  is  unit  No.  7  with  horizontal  and  a 
vertical  stretcher  border.  It  consists  of  header,  four  stretchers 
in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


303 


Bond  Chart  No.   67. 


Bond   Chart  No.   67    is   unit   No.   7   with   a   header,  two- 
stretcher  header  vertical  and  horizontal  border. 


3°4 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.  68. 

Bond  Chart  No.  68  consists  of  unit  No.  8.  It  consists  of 
crossed-stretcher  courses  on  all  odd  numbered  courses ;  and 
header,  one  stretcher,  header,  two-stretchers,  on  all  even  num- 
bered courses. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


305 


- 144 


*  T 


a      J 


Bond  Chart  No.   69. 


Bond  Chart  No.  69  is  unit  No.  8  with  a  header  horizontal 
and  vertical  border. 


3o6 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   70  is   unit  No.  9,  consisting  of  header 
four-stretcher  in  every  course. 


BOND    CHARTS. 


307 


Bond  Chart  No.   71. 


Bond  Chart  No.  71  is  unit  No.  10.  It  consists  of  stretchers 
crossed  on  odd  courses,  and  of  header  two  stretchers  on  even 
courses. 


3o8 


BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 


Bond  Chart  No.   72. 


Bond  Chart  No.  72.  Flemish  spiral  hond.  It  consists  of 
Flemish  header  courses,  with  the  header  laid  over  the  joint  in 
the  course  below. 


Bond  Chart  No.  73. 


Bond  Chart  No.  73.  Zig-zag-  bond.  It  consists  of  header 
two  stretchers  in  every  course,  the  header  being  laid  over  the 
joint  of  the  header  in  the  course  below. 


GLOSSARY  OF  TERMS  USED. 

All-Stretcher  Bond. — Bond  showing  only  stretchers  on  the  tace  of 
the  wall,  each  stretcher  divided  evenly  over  the  stretchers  under  it. 

American  Bond. — A  name  sometimes  given  to  common  bond. 

Arches. — Bricks  that  are  used  to  corbel  out  over  the  fires  in  the  kiln. 

Arches. — The   brickwork  over  openings,   or  between   skewbacks. 

Ashlar  Line. — The  main  line  of  the  surface  of  a  wall  of  the  super- 
structure. 

Backboard. — A  temporary  board  on  the  outside  of  a  scaffold. 

Backing  Up. — Any  part  or  all  of  the  entire  wall  except  the  overhand 
face  tier. 

Bat. — A  broken  piece  of  brick,  generally  a  half  a  brick. 

Batter. — A  face  of  a  wall  leaning  from  the  vertical  toward  the  wall. 

Batter  Stick. — A  tapering  stick  used  in  connection  with  a  plumb  rule 
for  building  battering  surfaces. 

Bed  (of  Brick). — The  surface  of  the  brick  that  should  be  laid  down- 
ward. 

Bed  (of  Mortar). — Mortar  on  a  wall  ready  to  receive  a  brick  upon  it. 
The  mortar  on  which  a  brick  rests. 

Bed  Joint. — The  horizontal  joint  between   two  courses. 

Benches. — Brick  in  that  part  of  the  kiln  next  to  the  fire,  that  are  gen- 
erally baked  to  vitrification. 

Blocking. — A  method  of  building  two  adjoining  or  intersecting  walls 
not  built  at  the  same  time,  by  which  the  walls  are  tied  together 
by  offset  and  overhanging  blocks  of  several  courses  of  brick. 

Body  Brick. — The  best  brick  in  the  kiln.  The  brick  that  are  baked 
hardest  with  the  least  distortion. 

Bond. — The  relative-  arrangement  of  vertical  joints. 

Boom  Derrick. — A  derrick  having  a  boom  supported  by  a  mast,  which 
in  turn  is  supported  by  either  stiff  legs,  guys,  or  both. 

Brick-and-Brick. — A  method  of  laying  brick  by  which  the  brick  are 
laid  touching  each  other  with  only  mortar  enough  to  fill  the  ir- 
regularities of  the  surfaces. 

Bull  Header. — A  brick  laid  on  edge  in  the  direction  cross-wise  of  the 
wall.  A  header  on  edge. 

Bull  Stretcher. — A  brick  laid  on  edge  in  the  direction  lengthwise  of 
the  wall.  A  stretcher  on  edge. 

Buttering. — Putting  mortar  on  a  brick  with  a  trowel  before  the  brick 
is  laid. 

Camber. — A  convexity  upon  an  upper  surface. 

Center. — A  temporary  support  to  masonry,  such  as  to  an  arch. 

309 


310  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

Chimney  Breast. — That  part  of  the  wall  that  is  made  to  project  from 
the  line  of  the  wall  by  a  fireplace  or  by  flues. 

Closer. — A  piece  of  brick  laid  to  the  line.  Also,  the  last  brick  laid  in 
any  course  of  any  tier. 

Common  Bond. — Several  courses  of  stretchers  followed  by  one  course 
of  either  Flemish  or  full  headers. 

Corbel. — One  or  more  courses  projecting  from  the  wall. 

Core  of  Chimney. — The  inside  shell  of  the  chimney. 

Course. — One  horizontal  layer  of  brick  in  a  wall.  A  radial  layer  of 
brick  in  an  arch. 

Crown. — Camber.     The  opposite  of  sag. 

Cull. — One  particular  lot  of  brick  sorted  for  color  or  size. 

Culling. — Sorting  brick  for  color,  size  or  evenness. 

Cutting-Out  Hammer. — A  hammer  used  for  striking  a  chisel  for  cut- 
ting brick  out  of  a  wall. 

Eastern  Method. — The  pick  and  dip. 

Efflorescence. — A  whitish  deposit  that  sometimes  appears  on  the  sur- 
face of  new  walls. 

Eight  Inches  (8"). — Two  tiers. 

English  Bond.— Alternate  courses  of  full  headers  and  stretchers,  the 
headers  being  plumb  over  each  other,  and  the  stretchers  being 
plumb  over  each  other.  The  headers  are  divided  evenly  over  the 
stretchers,  and  over  the  joints  between  the  stretchers. 

English  Cross  Bond. — The  same  as  English  bond,  except  that  the  al- 
ternating stretcher  courses,  instead  of  being  plumb  over  each 
other,  break  evenly  over  each  other. 

Face. — The   front   or   exposed   surface   of  a   wall. 

Face  Brick. — Brick  laid  on  the  face  of  a  wall. 

Fat  Mortar. — Mortar  that  tends  to  stick  to  the  trowel,  generally  be- 
cause of  too  little  sand. 

Filling  In. — Laying  brick  on  interior  tiers  after  the  face  tiers  in  the 
same  course  have  been  laid. 

Flat  Arch. — An  arch  whose  soffit  is  in  approximately  a  level  plane. 

Flemish  Bond. — Courses  of  alternate  stretchers  and  headers,  with  the 
center  of  the  headers  located  plumb  over  the  center  of  the 
stretchers  beneath  them. 

Flemish  Cross  Bond. — Any  bond  having  alternate  courses  of  Flemish 
headers  and  stretcher  courses.  The  Flemish  headers  being  plumb 
over  each  other  and  the  alternate  stretcher  courses  being  crossed 
over  each  other. 

Flemish  Double  Cross  Bond. — Bond  with  odd  numbered  courses 
stretchers  divided  evenly  over  each  other,  and  even  numbered 
courses  Flemish  headers  in  various  locations  with  reference  to 
the  plumb  of  each  other. 

Flemish  Header. — One  course  of  brick  consisting  of  alternate  stretch- 
ers and  headers. 


GLOSSARY    OF    TERMS    USED.  311 

Footings. — The  lowest  courses  of  a  wall. 

Four  Inches. — Tier.     A  vertical  tier  of  brick  the  width  of  one  brick  in 

thickness. 

Full  Header. — A  course  consisting  of  all  headers. 
Garden  Wall  Bond. — A  name  given  to  any  bond  particularly  adapted 

to   walls    two    tiers   thick.      A   bond    consisting    of    one   header   to 

three    stretchers    in    every   course. 
Green  Brick  Work. — Brickwork  in  which  the  mortar  has  not  had  time 

to  set. 

Grout. — A  thin,  soupy  mixture  of  cement,  sand  and  water. 
Hand  Leather. — A  piece  of  leather  used  to  protect  the  fingers. 
Hard. — A  term  given  to  the  brick  that  are  thoroughly  baked. 
Header. — A  brick  laid  so  that  only  its  end  shows  on  the  face  of  a  wall. 
Header  Bond. — Bond  showing  only  headers  on  the  face,  each  header 

divided  evenly  on  the  header  under  it. 
Header  High. — The  height  up  to  the  top  of  the  course  directly  under 

a  header  course. 

Jamb. — The  end  of  a  wall,  as  at  a  door  or  window  opening. 
Jointer. — A   tool   used    for    smoothing   or    indenting   the    surface    of   a 

mortar  joint. 

Key. — The  center  brick  or  course  of  brick  of  an  arch. 
Key. — The   relative   position   of   the   headers   of  various   courses   with 

reference  to  a  vertical  line. 

Lap. — The  distance  that  one  brick  extends  over  the  brick  under  it. 
Laying  to   Bond. — Laying   the   brick   of   the    entire   course    without   a 

cut  brick. 

Laying  Overhand. — Building  the  further  face  of  the  wall  from  a  scaf- 
fold on  the  other  side  of  the  wall.     Laying  the  outside  face  tier 

from  the  inside  of  the  building. 
Lead. — A  part  of  the  wall  built  up  ahead  of  the  line,  to  which  to  haul 

the  line. 
Lean  Mortar. — Mortar  that  does  not  adhere  to  the  trowel,  generally 

due  to  the  presence  of  too  much  sand. 
Ledger. — A  horizontal  board  nailed  to  the  poles  of  a  scaffold  on  which 

the    pudlogs    rest. 
Light  Hard. — A  term  applied  to  red  brick  that  are  not  the  hardest  in 

the  kiln.     Although  suitable  for  carrying  moderate  loads,  they  are 

not  able  to  withstand  alternate   freezing  and  thawing  as  well  as 

the  hard   brick. 

Lime  Putty. — Slaked  lime  without  sand  or  cement. 
Line. — The  string  used  by  the  bricklayer  as  a  guide  for  laying  the  top 

edge  of  brick. 
Lintel. — A  permanent  horizontal  support  over  an  opening  that  may  be 

curved  or  straight  on  the  top. 
Lipped. — Laid  with  a  battering  face. 

Mercury  Bob. — A  plumb  bob  filled  with  quicksilver  to  get  the  great- 
est weight  in  the  smallest  size. 


312  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

Mortar. — Any  mixture  used  to  fill  the  joints  between  bricks. 
Mortar  Bed. — A  pen  in  which  to  make  mortar. 
Mortar  Board. — A  flat  wooden  board  3'0"x3'0"  for  holding  mortar. 
Motion  Study. — The  examination  of  the  value,  time  and  sequence  of 

motions  for  producing  the  greatest  results  in  the  least  time  with 

the  least  effort  and  fatigue. 
Offset. — A  course  that  sets  in  from  the  course  directly  under  it.    Also 

called  set-off,  set-back,  etc.     The  opposite  of  corbel. 
Outrigger. — A   joist    projecting   out    of   a    window    for   supporting   an 

outside  scaffold. 

Outside  Four  Inches   (4"). — The  overhand  face.     The  outside  tier. 
Overhand  Work. — An  entire  wall  built  with  a  staging  located  on  only 

one  side  of  the  wall. 
Overhang. — A  face  of  the  wall  leaning  from  the  vertical  away  from 

the  wall. 

Pack. — A  pocket  and  its  load  of  two  courses  of  bull  headers. 
Packet. — A  tray  for  holding  about  90  pounds  of  brick. 
Peach   Basket. — A   templet    against    which    the    entire    head    of   a    tall 

chimney  is  built. 

Peen. — That  end  of  a  hammer  head  which  terminates  in  an  edge. 
Pick  and  Dip. — The  name  of  the  method  where  the  bricklayer  picks 

up  a  brick  with  one  hand,  and  just  mortar  enough  to  lay  it  with 

a  trowel  with  the  other  hand,  simultaneously. 

Pier. — An  isolated  masonry  column,  the  brickwork  between  two  ad- 
joining openings  in  the  same  story. 
Pilaster. — A  pier  projecting  from  a  wall. 
Pin. — An  iron  rod   %"  by   10"  to  support  the  frame  in  the   Gilbreth 

Scaffold  horse. 
Plumb.— Vertical. 

Plumb  Bob. — A  line  and  weight  for  determining  vertical  lines. 
Plumb  Bond. — Another  name  for  all  stretcher  bond  work  built  with 

particular  effort  to  have  corresponding  joints  exactly  plumb  with 

each  other. 
Plumb  Bond  Pole. — A  pole  used  for  laying  out  the  exact  position  of 

vertical   joints. 
Plumb   Glass. — A   slightly   curved   glass   into   which   alcohol   is   sealed 

for  use  in  a  plumb  rule. 
Plumb   Rule. — A   tool   used   to   aid   in   building   surfaces   in   a  vertical 

plane. 

Pointing. — Pushing  mortar  into  the  joint  after  the  brick  is  laid. 
Pressed  Brick. — Brick  pressed  in  the  mold  by  mechanical  means  be- 
fore it  is  baked. 
Pudlog. — A  joist  used  for  supporting  scaffold  planks.     One  end  of  a 

pudlog  rests  on  the  scaffold,  and  the  other  end  rests  on  the  face 

tier  of  a  brick  wall. 
Quoin. — Brickwork  in  a  corner. 


GLOSSARY    OF    TERMS    USED.  313 

Racking. — The  method  of  building  the  end  of  a  wall  so  that  it  can  be 
built  on  and  against  without  any  toothers. 

Rake. — The  end  of  a  wall  that  racks  back. 

Reveal. — The  end  of  a  wall,  as  at  a  jamb  or  return. 

Rise. — The  vertical  distance  between  the  level  of  the  bottom  of  the 
skewback  and  the  bottom  of  the  key. 

Rolled. — A  brick  laid  with  an  overhanging  face. 

Routing. — Determining  the  way,  the  time  and  the  method  of  getting 
materials  from  the  point  of  shipment  to  the  place  where  the  work- 
man puts  them  in  place. 

Rowlock. — Bull  header — a  ring  of  brick  on  edge  forming  an  arch. 

Run. — Planks  used  for  workman  to  walk  on. 

Run  of  Kiln. — All  brick  in  the  kiln  except  those  brick  that  are  too 
soft  or  misshapen  to  be  laid  even  in  the  filling  tiers. 

Running  Bond. — Another  name  for  all-stretcher  bond. 

Salamander. — A  heater  having  no  chimney. 

Salmon. — Bricks  that  are  softer  than  light-hard,  and  are  suitable  for 
little  else  than  fire  stopping. 

Scale  Box. — A  derrick  box  made  with  an  open  top  and  one  open  end. 

Segmental  Arch. — An  arch  the  bottom  of  which  is  the  arc  of  a  circle. 

Set. — A  wide  bevelled  edged  chisel  used  for  cutting  brick. 

Set  In. — The  amount  that  the  lower  edge  of  a  brick  on  the  face  tier 
is  back  from  the  line  of  the  top  edge  of  the  brick  directly  below  it. 

Set-off. — Set  in. 

Shanking. — Resting  the  hod  on  the  end  of  the  handle  (or  shank). 

Shell  of  Chimney. — The  outer  wall  of  a  chimney. 

Shove  Joints. — Vertical  joints  filled  by  shoving  bricks  as  they  are 
laid. 

Sighting. — Observing  with  the  eye  the  appearance  of  straightness  of 
a  line,  such  as  the  corner  of  a  wall. 

Skewback. — The  line  on  the  wall  against  which  an  arch  is  laid. 

Slewing-rig. — The  device  used  for  swinging  a  boom  derrick  by  ma- 
chinery. 

Slushed  Joints. — Vertical  joints  filled  by  throwing  in  mortar  with  a 
trowel  after  the  bricks  are  laid. 

Soffit. — The  under  side  of  a  covering  over  an  opening,  such  as  the 
bottom  of  a  cap  or  arch  over  a  window. 

Spirit  Glass. — The  curved  glass  which  contains  alcohol  or  other  non- 
freezing  liquid  in  a  plumb  rule. 

Spirit  Plumb  Rule. — A  plumb  rule  with  a  curved  glass  nearly  full  of 
alcohol  or  other  thin,  non-freezing  liquid.  The  location  of  the 
bubble  with  reference  to  a  mark  on  the  glass  indicates  the  plumb 
position  of  the  edge  face  of  the  plumb  rule. 

Spreader. — A  temporary  board  put  in  a  horizontal  position  half  way 
up  a  window  or  door  frame  to  prevent  the  masonry  from  crowd- 
ing it  inward. 


314  BRICKLAYING    SYSTEM. 

Spring-stay. — A   stay,   made   by  two   pieces    of   board   separated   by  a 

brick,  which  holds  a  scaffold  to  a  wall  by  the  friction  caused  by 

the   spring  of  the  boards. 
Stagings    High.— About    3'8"    with    the    Gilbreth    Scaffold,    about    5'0" 

high   with   the   trestle   horse. 
Stock. — Brick   and   mortar. 
Story  Pole. — A  pole  on  which  all  measurements  of  courses,  openings, 

projections,  off-sets,  corbels,  plates,  and  bottoms  of  beams  of  any 

one   story  are   marked. 
Straight    Arch. — An    arch    whose    soffit    is    in    approximately    a    level 

plane. 
Straight    Edge. — A    board    having    one    or    two    straight    and    parallel 

edges,  used  for  levelling  and  plumbing  longer  surfaces   than   can 

be  reached  with  an  ordinary  spirit  level. 
Stretcher. — A  brick  laid  so  that  only  its  long  side  shows  on  the  face 

of  the  wall. 
Stringing  Mortar. — The  name  of  a  method  where  a  bricklayer  picks 

up    mortar    for    a    large    number    of    brick    and    spreads    it    before 

laying  the  brick. 

Struck  Joint. — A  joint  that  has  the  surface  smoothed  by  a  trowel. 
Tapping. — Pounding    a    brick    down    into    its    bed    of    mortar    with    a 

trowel. 

Template. — A  pattern. 

Tempering  Mortar. — Softening  mortar  by  adding  water  and  stirring. 
Tender. — A    laborer    who    tends    masons.      A    general    name    covering 

hod  and  pack  carriers  and  wheelbarrow  men. 
Three-quarter  Brick. — A  brick  clipped  to  about  three-quarters  its  full 

length. 
Tier. — A  vertical  layer  of  brick;  four  inches,  or  the  width  of  one  brick 

in   thickness. 
Toother. — A  brick  projecting  from  the   end  of  a  wall  against  which 

another  wall  will   be   built. 
Toothing. — The    temporary    end    of    a    wall    built    so    that    the    end 

stretcher  of  every  alternate  course  projects  one-half  its  length. 
Trestle  Horse. — A  four-legged  horse. 
Trig. — The  brick  midway  between  the  leads  that  is  used  to  support 

the  line  from  sagging  or  vibrating  due  to  many  bricklayers  con- 
stantly   disturbing    it. 
Trimmer  Arch. — An   arch   adjoining   trimmer   beams.     The   arch   that 

supports   a   hearth   to  a   fireplace. 
Tub. — A  half-barrel  sometimes    used    in    New    England    for    holding 

mortar. 

Twelve  Inches  (12").— Three  tiers. 
Two  Inch  Piece. — A  closer  about  one-quarter  of  a  brick  in  length  used 

to  start  the  bond  from  the  corner. 
Unit. — An    arrangement    of    headers    and    stretchers    which,    repeated, 

forms    definite    bonds. 


GLOSSARY    OF    TERMS    USED. 


315 


Up  and  Down. — The  body  brick  together  with  the  light  hard  brick. 
Wall  Ties. — Iron   bands   used  to  tie   tiers   of  brick  together  or  to  tie 

the  junction   of  two  pieces  of  a  wall,  such  as  at  corners,  angles, 

and  at  toothing  and  backing. 

Western  Method. — The  stringing  mortar  method. 
Wire  Cut  Brick. — A  brick  having  two  of  its  surfaces  formed  by  wires 

cutting  the  clay  before  it  is  baked. 
Withe. — A  4"  partition   or  tie  between   two  walls,   such  as   two  walls 

of  a  chimney. 


INDEX. 


"All  Stretcher  Bond" 

Anchor   irons    

Apparatus,     transportation. 
Apprentices,     contests     be- 
tween      

Fixing-   habits   of 

Garb   of    

Hazing    of    

Hiring    of    

Limiting  number  of 

Making  of  charts  by 

Methods   to   be    taught... 

"Motion   study"    for 

Profit    from    

Rapid  work  expected  of. . 

Study     of     rules,     photos 
and    charts    by 

Teaching  of    

Teaching    rapidity    to.  ... 

Tools    for    

Training-   of    

Work  expected  of .  .  , 

Usefulness  of,  in  contests 
Apprenticeship,  term  of. . . . 
Arches,  alterations  in 

Choice  of  bricklayers  for 

Cutting-   of    

Laying-    

Packing    of   brick    for 

Rubbing   of  brick   for.... 

Skewback     patterns 

Arches  and  chimney  breasts654-71 
Athletic     contests,     division 
into    groups    for 

Interest  of  men  in 

Maintaining-  of  interest  in 

Organizing  effect  of 

Pace  of  men  disclosed  by 

Reducing   of   costs   by.... 

Rewarding  of  winners   of 

Saving  of  foreman's  time 
by    

Tendency     toward     care- 
less work   in. . 


Blackboard,       keeping       of 

score    on    

Blocking,    advantages    of. . . 
Bond     81 

"All    Stretcher"    . . 

Charts     

Common     

English     

English  Cross   

Flemish    

Flemish    Cross    . . . 

Flemish   Spiral    .  . . 

Garden  Wall    

Herringbone     

Laying  out  of 

Ornamental    

Plumb     

Stones     

Bonding  of  tiers    .  .  . 

Boom    derricks,    usefulness 

on    large   job 


Rule. 

Page. 

Rule.     Page. 
Border  pole    508          136 

891 
843 

216 
204 

Boston   Scaffold,    staying  of         160             47 
Usefulness   of    ....              .         154             44 

113 

28 

Brick,     built     against     ad- 
joining wall                                 616           162 

3 
23 
5 
11 

1 
5 
1 
2 

Culls,    number    of  419           118 
Determining  of  outside  of           14               2 
Estimating     number     laid 
of                                                        64             14 

2 
1 

1 
1 

Face,    delivering    of  413           117 
Fire                                                     620           163 

44 

10 

Hand   made      15               2 

32 

18-24 
1 

18 

6 

4-5 
1 
4 

Laid    below    ground  615           162 
Laid   in  freezing-  weather         601           161 
Laid  on  a  curved  vertical 
surface            611           162 

44 

10 

Laid  with  terra  cotta....         766           189 
Laying  of                                           17               3 

9-13 
19 
6-7-8 
1-46 

2 
4 
1-2 
1-10 

Laying   to   line    of  26               5 
Order  of  picking  up   of.  .           35               7 
Packed,    unloading   of....         414           117 
Picking   up   of                                  33               6 

10-12 
53 

2 
12 

Piling     in     wheelbarrows 
of                                            77-80-81       15-16 

4 
681 
662 

1 

173 
170 

Piling-  of    415           117 
Pressed   face    39               8 
Wire  cut    ...                    .               17               3 

654 
688 
660 

170 
175 
170 

'"'Brick  and   Brick"    method         744           186 
Bricklayer—  demand     for.  .  .           46             10 
Dignity   of  trade  of                       46             10 

677 
683 

172 
173 

Inspection  of  stagings  bv         183             55 
Standing  place   for  181             54 

54-717 

58 
59 

170-180 

13 
13 

Tending-    from    above  127             34 
Bricklayer's    Tools    431-473  120-131 
Bricklaying   —    benefits    of, 
knowledge    of                               46             10 

60 
59 
90 
59 

13 
13 
17 
13 

Dignity    of    46             10 
Bricklaying  System,  impor- 
tance to  apprentice  of.  .           45             10 
Bricks                     .  .      .  .             382-430  114-119 

93 

18 

Absorptiveness   of    386           114 
Bats                                                    396           115 

59 

13 

Checking    of    383           114 
"Closer"                                              403           116 

57 
62-63 

12 
13-14 

Covering    of     423           119 
Culled,    piling-    of  422           119 
Culler,  position  of  418           118 
Culling    of     412           117 

791 

193 

Depressions   in    ....          .  .         405           116 

2-974 
891 

200-225 
216 

For    arches     394           115 
For   cutting-    395           115 

974 

855 

225 
209 

Lowering   loads   of    131             35 
Ordering  of        .  .      .  .                   382           114 

915 
923 
900 
911 
933 

G9n 

218 
219 
217 
218 
220 

9->A 

Piling    for    lowering-  127-128             34 
Special,     ordering    of  393           115 
"Three-quarter   brick"...         404           116 
Varying    in    size    of  401           116 
Vertical  tier  of  403          116 
Wetting  of                                       425           119 

938 

221 

Wooden    .  .                                       399           116 

819 
942 

892 

201 
221 
216 

Brickwork,   cutting   out  of.  .718-811  181-199 
Covering  projections  of..         184             56 
Painting  joints  in  648           108 

845 

204 

Patching    of     71^-811  181-199 

847 

206 

Pointing  of   650           168 

124 

32 

Protection  of   i.70             49 
Tearing    down    of  718-811  181-199 

317 


INDEX. 


Rule.     Page. 


Carpenter-handling  of  win- 
dow   frames    by 

Carts — use   of    

Charts,    apprentices'    

Chimney  breasts    654 

Laying  of    

Chimneys— tall    297' 

Chutes 

Cleats   on   elevators 

Common   Bond    ............ 

Construction — methods  of. .   94' 

Contests,    division    of   work 

for 

Speed,     between    appren- 
tices      

Curved      vertical      surface, 
laying  brick  against. . . . 

Cutting  out,   speed   in 

Cutting  out  brickwork 718- 

Cutting  out  hammer 


187  58 

116  28 

44  10 

717  170-180 
178 

92-103 
181 
33 
209 
19-27 


•340 
721 
11MJ 

xr>f> 
ill 


611  162 

723  182 

811  181-199 
438  121 


Definition    of    Bond. 812 

Derrick    with    slewing    rig, 

usefulness  of   125 

Derricks,    boom    124 

Devices,    transportation 113 

Disturbing  the  line,  avoid- 
ance of 26 

Dumping    platform,    econ- 
omy of  123 


Eastern    method    of    laying 

brick    28-29 

Elevators       for       handling 

stock     126 

Engine  beds,    contests   on..  58 

"English  Bond"    920 

English    Cross-bond     923 


200 


33 

13 

219 

219 


Falling      brick,      protection 

against     184            56 

Field     System,     Importance 

to    apprentices    of 45             10 

Finishing,    planning   of 637           165 

Finishing,       jointing       and 

pointing    637-653165-169 

Fire    places,    location    of. .  710 

First  class  men,  value  of.  90 

Flat  arches,    supporting    of  145 

Flemish     bond     9,00 

Flemish    spiral    bond 933 

Flues,  making  of  711 


Foremen,  duties  of 48-50 

Paying  of   47 

Rating  of   47 

Fountain    trowel    468 

Freezing   weather   —   brick 

laid  during    601 


Gage    436 

Galvanized   iron   ties    841 

Gangs,    dividing   into   units 

of    50 

Grouping  of  tenders  into  67 

Garden  wall  bond 930 


179 
17 
41 
217 
220 
179 
11 
11 
11 
130 

161 


120 
204 

11 

14 

220 


Rule. 
Gilbreth    Packet    System. .  .272-296 

Bricks,     unloading    of 273 

Definition   of    272 

Packet    method,     advan- 
tages   of    291 

Economy    of 296 

Packets,    making  of 275 

Number  of  brick  on 280 

Packs — handling   of    277 

Placing   on    stock    plat- 
form  of. 279 

Transferring  to  wall  of  286 

Weight  of   281 

Tiers,    order    of    laying 

of    290 

Gilbreth        Scaffold,        Hod 

type    195-244 

Advantages    of    195 

Attaining  of  speed  by..  .  .  242 
Boss   of   the    wall,    duties 

of    217 

Circuit,    tenders    212 

Cleats,    distance    between  216 

Economy    gained   by    240 

Erection  of  - 197 

Floor       above       elevator, 

height    of    218 

Hod,       arrangement       of 

brick   in 228 

Loading    of    227 

Jacking  up  of 219 

Mortar,    regulating    qual- 
ity  of    217 

Platform,    tenders     223 

Platforms    on    209 

Profitableness  of   229 

Runs,     different,     useful- 
ness of    214 

Runs,    long    cleated 215 

Scaffold     horses,     staying 

of    224 

Stagings    for    backing   up  237 
Stock,    regulating    supply 

of    217 

Taking-  down  of 243 

Tenders'  circuit,  planning 

of    212 

Tenders'    platform,     loca- 
tion  of    223 

Tenders'       run,       use      of 

wheelbarrow   on 213 

Wall,  backing  up  of 231 

Wall,    building    overhand 

of    232 

Gilbreth     Scaffold,     Packet 

type    245-271 

Advantages    of    245 

269-271 

Bricklayers'   platform  on.  258 

Jacking  up  of 269 

Mortar    boxes    on 254 

Regulating    height    of 263 

Setting   up    of 249 

Stock  platform  on 255 

Tracks    for    packets    on..  255 

Use   of  packs   on 268 

Wheelers'    platform   on 256 

Grade  marks    512 


Hand    leather    456 

Hand   made   brick,    descrip- 
tion   of    15-16 

Determining   top    of ......  16 

Laying    of     17 

Hanging  bar   scaffold 178 


Page. 

85-91 
85 
85 


91 
85 
89 
85 

88 
89 
89 

90 

59-74 
59 
73 


86 

or, 

73 

61 

66 

Sfl 

68 
66 


f>4 


71 


69 
69 

75-84 
75 

83-84 
78 
79 
77 
81 
75 
77 
77 
81 
77 
137 


126 


2-3 

3 


52 


INDEX. 


319 


Rule. 

Page. 

Herringbone   Bond    

938 

221 

Hod   Carriers,    rules  for... 

68-74 

14-15 

Hods,     emptying    of  

70 

14 

Filling.       shanking        anc 

dropping   of    

69 

14 

Horses  and   carts,    use   of.  . 

116 

28 

1 

Inclined    runways    

117 

28 

Inside    Scaffold,    types    of.  . 

193 

58 

Iron    brick    clamp  

414 

117 

Isometric         drawings         o: 

• 

bond,   purposes  of  

847 

205 

J 

Jointer    

435 

120 

Apprentices     

8 

2 

Use    of    

643 

166 

Jointing     

637-653 

165-169 

Method  of   

641 

166 

Joints,    filling    of  

730 

184 

Finishing  of   

646 

167 

"Large    Horizontal" 

749 

187 

Shove    

747 

187 

L 

Large    horizontal   joints.... 

749 

187 

Laying    brick    against    the 

wall    of    an    adjoining 

property     

616 

162 

Laying     brick     in     freezing 

I 

weather    

601 

161     j 

On  a  curved  vertical  sur- 

face     

611 

162 

Laying    fire    brick  

620 

163 

Laying  to   line    

26 

5 

Leaders     of     hod     carriers, 

duties   and   pay   of  

73-74 

15 

Of   wheelbarrow    men  .... 

78-82 

15-16 

Leads,   advantages  of  small 

40 

9 

Building    of    

484 

133 

Level   marks    

513 

137 

Line,    care    of  

40 

9 

Disturbing   of  

26-40 

5-9 

Laying    to     

26 

5 

Making    fast    of  

40 

9 

Placing    of    

40 

9 

Use   of   thin  

40 

9 

Linen    mason's    line  

475 

132 

Lines,     splicing    of  

495 

134 

Stringing    of    
For    Pilasters    

477 
480 

132 
132 

Lines,   plumbs  and  poles... 

474-525 

132-139 

Lining    of     old    wall      with 

new    

779 

192 

"Lipped"    course    

17 

4 

Long  plumb  rule  

432 

120 

M 

Material,    piling    of  

149-151 

43 

Planning   for    
Routing   of    

113 
112-131 

28 
28-35 

Management,   methods   of.. 

47 

11 

Measurements,    checking  of 

522 

139 

Megaphone,  use  of.  

121 

31 

Men,    grouping   of  

48-50 

11 

Selecting  of   

48 

11 

Value   of   first-class  

90 

17 

Rule.     Page. 
Methods    of    construction..    94-111       19-27 

Athletic    contests,    exam- 
ples,  on   large  job,    of..  108-109  27 

Brick,    disposal,    on    large 

job,    of    108  27 

Bricklayers,   shifting  of. .         106  21 

Lowell  Laboratory,  build- 
ing  of    97  19 

Materials,       arriving      on 

site    of    95  1& 

Method   of   attack,    vary- 
ing of   96  19 

Parts,    routing    of 94  19 

Routing,   diagraming  of .  .  95  19 

Units,    division    of    build- 
ings  into    98  19 

Workmen,   shifting  of 100  20 

Method  of  laying  brick  un- 
der special  conditions.  .601-636  161-164 
Methods    of    management..     47-93       11-18 
Mortar    341-381  104-113 

Bed,    location    of 358  106 

Bed,    protection    of 359  107 

Bedding  long  stones   in..         380  113 

Box    362  108 

Boxes   on    Gilbreth    Scaf- 
fold              211  65 

Care   in    using   right 
amount  of 

Cement,    use    of 

Cement   in    

Covering  steel   frames 
with     

Deterioration  of  wood  by 

Lime,  making  of 

Lime  in    

Men,   steady  work   for... 

Reaching    for    

Shovels    for    

Tender  for   

Throwing   of    

Motion    Study    526-600 


Charts 
Deductions    of 

from    

Importance  of 


methods 


Importance  to  apprentice 
Increase  of  wages 

through    

Influence  on  scaffold  of.  . 

Opportunity    for    

Purposes  of  illustrations 

Rating  of  men  by 

Teaching    power    of 

Timing   motions   by 

Usefulness    of    charts    of. 
Murray  Suspended  Scaffold, 
advantages    of    . 


40 

9 

355 

106 

349 

105 

372 

111 

377 

113 

352 

106 

349 

105 

357 

106 

34 

6 

367 

109 

364 

108 

37 

7 

•600 

140-160 

531 

141 

601 

160 

21 

4 

526 

140 

536 

141 

546 

142 

572 

155 

527 

140 

533 

141 

541 

142 

21 

4 

581 

157 

594 

159 

176 


Nails,     driving    in 

brickwork  of   . 

Testing   of    


N 
green 


,146-147 
169 


Observation  tower  

Organization,  aid  given  by 

athletic  contests  toward 

Ornamental  bond  

Outrigger  scaffold,  building 

of  

Outriggers,  advantages  of. 
Overhang  


59 
954 

153 

175 

41 


51 


31 

13 
223 

43 

50 

9 


320                                                      INL 

Rule.     Page. 

P 

Packet    system,    Gilbreth.  .272-296       85-91 
Patching    brickwork    718-811181-199 
"Pick    &    Dip"    method    of 
laying   brick    29              6 

)EX. 

Set 
Set 
"Se 
Ii 

Sev 
Shi 
"Sh 
She 
She 
Sig] 
"Si 
C 
Spe 

Spii 
Spr 

Sta 
Ii 
L 
Stir 
Sto 

Sto 

M 
M 
U 
Sin 

"St 

"St 

Stu 
Sys 

Tall 
B 
B 

Cl 
C 

E 
FJ 
Ir 
M 

N 
Oi 
Pi 
"] 
P] 
R< 
Sc 
Sr 
T< 
T( 
Ti 
Ti 
TA 

W 

w 

Teai 

Ten 

Ten 
Thu 

Plant  layout,   plans   for  114            28 
Platform    for   dumping  123             32 
Platforms  on  Gilbreth  Scaf- 
fold             209            64 

"Plumb    Bond"     892          216 
Pole           506           136 

946           222 
Plumbing   a    corner  482          133 

Plumbs     474-525132-139 

Plumb  straight  edge  434          120 

Pointing     637-653165-169 

Poles                                               474-525  132-139 

Pressed    face    brick,    dif- 
ficulty  of   laying   of  39              8 
Rules  for  layout  of  40              9 
Projections    of   brickwork, 
covering   of        184             56 

Putlog    hole     filling   of  776a          190 

R 

Roll,   good  appearance  of  .  .           40              9 
"Rolled"  course   17              4 

Routing,    economy   of    time 
and   labor   in  112            28 

Of  material                             112-131       28-35 

"Running  Bond"    892           216 
Runways    inclined    117            28 

S 

Sand,  digging  of  341          104 

Amount    in    mortar  347          105 
Digging   of    341           104 

Loading  carts  with                    341           104 

Screening    of     344           105 

Scaffold,  Gilbreth,  Montreal 
job   illustrating  use   of.         136            36 
Gilbreth,  hod  type  194-244       59-74 
Gilbreth,   packet   type.  .245-271       75-84 
Hanging     178             52 
Inside   193            58 

Scaffolds    132-194       36-58 

Backboard,   staying  of...         148            43 
Bricklayer,   left  handed..         139            38 
Ledger  board,    nailing   of        168            48 
Usefulness   of  167            48 

Left    handed     bricklayer, 
placing    of   mortar   and 
brick  for                                     139            38 

Mortar  boards,  placing  of        138            37 
Placing   on   blank  walk 
of                                      .  .         139             39 

Placing  of           138             37 

Mortar  tubs,  placing  of.  .         138            37 
Outriggers,    attaching    to 
beams    of    144            41 

Fastening    for                             143             40 

Pole,    splicing   of  166            47 
Putlogs,     supporting    of.  .         156             45 
Runs   for  hod    carriers...         142             40 
Spring   stays,   placing  of...     158             45 
Scale  box,  saving  by  use  of        152            43 
Score,  importance  of  keep- 
ing   of    60            13 
Keeping  on  blackboard  of           62             13 
Segmental  arches,  support- 
ing of   145             41 

Second-hand   brick,    use   of        728          184 

Set,    apprentices    

"Set  in,"  advantages  of... 
Importance  of  uniformity 

in     

Sewer  work,    tending 

Shields,   for  shoveling  on. 87- 
"Short  cuts,"   dangers  of.. 
Short  plumb   rule.., 

joints     

"Sighting,"    advantages    of 

Corner,    method    of 

ed      contests,      between 

apprentices     

Spirit   plumb   rule,    appren- 
tices      

waders,     in    window 

frames    

Staging,    choice    of 

Inspection  of   

Location   of    

Stints,    equalizing  of 

Stock,    reaching    and    pick- 
ing up   of   


Rule.  Page. 

442  121 

8  2 

40  9 

42  10 

127  34 

88-89  17 

24  5 

432  120 

747  187 

515  138 

38  8 


3  1 

7  1 

141  40 

132  36 

183  55 

132  36 

55  12 

34  6 

501  135 

948  222 

202  63 

65  14 

65  14 

645  166 

892  216 

30  6 

Study,    motion    526-600140-160 

System,    Gilbreth    Packet.  .272-296  85-91 


Marking   of    

Marking    off    of 

Usefulness  as  check  of. . 
Straight  Edge,  use  in  joint- 
ing   of    

"Stretcher    Bond"     

"Stringing  mortar"  method 
of  laying  brick. 


Tall    Chimneys     297-340  92-103 

Batter  sticks,  marking  of  334  102 
Bricklayers,     testing    ac- 
curacy  of    361  101 

Choice  of  men  for 325  98 

Clean-out     door,     placing 

of    335  103 

Elevators   in    302  93 

Fancy  brick  work  on 329  101 

Iron   cap,    inspecting  of.  .  338  103 

Mortar,   examining  of 320  94 

Handling    of    305  93 

Number  of  men  for 332  101 

Outside  Scaffold   on 329  101 

Packet    method     on 328  99 

"Peach    basket"    337  103 

Protection  of  men  near. .  321  94 

Round    319  94 

Scaffold  at  top  of 308  93 

Smoke   flue,    placing   of. .  335  103 

Templet  for   324  98 

Tending   of   masons    on..  327  99 

Tracks   into    297  92 

Transporting  of  stock  on  297  92 
Typical  methods  of  build- 
ing      322  97 

Well  opening  of 315  94 

Working    foremen     334  102 

Tearing  down,  cutting  out 
and  patching  brick- 
work   718-811  181-199 

Tenders,      most     profitable 

arrangement  of    67  14 

Terra  cotta,  brick  laid  with  766  189 

Thumb    leather    .  457  126 


Tools,    apprentice's    
Bricklaver's                             43 

IND 

Rule.     Page. 
431           120 
1-473  120-131 
447           122 
791           193 
174             50 
120             31 
113             28 
113             28 

25               5 
488           134 
6               1 
440            121 

27               5 

43             10 
50              11 
85              16 

EX. 
w 

Wall,    arrangement   of 
bricklayers  for   .  . 

Rule. 

51 
53 
637 

54 

718 

28-30 
68-75 

185 
190 
185 
86 
17 
91 
92 

56 
48 

61 

321 

Page. 

11 

12 
165 

12 

181 

6 

14-15 

56 
58 
56 
16 
3 
17 
17 

12 

11 

13 

Sharpening     of  
Toothing,    avoidance    of.  ... 

Tower,    observation    

Division  into  parts  of.  ... 
Finishing   of        

Handling  of  irregularities 
in 

Transportation,    apparatus. 
Devices,    planning    of.  .  .  . 
"Tricks  of  Trade,"  dangers 

Throwing  over  of  
"Western"    method   of   lay- 
ing  brick    

Wheelbarrow   men    

Trig     

Window     frames,     handling 

Trowel,    apprentice's  

Gilbreth    patent    
Holding   of    

U 

Uniformity    of    set    in    and 
roll,    importance    of.  ... 
Unit,   number  of  men  in... 
Unloading   cars,    method   of 

Staying   of    
Winners,    rewarding    of.  ... 
Wire  cut  brick,   laying  of.  . 
Work,   economy  of  host.... 
Importance   of   quality   of 
Indication     of     character 
in     

Laving    out    of 

Most     profitable     division 
of    . 

"Field  System" 

By  FRANK  B.  GILBRETH,  M.  Am.  Soc.  M.  E. 

This  book  contains  200  pages  of  rules  and 
instructions  for  the  guidance  of  the  author's  foremen 
and  superintendents.  In  its  present  form  the  book 
is  the  outgrowth  of  twenty-odd  years  of  experience 
in  the  contracting  business,  and  embodies  scores  of 
suggestions  for  economizing  and  increasing  the  output 
of  the  men  on  the  job.  In  making  famous  the 
"Cost-plus-a-fixed-sum"  contract  system,  Mr.  Gilbreth 
has  likewise  made  famous  his  ''Field  System,"  only  a 
few  excerpts  from  which  have  heretofore  appeared 
in  print. 

In  making  public  his  "Field  System"  the  author 
is  performing  a  service  to  the  public  that  is  com- 
parable with  the  action  of  a  physician  in  disclosing 
the  secret  of  his  success  in  curing  a  disease.  The 
disease  that  Gilbreth 's  "Field  System"  aims  to  cure 
is  the  hit  or  miss  method  of  doing  contract  work. 
System  supplants  slovenliness,  and  makes  sloth  an 
absolute  impossibility. 

"7  would  have  given  $1,000  for  this  book  a  year  ago. 

-W.  H,  BURR 

Knoxville,  Tenn. 

Leather,  4^x7  inches;  194  pages;  illustrated. 
Price,  $3.00  Net 

The  Myron  C.  Clark  Publishing  Co. 

355  Dearborn  Street,  CHICAGO 


"Concrete    System" 

By  FRANK  B.   GILBRETH,  M.  Am.  Soc.  M.  E. 
CONTENTS 

PART    I.—  RULES   AND    INSTRUCTIONS.  CHAPTER  XL  —  MAKING,  JETTING, 

CHAPTER  I-GENERAL  OUTLINES  £ND    D  RIVING     CORRUGATED    CON- 

OF  THE  CONCRETE  SYSTEM.  CKfi,r^  i'il^b. 

™^o  TT      n™7T>AT    T.T-TT7Q  CHAPTER  XII.  —  DIRECTIONS    FOR 

CHAPTER  II.—  GENERAL  RULES.  MAKING  WATERPROOF  CELLARS 

CHAPTER  III.—  FORMS.  CHAPTER  XIII.  —  FIRE    TESTS    OF 

CHAPTER  IV.—  REINFORCEMENT.  CONCRETE  CONSTRUCTIONS. 

CHAPTER  V.—  MIXING.  PART   II.  —  PROGRESS    PHOTOGRAPHS 
CHAPTER  VI.-TRANSPORTATION.  °F  SUCCESSFUL  CONCRETE  WORK. 


CHAPTER  VII.-CONCRETING. 

CHAPTER  VIII.—  TESTING.  9°n£ret1  P°wer  Station  in  Seattle   Wash.— 

CHAPTER  IX.-FINISHING.  in^So,  CaT^  *"""   ^^  '" 

CHAPTER  X.—  CAST  STONE.  INDEX. 

This  book  is  neither  a  text-book  nor  a  treatise;  it  gives  no  definitions 
of  concrete,  no  statement  of  its  properties,  no  calculations  or  theoretical 
discussions;  it  assumes  that  the  men  for  whom  it  is  intended  are  familiar 
with  concrete  and  construction  in  concrete  before  they  ever  see  the  book. 
It  is  an  exclusively,  intensely  practical  book,  partaking  of  the  nature  of  a 
set  of  specifications  telling  how  to  do  the  work  systematically,  expe- 
ditiously,  safely  and  economically.  What  it  contains,  what  it  omits,  how 
it  is  arranged,  every  line  written  or  drawn  —  all  are  indicated  and  domin- 
ated by  the  question  of  dollars  and  cents  to  gain  or  lose  and  a  business 
reputation  to  preserve  or  injure. 

The  subject  has  been  divided  into  two  parts  as  indicated  by  the  table 
of  contents:  Rules  and  Instructions,  and  Progressive  Photographs  of 
Successful  Concrete  Work.  In  the  first  part  has  been  included  certain 
matter  which  should  be  kept  before  the  eyes  of  employees  ;  the  accepted 
standards  for  testing  cement;  the  most  used  specification  for  cement;  a 
widely-known  code  of  rules  for  conducting  fire  tests;  a  well-known 
municipal  building  regulation  —  all  matter  which  easily  justifies  its 
presence  in  the  work.  The  rules  are  numbered  consecutively'and  are  well 
illustrated  by  photographs  taken  from  actual  work  in  progress. 

"This  is  one  of  the  best  works  of  the  kind  that  we  have  seen  .  .  .  it  is  an  accumula- 
tion of  good,  practical  knowledge,  along  lines  pertaining  to  concrete  buildings."— 
Canadian  Engineer. 

"The  crystallization  of  the  field  of  experience  and  judgment  of  a  widely  known  con- 
struction man."  —  Concrete  Engineering. 

"The  book  will  be  thankfully  received  by  many  a  contractor  struggling  with  the  small 
but  many  problems  of  reinforced  concrete  construction.  It  will  also  be  appreciated  by  the 
engineer  who  desires  to  specify  for  his  structures  something  more  than  the  proportions  of 
the  concrete  and  the  character  of  its  aggregates."  —  Cement. 

8^x11  inches;    184  pages;   220  illustrations;  10   folding  plates,  showing 

construction  details.     Printed  on  high-class   coated  paper 

and  bound  in  full  flexible  morocco. 

Price,  $5.00  Net,  Postpaid 

FOR  SALE  BY 

The  Myron  C.  Clark  Publishing  Co. 

355  Dearborn  Street,  CHICAGO 


Engineering=Contracting 

EVERY  WEDNESDAY    $2    FOR  THE  52  ISSUES 

This  is  the  great  METHODS  AND  COST  paper, 
and  is  the  only  engineering  paper  published  whose 
editor  has  had  actual  contracting  experience  and 
who  is  at  the  same  time  a  practicing  engineer.  It 
is  devoted  to  the  interest  of  the  engineer  as  a 
builder,  and  its  articles  deal  with  those  practical 
features  which  enable  engineers  and  contractors 
to  make  close  and  accurate  estimates  and  foremen 
to  handle  work  in  the  most  economical  manner 
possible.  The  information  concerning  costs  is  not 
contract  prices,  but  actual  costs  taken  from  the 
private  records  of  engineers  and  contractors,  and 
so  itemized  and  analyzed  as  to  be  of  inestimable 
value  to  any  person  who  has  to  do  with  making 
bids  and  estimates  or  in  checking  estimates  on 
such  work  as  is  described  in  each  article. 

Articles  showing  the  methods  and  cost  of  con- 
crete and  reinforced  concrete  construction  in 
various  classes  of  work  are  published  each  week; 
also  articles  giving  the  actual  cost  of  erecting  con- 
crete, steel  and  wooden  bridges,  this  being  the  first 
time  information  of  this  kind  has  ever  appeared 
in  print;  articles  giving  the  actual  cost  of  labor 
and  materials  required  for  each  and  every  kind  of 
typical  railway  structure,  such  as  station  build- 
ings, section  houses,  water  tanks,  fuel  stations, 
fences,  tunnels,  culverts,  trestles,  bridges  and  an 
analysis  of  the  cost  of  many  different  rail  way  lines. 

No  Engineer  or  Contractor  can  afford  to  be  without  the 

volumes  of  Engineering=Contracting  as  a  refer= 

ence  encyclopedia  on  methods  and  costs. 

Sample  Copies— FREE 

Engineering=Contracting 

355  Dearborn  Street  CHICAGO 


RETURN 
TO—  ^ 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


DUE  NRLF 

MAR  2  6  1985 

~-  0    1  ^O  s./ 

MOLD  ON  BUL 

S£P297995 

NUV  2  a  1985 

1  TTTVV  TVTf*/"1 

rrn/^  fll  '1    (  )  H   M^l 

7  DAY  USE 

AUTO  DISC 

CIRC  ULI  u  5  34 

RECEIVED  BY 

JUNO  11990 

out  ^^lyy- 

ppc  5    1985 

~3£<*£ 

<•*<**•** 

mm  en  «'^  1  8 

i  

MAY  0  1  1992 

, 
inn    r,  ft  <n 

Arl\  L  u  iy 

APR  24  198) 

i  o  j  ;ssz 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DDO,  5m,  12/80          BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


GENERAL  LIBRARY  -  U.C.  BERKELEY 


BDDtmbQSl 


